Nortel Networks Telephone M3110 User Manual
Title page  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5  
Telephones and Consoles  
Description, Installation, and Operation  
Document Number: 553-3001-367  
Document Release: Standard 3.00  
Date: August 2005  
Year Publish FCC TM  
Copyright © Nortel Networks Limited 2005  
All Rights Reserved  
Produced in Canada  
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design  
or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.  
Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, This is the Way, This is Nortel (Design mark), SL-1, Meridian 1, and  
Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Page 3 of 504  
Revision history  
August 2005  
Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000  
Release 4.5.  
September 2004  
October 2003  
Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000  
Release 4.0.  
Standard 1.00. This document is a new NTP for Succession 3.0. It was created  
to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library, which resulted in the  
merging of multiple legacy NTPs. This new document consolidates  
information previously contained in the following legacy documents, now  
retired:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Console Description (553-2201-117)  
Digital Telephones Line Engineering(553-2201-180)  
Meridian 1 Telephones (553-3001-108)  
Meridian 1 European Digital Telephones (553-3001-114)  
Telephone and Attendant Console Installation (553-3001-215)  
M3900 Series Meridian Digital Telephones (553-3001-216)  
Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100)  
Content from Option 11C and 11C Mini Technical Reference Guide also  
appears in Circuit Card: Description and Installation (553-3001-211).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 4 of 504 Revision history  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Page 5 of 504  
Contents  
List of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Subject .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Applicable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Conventions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Related information .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
How to get Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
19  
20  
21  
21  
22  
24  
Attendant consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Engineering codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
27  
28  
29  
31  
48  
57  
59  
77  
M2016S Secure Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 6 of 504 Contents  
Features .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
M 3900 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Automatic Call Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Features .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
M3900 accessories and add-ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Key descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Feature implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
M3900 installation and configuration . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Environmental and safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
M3900 Flash Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Summary of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Determining software, M3900 PSWV, or firmware versions . . . . . . . 261  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Page 7 of 504  
Flash Download advisements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
PSDL installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267  
Dynamic PSDL installation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267  
Detailed Flash Download procedure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
Configuration parameters in LD 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274  
Print Firmware Versions on M3900 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279  
Query Disk Firmware Versions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Commands for system-wide Flash Download of M3900 telephones .  
284  
Digital telephones line engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . 289  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289  
Engineering a telephone line .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290  
Selecting a Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299  
Calculating DC Loop Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299  
Performing Loop Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300  
Measuring Impulse Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302  
Measuring Background Noise .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302  
Calculating Expected Pulse Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302  
Measuring DC Loop Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
Operation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320  
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones . . . . . 323  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324  
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325  
Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 8 of 504 Contents  
Features and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334  
Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342  
Handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353  
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones  
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355  
Packing and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355  
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356  
Designate telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367  
Cross-connect the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones  
add-on modules installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371  
Packing and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372  
Meridian Modular Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373  
Analog Terminal Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375  
Meridian Communications Adapter and Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381  
Power Supply Board (NTZK models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392  
Power Supply Board (NT2K models) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401  
Installing displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404  
External Alerter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416  
Key Expansion Modules .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420  
Asynchronous Data Option .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423  
M2317 Data Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426  
Meridian Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430  
Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Page 9 of 504  
Appendix D: M2317 telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439  
Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439  
Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441  
Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
459  
Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459  
Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460  
Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466  
Terminal options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472  
Configuration and installation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 10 of 504 Contents  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
Page 11 of 504  
List of procedures  
Procedure 1  
Connecting the BLF/CGM to the  
M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Procedure 2  
Checking the functionality of the  
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module . . . . . . . .42  
Procedure 3  
Removing the Busy Lamp  
Field/Console Graphics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Procedure 4  
Installing an Attendant Supervisory Module  
on an M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Procedure 5  
Installing wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Procedure 6  
Installing the M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Procedure 7  
Removing the M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Procedure 8  
Removing the M2250 attendant console top cover . . .62  
Procedure 9  
Installing the M2250 attendant console top cover . . . .63  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 12 of 504  
List of procedures  
Procedure 10  
Performing a loopback test on the  
M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Procedure 11  
Designating keys on an M2250 attendant console . . . 65  
Procedure 12  
Cross-connecting attendant consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Procedure 13  
Entering the M2250 Diagnostics mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Procedure 14  
Testing the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Procedure 15  
Testing the LCD indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Procedure 16  
Testing the data port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Procedure 17  
Testing the ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Procedure 18  
Testing the Busy Lamp Field/Console  
Graphics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Procedure 19  
Checking the Alerter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Procedure 20  
Testing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Procedure 21  
Displaying the firmware version numbers . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Procedure 22  
Displaying and resetting the QMT2 switch status . . . . 85  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of procedures  
Page 13 of 504  
Procedure 23  
Toggling control gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Procedure 24  
Installing the M2016S telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Procedure 25  
M2016S self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
Procedure 26  
Designating the M2016S telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
Procedure 27  
Cross-connecting the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
Procedure 28  
Installing the M3900 Series Digital Telephone . . . . . . .189  
Procedure 29  
Changing the telephone position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190  
Procedure 30  
Changing the telephone angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190  
Procedure 31  
Wall-mounting the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
Procedure 32  
Installing the ACM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Procedure 33  
Installing the wall transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194  
Procedure 34  
Installing the ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Procedure 35  
Installing the Personal Directory PC Utility  
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 14 of 504  
List of procedures  
Procedure 36  
Installing the KBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Procedure 37  
Installing the Single KBA footstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Procedure 38  
Installing the Expansion KBA footstand . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Procedure 39  
Installing the DBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Procedure 40  
Removing the HookSwitch cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Procedure 41  
Installing the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Procedure 42  
Installing the key caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Procedure 43  
Installing the Full Duplex Handsfree cartridge . . . . . . . 206  
Procedure 44  
Displaying the M3900 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
Procedure 45  
Engineering a telephone line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290  
Procedure 46  
Calculating DC loop resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299  
Procedure 47  
Testing foreign voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300  
Procedure 48  
Testing insulation resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301  
Procedure 49  
Testing DC continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of procedures  
Page 15 of 504  
Procedure 50  
Testing capacitance unbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301  
Procedure 51  
Measuring impulse noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302  
Procedure 52  
Measuring background noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302  
Procedure 53  
Calculating expected pulse loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304  
Procedure 54  
Installing an analog (500/2500-type) telephone . . . . . .310  
Procedure 55  
Removing an analog (500/2500-type) telephone . . . . .310  
Procedure 56  
Designating 500-type telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311  
Procedure 57  
Removing the finger wheel from  
analog 500-type telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311  
Procedure 58  
Designating analog 2500-type telephone . . . . . . . . . . .312  
Procedure 59  
Connecting analog (500/2500-type) telephones . . . . . .312  
Procedure 60  
Cross-connecting the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313  
Procedure 61  
Installing Meridian Modular Telephones  
(M2006/M2008/M2008HF/M2616/M2216ACD) . . . . . . . .356  
Procedure 62  
Meridian Modular Telephones self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . .358  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 16 of 504  
List of procedures  
Procedure 63  
Installing the M2317 telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361  
Procedure 64  
Performing the M2317 telephone self-test . . . . . . . . . . 364  
Procedure 65  
Designating Meridian Modular Telephones . . . . . . . . . 368  
Procedure 66  
Cross-connecting the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368  
Procedure 67  
Installing and removing the  
Analog Terminal Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377  
Procedure 68  
Installing and removing the Meridian  
Communications Adapter or the Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389  
Procedure 69  
Connecting the data terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392  
Procedure 70  
Installing and removing the M2006/M2008  
Power Supply Board on NTZK sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393  
Procedure 71  
Installing and removing the M2616/M2216ACD  
Power Supply Board on NTZK sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397  
Procedure 72  
Installing and removing the M2006 or M2008  
Power Supply Board on NT2K sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401  
Procedure 73  
Installing and removing the M2616/M2216ACD  
Display on NTZK sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of procedures  
Page 17 of 504  
Procedure 74  
Installing and removing the M2616 Display  
on NT2K sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408  
Procedure 75  
Installing NT2K28AA displays on  
NTZK or NT2K sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411  
Procedure 76  
Installing and removing the  
External Alerter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416  
Procedure 77  
Installing and removing Key Expansion Module(s)  
on the M2616 and M2216ACD telephones . . . . . . . . . .420  
Procedure 78  
Installing the M2317 data option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427  
Procedure 79  
Installing the M2317 data terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428  
Procedure 80  
Wall mounting instructions for Meridian Modular  
Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432  
Procedure 81  
Installing Meridian European digital telephones . . . . .480  
Procedure 82  
Installing the Power Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481  
Procedure 83  
Adding a Headset (M3310 and M3820 only) . . . . . . . . .483  
Procedure 84  
Adjusting the telephone to the  
desktop shallow-angle position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 18 of 504  
List of procedures  
Procedure 85  
Wall mounting the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Page 19 of 504  
About this document  
This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your  
Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are  
supported in your area.  
Subject  
This document provides technical information about Meridian analog, digital  
and modular telephones and attendant consoles. This information includes  
descriptions, features and specifications; installation and configuration  
procedures; operation; administration; software, wiring and power  
requirements; environmental and safety considerations; installing and using  
add-on modules, data options, and software. A section is also provided on  
engineering and configuring digital telephone lines.  
This document does not provide information about IP Phones. For  
information on IP Phones, refer to IP Phones: Description, Installation, and  
Operation (553-3001-368).  
Note on legacy products and releases  
This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features that  
are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5  
software. For more information on legacy products and releases, click the  
Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel home page:  
www.nortel.com  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 20 of 504  
About this document  
Applicable systems  
This document applies to the following systems:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communication Server 1000S (CS 1000S)  
Communication Server 1000M Chassis (CS 1000M Chassis)  
Communication Server 1000M Cabinet (CS 1000M Cabinet)  
Communication Server 1000M Half Group (CS 1000M HG)  
Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)  
Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)  
Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)  
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis  
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet  
Meridian 1 PBX 51C  
Meridian 1 PBX 61C  
Meridian 1 PBX 81  
Meridian 1 PBX 81C  
Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades may be required on  
the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.  
System migration  
When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000  
Release 4.5 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they  
become CS 1000M systems. Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that  
supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system.  
Table 1  
Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems (Part 1 of 2)  
This Meridian 1 system...  
Maps to this CS 1000M system  
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis  
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet  
CS 1000M Chassis  
CS 1000M Cabinet  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About this document  
Page 21 of 504  
Table 1  
Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems (Part 2 of 2)  
This Meridian 1 system...  
Maps to this CS 1000M system  
CS 1000M Half Group  
Meridian 1 PBX 51C  
Meridian 1 PBX 61C  
Meridian 1 PBX 81  
Meridian 1 PBX 81C  
CS 1000M Single Group  
CS 1000M Multi Group  
CS 1000M Multi Group  
For more information, see one or more of the following NTPs:  
•
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Small System Upgrade  
Procedures (553-3011-258)  
•
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Upgrade  
Procedures (553-3021-258)  
•
•
Communication Server 1000S: Upgrade Procedures (553-3031-258)  
Communication Server 1000E: Upgrade Procedures (553-3041-258)  
Intended audience  
This document is intended for individuals responsible for installing,  
configuring, operating, administering, and troubleshooting Meridian  
proprietary telephones, attendant consoles and add-on modules, and  
engineering and configuring digital telephone lines.  
Conventions  
Terminology  
In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as  
“system”:  
•
Communication Server 1000S (CS 1000S)  
Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M)  
•
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 22 of 504  
About this document  
•
•
Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)  
Meridian 1  
The following systems are referred to generically as “Small System”:  
•
•
•
•
Communication Server 1000M Chassis (CS 1000M Chassis)  
Communication Server 1000M Cabinet (CS 1000M Cabinet)  
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis  
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet  
The following systems are referred to generically as “Large System”:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communication Server 1000M Half Group (CS 1000M HG)  
Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)  
Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)  
Meridian 1 PBX 51C  
Meridian 1 PBX 61C  
Meridian 1 PBX 81  
Meridian 1 PBX 81C  
Related information  
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.  
NTPs  
The following NTPs are referenced in this document:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spares Planning (553-3001-153)  
Equipment Identification (553-3001-154)  
Circuit Card: Description and Installation (553-3001-211)  
Features and Services (553-3001-306)  
Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311)  
Attendant PC: Description, Installation, and Operation (553-3001-320)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About this document  
Page 23 of 504  
•
•
•
Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411)  
Software Input/Output: Maintenance (553-3001-511)  
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Small System Upgrade  
Procedures (553-3011-258)  
•
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System Upgrade  
Procedures (553-3021-258)  
•
•
•
•
•
Analog Terminal Adapter Quick Reference Card  
PC Console Interface Unit Installation Guide  
PC Console Interface Unit Quick Reference Guide  
Installing the Analog Terminal Adapter  
Meridian Digital Telephones: M3901, M3902, M3903, M3904 User  
Guide  
•
Meridian Digital Telephones: M3902, M3903, M3904 Quick Reference  
Guide  
•
•
•
Meridian Digital Telephone: M3905 Call Center User Guide  
Nortel M2016S Secure Set Quick Reference Guide  
Nortel M2016S Secure Set User Guide  
For information on IP Phones, refer to IP Phones: Description, Installation,  
and Operation (553-3001-368).  
Online  
To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation  
link under Support on the Nortel home page:  
http://www.nortel.com  
CD-ROM  
To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer  
representative.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 24 of 504  
About this document  
How to get Help  
Getting Help from the Nortel Web site  
The best source of support for Nortel products is the Nortel Support Web site:  
www.nortel.com/support  
This site enables customers to:  
•
•
•
•
•
download software and related tools  
download technical documents, release notes, and product bulletins  
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation  
search the Support Web site and Nortel Knowledge Base  
open and manage technical support cases  
Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center  
If you have a Nortel support contract and cannot find the information you  
require on the Nortel Support Web site, you can get help over the phone from  
a Nortel Solutions Center.  
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7865).  
Outside North America, go to the Web site below and look up the phone  
number that applies in your region:  
www.nortel.com/callus  
When you speak to the phone agent, you can reference an Express Routing  
Code (ERC) to more quickly route your call to the appropriate  
support specialist. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:  
www.nortel.com/erc  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About this document  
Page 25 of 504  
Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller  
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor  
or authorized reseller, you can contact the technical support staff for that  
distributor or reseller.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 26 of 504  
About this document  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
Page 27 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Engineering codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
28  
29  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display backlight power supply option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DSS-9000 Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp Field . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Attendant Supervisory Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
31  
32  
44  
44  
44  
Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Keyboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Local console controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
48  
48  
51  
55  
55  
56  
56  
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installing wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
57  
57  
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Normal operating ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Packing and unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installing the M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Removing the M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
59  
59  
59  
60  
60  
61  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 28 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Removing the M2250 attendant console top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installing the M2250 attendant console top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Performing a loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Designating keys on the M2250 attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cross-connecting attendant consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
62  
63  
64  
64  
68  
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
M2250 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Attendant PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
M2250 feature key modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
M2250 console diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
M2250 failure codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
M2250 feature operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
77  
77  
78  
79  
81  
87  
89  
Introduction  
Attendant consoles are designed to assist in placing and extending calls into  
and out of a telephone switching system. The console is operated by an  
attendant who is the human interface between the system and the users.  
The M2250 attendant console is a stand-alone, digital attendant console  
designed for telephone traffic control in the CS 1000 and Meridian 1. A  
Digital Line Card (DLC) connects the M2250 to the system.  
The PC-based Console application software allows all functions supported by  
the M2250 to be performed on a computer workstation within a Windows  
95®, Windows 98®, Windows 2000®, or Windows NT® operating system  
environment. The PC-based Console application operates with the PC  
Console Interface Unit (PCCIU). The PCCIU is typically installed under the  
attendant’s PC monitor, and provides connection to the Main Distribution  
Frame (MDF) and PC communications port. The PCCIU is configured as an  
M2250 attendant console in LD 12. Refer to Software Input/Output:  
Administration (553-3001-311) for configuration information  
In the North America, Asia Pacific and CALA market regions, the PCCIU  
and the Attendant PC software are available as a bundled package. In the  
EMEA market region, the PCCIU is available on its own or with a separate  
PC software application called SMILE.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 29 of 504  
For more information on Attendant PC and the PCCIU, refer to the following  
documents:  
•
•
•
Attendant PC: Description, Installation, and Operation (553-3001-320)  
PC Console Interface Unit Installation Guide  
PC Console Interface Unit Quick Reference Guide  
Engineering codes  
Refer to Table 2 for engineering codes for available M2250 attendant console  
models and related equipment. For ordering information, refer to Equipment  
Identification (553-3001-154). For EMEA codes, please contact your local  
Nortel representative.  
Table 2  
Engineering codes for the M2250 and related equipment (Part 1 of 3)  
Engineering  
code  
Model  
Color  
Order code  
Availability  
NT3G40BB-35 BLF/CGM  
NT3G41BB-35 BLF/CGM  
Chameleon  
A0652760  
A0652758  
CALA, Spain, US  
APAC, Canada  
Chameleon  
Grey  
NT3G41BB-98 BLF/CGM  
NT3G42BA-35 BLF/CGM  
Dark Grey  
N/A  
A0652759  
A0642991  
APAC  
Africa, Australia,  
Austria, Belgium, CIS,  
Denmark, Europe,  
Finland, France,  
Germany, Greece,  
Holland, Ireland,  
Middle East, Norway,  
Portugal, Sweden,  
Switzerland, Turkey,  
UK  
NT3G42BA-93 BLF/CGM  
Dolphin  
A0656519  
Australia, UK  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 30 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Table 2  
Engineering codes for the M2250 and related equipment (Part 2 of 3)  
Engineering  
code  
Model  
Color  
Order code  
Availability  
NT3G42BA-98 BLF/CGM  
NT6G00AF-35 M2250  
N/A  
A0642994  
Finland, France,  
Germany  
Chameleon  
Grey  
A0393450  
Africa, APAC, CALA,  
CIS, Greece, Ireland,  
Middle East, NA,  
Portugal, Turkey  
NT6G40BA-35 M2250  
NT6G41BB-35 M2250  
NT6G42BC-35 M2250  
NT6G43BA-35 M2250  
Chameleon  
Grey  
A0642786  
A0642787  
A0642788  
A0642789  
Switzerland  
Chameleon  
Grey  
APAC, Norway  
Denmark  
Chameleon  
Grey  
Chameleon  
Grey  
Finland, Germany  
NT6G43BA-98 M2250  
NT6G44BA-35 M2250  
Dark Grey  
A0642790  
A0642791  
Finland, Germany  
Austria  
Chameleon  
Grey  
NT6G45BA-35 M2250  
NT6G47BB-35 M2250  
Chameleon  
Grey  
A0642792  
A0642793  
Belgium  
France  
Chameleon  
Grey  
NT6G47BB-98 M2250  
NT6G48BC-35 M2250  
NT6G48BC-93 M2250  
NT6G50BA-35 M2250  
NT6G50BA-93 M2250  
Dark Grey  
Chameleon  
Dolphin  
A0642794  
A0642795  
A0642796  
A0642797  
A0642798  
France  
UK  
New Zealand, UK  
Australia  
Australia  
Chameleon  
Dolphin  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attendant consoles  
Page 31 of 504  
Table 2  
Engineering codes for the M2250 and related equipment (Part 3 of 3)  
Engineering  
code  
Model  
Color  
Order code  
Availability  
NT6G53BB-35 M2250  
NT6G55BA-35 M2250  
Chameleon  
A0655900  
A0642799  
Holland  
Spain  
Chameleon  
Grey  
NT6G56BB-35 M2250  
NT6G57BA-35 M2250  
NT6G57BA-98 M2250  
Chameleon  
Grey  
A0642802  
A0642803  
Sweden  
Italy  
Chameleon  
Grey  
Dark Grey  
A0642804  
A0348780  
Italy  
NT3G30AA-35 Adjustable  
stand  
Chameleon  
gray (ash)  
Global  
NT3G30AA-98 Adjustable  
stand  
BTS dark gray  
A0348778  
A0366221  
Global  
Global  
NT7G10AA  
Attendant  
N/A  
Supervisory  
Module (ASM)  
Features  
The M2250 has the following features:  
•
A four-line, 40 character, liquid crystal display (LCD) with backlighting.  
Power, including backlighting, is maintained during building power  
failures with the system’s battery backup, if equipped.  
•
Angle adjustment of the display screen, which can be tilted through 90°  
from horizontal to fully vertical.  
•
•
Scrolling control of lines 2 and 3 of the display screen.  
In Shift mode, the M2250 can have up to 20 Trunk Group Busy (TGB)  
keys.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 32 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
•
•
In Shift mode, the M2250 can have up to 10 extra flexible feature keys  
for a total of 20.  
An optional supporting stand that can be adjusted to nine different  
positions.  
•
•
A handset and headset volume slider control, situated below the dial pad.  
A physical connection to a serial data port through a subminiature D-type  
female connector on the console back wall. This permits connection of  
the console to the serial port of a personal computer.  
•
An optional Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module (BLF/CGM),  
which displays the status of up to 150 consecutive extensions (SBLF) or  
any group of 100 extensions within the system (EBLF) and has many text  
and graphics capabilities.  
•
•
An optional Attendant Supervisory Module (ASM) can be installed.  
Supports transmission level adjustment to meet international  
requirements by accepting and processing downloaded information from  
the system (when this messaging is supported in software). The  
transmission level can be adjusted to one of 16 different levels.  
•
•
Multi-language selection.  
Menus for local console features (Options menu) and diagnostics  
(Diagnostics menu).  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Code blue or emergency relay (associated with ICI 0).  
Time and date system download.  
Alert tone volume and frequency selection.  
Electret or carbon transmitter support.  
Power Fail Transfer switch.  
Keyclick.  
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module  
The Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module (BLF/CGM) can be added  
to an M2250 attendant console.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 33 of 504  
The BLF/CGM can do the following:  
•
•
•
•
display the status (busy or idle) of up to 150 consecutive extensions  
within the system Standard Busy Lamp Field (SBLF)  
display the status (busy or idle) of any hundred group of DNs within the  
system Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF)  
display which attendant console is the supervisory console and which  
consoles are active  
display supplementary information about individual extensions, such as  
the reason the person is away (business, vacation, or illness), when the  
person is due to return, and an alternate extension where calls to the  
person should be directed  
•
•
•
•
display a company logo  
display graphics  
display text in any one of eight languages  
have its screen contrast adjusted for easy viewing  
Power requirements  
The BLF/CGM obtains its power through the attendant console. See Figure 1  
on page 35. The requirements are as follows:  
•
•
a reference ground line (0 V)  
power source of 5 V for the CMOS electronics that control the Lamp  
Field Array module (c. 50 mA)  
•
•
power source of –12 V for the display of the Console Graphics Module  
(c. 10 mA)  
backlighting power  
The BLF/CGM has a battery that provides backup power to maintain the  
Supplementary Information when the console is powered down. The battery  
lifetime is five years. To replace the battery, return the BLF/CGM to the  
supplier.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 34 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Installation  
The BLF/CGM mounts on the back of the attendant console and is held on by  
snap-fits and screws. It is connected to the console using a 16-way connector  
that is located on the keyboard Printed Circuit Board (PCB). This connector  
is accessed through a rectangular knockout section located underneath the  
casing overhang at the Meridian logo location. The attendant console’s top  
cover must be removed to install the BLF/CGM.  
Refer to the following procedures to install the BLF/CGM:  
•
•
•
Procedure 1, “Connecting the BLF/CGM to the M2250 attendant  
console”, on page 35  
Procedure 2, “Checking the functionality of the Busy Lamp Field/  
Console Graphics Module”, on page 42  
Procedure 3, “Removing the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics  
Module”, on page 43  
Refer to the M1250/M2250 Attendant Console User Guide or the Busy Lamp  
Field/Console Graphics Module User Guide for further information.  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Follow normal antistatic precautions when installing the  
BLF/CGM on the attendant console.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attendant consoles  
Page 35 of 504  
Figure 1  
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module on the M2250 attendant console  
BLF/CGM  
M2250 Attendant Console  
553-AAA1718.EPS  
Procedure 1  
Connecting the BLF/CGM to the  
M2250 attendant console  
1
Disconnect the main power/system cable from the rear of the attendant  
console, and remove the handset jack plug from the side.  
2
Move the adjustable display to the down position to protect it from  
damage while installing the BLF/CGM. Move the volume slider switch to  
the far left. See Figure 2 on page 36.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 36 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 2  
Volume slider position  
Move Volume Slider  
to left-most position  
553-AAA0626  
3
4
Place the attendant console facedown on a properly prepared work  
surface, taking care to avoid scratching or damaging the top cover or  
display. Remove the adjustable stand, if required.  
The stand is secured with four screws. Remove the stand as a complete  
assembly, and set aside.  
Remove the 12 fastening screws in the base of the attendant console that  
secure the top cover to the console base. See Figure 3 on page 37.  
Holding the console base and cover firmly, turn it over so that the top  
cover is on, facing up.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Attendant consoles  
Page 37 of 504  
Figure 3  
Removing the fastening screws  
Do Not Remove  
These Screws  
Remove These  
12 Screws  
Polystyrene  
Foam Sheet  
Do Not Remove  
These Screws  
553-AAA0627  
5
6
Raise and hold the top cover to remove the single cable connector only.  
The alerter cable does not need to be removed. See Figure 4 on page 38.  
Remove the top cover, and place it upside down to the left of the attendant  
console.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 38 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 4  
Removing the top cover  
Top cover  
Base  
Remove flat cable  
553-AAA1719.EPS  
7
8
9
Remove the knockout section on the back of the attendant console (see  
Figure 5 on page 39) with a small screwdriver or similar tool. Remove any  
remnants of the breakaway tags.  
Feed the flat ribbon cable for the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics  
Module (BLF/CGM) through the knockout hole in the base of the  
attendant console.  
Hold the BLF/CGM unit over the console in a vertical position, ensuring  
that the two locators on the bottom bracket of the BLF/CGM are located  
in the knockout hole.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 39 of 504  
Figure 5  
Attendant console knockout section  
Knockout Section  
(Clean Away 6 Tags)  
Base  
553-AAA0629  
10 Push down on the attendant console, while holding the BLF/CGM unit,  
until the two locators snap into place. See Figure 6 on page 40.  
11 Fit the BLF/CGM ribbon cable onto the top cover circuit board, into the  
flexible strip connector J4 (so that the blue line on the cable faces away  
from the circuit board).  
12 Hold the top cover over the attendant console and reconnect the cable  
connector(s) onto the base of the attendant console.  
13 Place the top cover on the console. Slide it back and down into place. See  
Figure 7 on page 41. Check that all the cables are in the correct positions  
and that none are trapped.  
14 Push the BLF/CGM display into position by rotating it back (see Figure 7).  
15 Ensuring that the volume slider is fully engaged in the correct slider, hold  
the top cover and console base firmly together. Turn the assembly upside  
down. See Figure 8 on page 42.  
16 Reinsert the 12 screws that secure the top cover to the console base and  
tighten.  
17 Insert the two new screws supplied with the BLF/CGM that attach it to the  
base, and tighten. See Figure 8 on page 42.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 40 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 6  
Connecting the BLF/CGM to the attendant console  
BLF/CGM Flat cable  
BLF/CGM  
Base  
553-AAA0630  
18 Cable in BLF power at the local Main Distribution Frame (MDF) as per  
M2250 cross-connections.  
19 If required, replace the adjustable stand.  
20 Reconnect the main system cable to the rear of the console.  
21 If the BLF/CGM has been correctly installed, the main menu appears  
when power is supplied to the attendant console. Test the BLF/CGM by  
selecting a menu option. Refer to Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics  
Module User Guide for programming information.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 41 of 504  
22 Define the Busy Lamp Field in the system database. Refer to Features  
and Services (553-3001-306).  
23 Test the Busy Lamp Field features using M1250/M2250 Attendant  
Console User Guide.  
Figure 7  
Positioning the top cover and the BLF/CGM  
BLF/CGM  
Rotate Back  
Slide Back  
and Down  
Top Cover  
Base  
553-AAA0632  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 42 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 8  
Attaching the top cover to the attendant console base and BLF/CGM  
Fit 2 new screws  
Re-Insert  
12 Screws  
Polystyrene foam sheet  
553-AAA0633  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 2  
Checking the functionality of the  
Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module  
Use this procedure to check the functionality of the BLF/CGM. Once in this  
menu, the dial pad is in CGM mode. When any dial pad keys are pressed,  
except the pound (#) key, the keys are echoed on the BLF/CGM.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 1, press 5.  
Press keys 0 through 9 and the asterisk (*) on the dial pad. Check the  
CGM to see that they are echoed.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Attendant consoles  
Page 43 of 504  
3
Press the pound (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 3  
Removing the Busy Lamp  
Field/Console Graphics Module  
1
Disconnect the main power/system cable from the rear of the attendant  
console, and remove the handset jack plug from the side.  
2
Move the adjustable display to the down position to protect it from  
damage while removing the BLF/CGM. Also move the volume slider  
switch to the far left (see Figure 2 on page 36).  
3
4
Place the attendant console facedown on a properly prepared work  
surface, taking care to avoid scratching or damaging the top cover or  
display. Remove the adjustable stand, if required.  
The stand is secured with four screws. Remove the stand as a  
complete assembly, and set it aside.  
Remove the 12 fastening screws in the base of the attendant console that  
secure the top cover to the console base. See Figure 3 on page 37.  
Remove the two screws securing the BLF/CGM to the base of the  
attendant console.  
5
6
Holding the console base and cover firmly, turn it back over so that the top  
cover is on, facing up.  
Raise and hold the top cover to remove the single cable connector only.  
The alerter cable does not need to be removed (see Figure 4 on page 38).  
7
8
Unplug the BLF/CGM ribbon cable from the attendant console.  
Remove the top cover and place it upside down to the left of the attendant  
console.  
9
Pull back the snap-fits on the BLF/CGM to disengage the BLF/CGM from  
the attendant console.  
10 Place the top cover on the console. Slide it back and down into place (see  
Figure 7 on page 41). Reconnect all cables in the correct positions, and  
make sure that none are trapped.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 44 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
11 Ensuring that the volume slider is fully engaged in the correct slider, hold  
the top cover and console base firmly together. Turn the assembly upside  
down (see Figure 8 page 42).  
12 Reinsert the 12 screws that secure the top cover to the console base and  
tighten.  
13 If required, replace the adjustable stand.  
14 Reconnect the main system cable to the rear of the console.  
End of Procedure  
For more on the features and operation of the BLF/CGM, refer to the Busy  
Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module User Guide.  
Display backlight power supply option  
An optional 16 V DC power supply (A0367601) can be installed to the Main  
Distribution Frame (MDF) to improve the backlight brightness of the BLF/  
CGM display.  
The display backlight power supply must be cabled in at the local MDF at a  
maximum of 120 ft (36 m) from the attendant console when the BLF/CGM is  
installed (A0367601 – Transformer). This provides all the power  
requirements for the M2250 applications.  
DSS-9000 Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp Field  
The DSS-9000 is a combined 150-lamp busy field and 150-button direct  
station select console that can be attached to an M2250 attendant console. The  
DSS-9000 emulates either a QMT-3 Busy Lamp Field array (standard Busy  
Lamp Field mode) or the Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Mode of a Console  
Graphics Module. For more information on DSS-9000 Direct Station Select/  
Busy Lamp Field, refer to the DSS-9000 Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp  
Field User Guide.  
Attendant Supervisory Module  
A customer may wish to supervise an attendant console. To allow the M2250  
to be supervised, an Attendant Supervisory Module (ASM) must be added.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Attendant consoles  
Page 45 of 504  
An attendant console configured as a supervisor does not need the ASM  
installed.  
To accept the ASM, the minimum vintage M2250 attendant console is  
M2250AD. To fully support the ASM, the minimum vintage BLF/CGM is  
AB. The third PWR TN must be programmed and wired out to support the  
ASM. See Figure 17 on page 71.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 4 to install an ASM on an M2250 attendant  
console.  
Procedure 4  
Installing an Attendant Supervisory Module  
on an M2250 attendant console  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Damage to Equipment  
Before handling internal set components, discharge  
static electricity from hands and tools by touching  
any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
2
Disconnect the main power/system cable from the rear of the attendant  
console, and remove the handset jack plug from the side.  
Move the adjustable display to the down position to protect it from  
damage while installing the ASM. Move the volume slider switch to the  
left-most position.  
3
4
Place the attendant console facedown on a properly prepared work  
surface, taking care to avoid scratching or damaging the top cover or  
display. Remove the adjustable stand, if equipped.  
The stand is secured with four screws. Loosen the screws and remove  
the stand as a complete assembly, and set aside.  
Remove the 12 fastening screws in the base of the attendant console that  
secure the top cover to the console base (see Figure 3 on page 37).  
Holding the console base and cover firmly, turn it back over so that the top  
cover is on, facing up.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 46 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
5
Raise and hold the top cover to remove the single cable connector. The  
alerter cable does not need to be removed (see Figure 4 on page 38).  
Remove the top cover and place it upside down to the left of the attendant  
console.  
6
Holes are located in the upper right-hand side of the attendant console’s  
main PCB, near grid positions D1, D5, and A5. See Figure 9 on page 47.  
Insert one standoff in each of the holes, twisting it until it is secure.  
CAUTION  
Damage to Equipment  
Once a standoff is inserted, it cannot be removed. Be  
sure to place each standoff in the correct hole on the  
main PCB, as shown in Figure 9 on page 47.  
7
Position the ASM board over the J3 connector on the console’s main  
PCB. Align the holes on the ASM board with the standoffs, and carefully  
work the ASM pin connector onto connector J3 until firmly seated. See  
Figure 9 on page 47.  
8
9
Hold the top cover over the attendant console, and reconnect the cable  
connector onto the base of the console.  
Place the top cover on the console. Slide it back and down into place.  
Check that all the cables are in the correct positions, and that none are  
trapped.  
10 Ensure that the volume switch is fully engaged in the correct slider. Hold  
the top cover and console base firmly together. Turn the assembly upside  
down.  
11 Reinsert the 12 screws that secure the top cover to the console base and  
tighten.  
12 If required, replace the adjustable stand.  
13 Reconnect the main system cable to the rear of the console.  
14 Test the supervisory console feature to make sure you can now properly  
supervise the M2250 attendant console. Refer to M1250/M2250  
Attendant Console User Guide.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attendant consoles  
Page 47 of 504  
Figure 9  
Identifying the correct grid positions on the main PCB and attaching the ASM  
Grid marks  
9
5
A
B
Pin connector  
C
D
J3 connector  
Attendant Supervisory Module  
Insert Standoffs here  
M2250 main PCB (cutaway)  
553-AAA0634  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 48 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Physical description  
Figure 10 on page 49 shows a top view of the M2250 attendant console  
layout. The user-accessible components are labeled using a row/column grid  
arrangement. Figure 11 on page 50 shows rear, left side, and bottom views of  
the console. These illustrations show where to find the various components.  
Dimensions  
Dimensions of the M2250 attendant console are as follows:  
Table 1  
Dimensions  
Width  
425 mm (16.75 in.)  
245 mm (9.6 in.)  
Depth  
Height (front)  
25 mm (1 in.)  
Height (back)  
65 mm (2.5 in.)  
Height (with display screen panel up)  
Weight  
115 mm (4.5 in.)  
approximately 2.75 kg (6 lbs)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 49 of 504  
Figure 10  
M2250 attendant console – top view  
Note:  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 50 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 11  
M2250 attendant console – rear, left side, and bottom views  
Display panel (can be tilted upwards)  
Handset/Headset jacks  
Handset/Headset jacks  
Protective plastic cover to be installed when  
connector is not in use  
........  
.......  
.......  
.......  
RS-232 female connector for connection  
to PC with monitor (data port)  
Knockout for access  
to J4 connector  
(BLF/CGM)  
25-pin subminiature D-type male connector for cable  
connecting console to distributing frame  
Rear view  
Handset/Headset jacks  
(same on opposite side)  
Backlighting ON/OFF slider switch  
Left side view  
Front edge of console  
Power Fail Transfer  
switch (PFT)  
On  
Backlighting  
slider switch  
Off  
Handset/Headset jacks  
Adjustable standscrew  
mounting point (total of 4)  
Knockout for access  
to J4 connector  
(BLF/CGM)  
RS-232 female connector  
25-pin D-type male connector  
Bottom view  
553-AAA0575  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 51 of 504  
Keyboard layout  
Refer to Table 3 for the description of keys and Figure 10 on page 49 and  
Figure 11 on page 50 for the location of switches and keys mentioned in this  
section.  
Function keys  
The attendant console has eight function keys, located directly below the  
display screen. Refer to Table 3 for the positions, functions, and markings of  
these keys. For an explanation of the functions assigned to the other attendant  
console keys, refer to “Operation” on page 77.  
Table 3  
Softkey definitions and functions (Part 1 of 3)  
Key number  
(see Figure 10)  
Symbol  
Function  
Centralized Attendant Service  
(CAS) File  
(1)  
C/H  
Prime function (normal):  
Position Busy feature  
(2)  
(3)  
Level 1 function (Shift):  
Night Service feature  
Prime function (normal):  
Selects display screen line 2 for  
scrolling.  
Level 1 function (Shift):  
Selects the Options menu on the  
display screen.  
Alternating between the idle and  
active call display. From the idle  
display, press this key to show  
the active call display.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Page 52 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Table 3  
Softkey definitions and functions (Part 2 of 3)  
Key number  
(see Figure 10)  
Symbol  
Function  
Prime function (normal):  
Scrolls the currently selected line  
to the left.  
(4)  
Level 1 function (Shift):  
Decreases the alert speaker  
volume.  
Prime function (normal):  
Scrolls the currently selected line  
to the right.  
(5)  
(6)  
Level 1 function (Shift):  
Increases the alert speaker  
volume.  
Prime function (normal):  
Selects line 3 on display screen  
for scrolling.  
Level 1 function (Shift):  
Selects the Diagnostics menu on  
the display screen. The  
Diagnostics menu is  
password-protected. To display  
it, the user must enter a 4-digit  
password and press * on the dial  
pad.  
Alternating between the idle and  
active call display. From the  
active call display, press this key  
to show the idle display.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Attendant consoles  
Page 53 of 504  
Table 3  
Softkey definitions and functions (Part 3 of 3)  
Key number  
(see Figure 10)  
Symbol  
Function  
Prime function (normal):  
Signal Source feature key  
(7)  
Level 1 function (Shift and Conf/  
Busy Lamp Field key):  
Used with the Busy Lamp Field/  
Console Graphics Module, as  
CGM key.  
Prime function (normal):  
Signal Destination feature key  
(8)  
Level 1 function (Shift):  
Used with the Busy Lamp Field/  
Console Graphics Module, as the  
Mode key.  
Switches  
A slider control, located below the dial pad, between columns DI/EI and FI,  
controls the handset and headset receive volume level. See Figure 10 on  
page 49.  
A Power Fail Transfer (PFT) switch is located in the baseplate. See Figure 11  
on page 50. Both the line connector and the RS-232 connector for the PC port  
are located at the back of the console.  
Shift key  
The Shift key is positioned in column FK, row 1, just above the Hold key. See  
Figure 10 onpage 49. It is used to access Level 1 mode functions.  
Handset and headset jacks  
Two pairs of jacks are provided for plugging in handsets or headsets. The  
jacks are located on both sides of the console beneath the faceplate in the  
recessed area shown by the arrows. See Figure 10 on page 49. The console  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Page 54 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
accepts both carbon and electret handsets or headsets and automatically  
adapts itself to each type.  
Note: Electret headsets and handsets are polarity sensitive and must be  
correctly inserted into the jack.  
LCD indicators  
The LCD indicators on the M2250 display triangular symbols that normally  
point towards the key with which they are associated. Certain keys in the  
QMT2 mode of operation and loop keys have two LCDs associated with each  
key instead of one.  
Every LCD can flash at 30, 60, or 120 impulses per minute (ipm). Refer to  
“Operation” on page 77 for more details.  
The M2250 attendant console has 10 additional flexible features. These are  
programmed in LD 12 and accessed using the Shift key.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Attendant consoles  
Page 55 of 504  
Display screen messages  
Source information appears on line 2 of the display screen. Destination  
information appears on line 3 of the display screen.  
The status messages listed below appear on line 4 of the display screen panel.  
— MN  
(minor alarm)  
(major alarm)  
(CAS/History File)  
(Call Waiting)  
(Position Busy)  
(Night Service)  
(Idle)  
— MJ  
— C/H  
— CW  
— BUSY  
— NIGHT  
— IDLE  
— ACTIVE  
— S  
(lpk has been selected)  
(Shift mode)  
— EMERGENCY (Power Fail Transfer (PFT) feature is activated.)  
The first four status messages appear as MN, MJ, C/H, and CW on line 4 of  
the display screen panel. BUSY and NIGHT are combined with the status of  
the Release lamp to indicate the console status as shown in Table 4.  
Table 4  
Release lamp indicator status  
Type  
Indicator  
Status  
Night  
Busy  
Release  
Display screen status (line 4)  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
X
X
X
X
NIGHT  
BUSY  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
X
ON  
OFF  
X
IDLE  
ACTIVE  
EMERGENCY  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Page 56 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
If the emergency power fail transfer feature is activated, the console status  
will be displayed as EMERGENCY.  
Connections  
The line cord connects to the rear of the M2250 attendant console through a  
25-pin subminiature D-type connector. The jack connector is attached to the  
line cord for user safety and equipment protection (pins are not exposed).  
Having the plug connector mounted in the console also prevents interchanges  
between the line cord and the serial data port connectors (the serial data port  
in the console has a jack connector).  
Identical two-prong G3 type connectors are provided on each side of the  
console body to permit handset or headset connection at either side of the  
console. The M2250 attendant console is compatible with both carbon and  
electret handsets or headsets. The electret handset plug is  
orientation-dependent and is labeled accordingly.  
The attendant console is connected to the system through two digital ports –  
one port for Call Service processing and one for Call Destination  
processing – with three additional ports for powering, for a total of five ports.  
The PCCIU interface used for the PC-based Console software application  
requires only three ports in total.  
The attendant console requires a Digital Line Card (DLC) or an Integrated  
Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) NT8D02 or later.  
Local console controls  
Visual contrast on the display panel can be adjusted using the Contrast option  
on the Options menu.  
From the Options menu, four-line mode can be changed to two-line mode for  
easier viewing and to use larger fonts.  
The pitch and volume of the buzz tone on the console can be adjusted by  
the user.  
Any one of 15 languages can be chosen for the console screen displays:  
English, French, Spanish, German, Italian, Norwegian, Irish (Gaeilge),  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Attendant consoles  
Page 57 of 504  
Turkish, Katakana, P.R.C. (People’s Republic of China), Taiwan, Korean,  
Polish, Czech/Slovak, or Hungarian.  
When the languages P.R.C., Taiwanese, and Korean are chosen, the attendant  
console uses two-line display.  
The attendant console is equipped with a real-time clock/calendar. The time  
of day (hours, minutes, and seconds) and the date (day, month, and year) are  
displayed on line 1 of the display screen.  
The sound of key clicks can be turned on or off. The pitch and volume of key  
clicks can be adjusted.  
Wiring  
The M2250 attendant console requires a 16-pair cable terminated on an  
Amphenol connector.  
When zone cabling and conduit are used, assign a block of numbers or letters  
to each zone. Allow for growth when assigning blocks of numbers.  
Cable markers are normally an adhesive-backed cloth tape 1/2 inches wide by  
3-1/2 inches long (15 mm by 65 mm) with preprinted numbers.  
For limits and cabling for analog (500/2500-type) telephones, refer to  
Figure 12 on page 58.  
For a list of terminal connections, see Table 5 on page 59.  
Installing wiring  
Follow the steps in Procedure 5 to install the wiring for a telephone.  
Procedure 5  
Installing wiring  
1
2
Assign a number to the wire or cable used.  
Attach the assigned number to the wire or cable at the end nearest the  
telephone, using a cable marker.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Page 58 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
3
Run the wire or cable between the telephone location and nearest  
cross-connect point (if not previously run).  
4
5
Connect the cable or wire to the telephone connecting block.  
Designate the telephone connecting block.  
Figure 12  
Zone cabling and conduit assignment  
Zone  
Zone  
2.1  
Zone  
Zone  
2.2  
2
1.2  
4
3
1
1.1  
8
6
5
7
Apparatus  
Closet  
Zone Conduit  
Each Zone is  
approximately  
600-800 feet  
11  
12  
10  
9
13  
14  
15  
16  
Satellite  
Closet  
18  
19  
20  
17  
553-AAA0579  
6
Cross-connect the pairs at intermediate cross-connect points (if required)  
and terminate at the cross-connect terminal.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Page 59 of 504  
7
Terminate leads at the cross-connect terminal and designate the blocks  
according to the house cable plan.  
Table 5  
Terminal connections  
Connecting block  
Designations  
Inside wiring  
Colors  
NE-625F  
TELADAPT  
plugs and jacks  
NE-47QA or  
QBB1B  
NE-284-74-500  
1 adapter  
Z station wire  
16/25-pair cable  
G
R
1T  
1R  
X1  
X2  
R
T1 (G)  
R1 (R)  
G
R
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
BK  
Y
AUX (BK)  
GND (Y)  
T2 (BL)  
R2 (W)  
BK  
Y
O-W  
5
W-SL  
SL-W  
6
B
Normal operating ranges  
The M2250 attendant console has a maximum permissible loop length of  
3500 ft (915 m), assuming 24 AWG (0.5 mm) wire with no bridge taps. A  
15.5 dB loss at 256 kHz defines the loop length limit.  
Installation  
This section provides installation instructions for the M2250 attendant  
console. For Attendant PC Software installation instructions, refer to  
Meridian 1 Attendant PC: Software Installation Guide.  
Packing and unpacking  
Use proper care while unpacking the M2250 attendant console. Check for  
damaged containers so that appropriate claims can be made to the transport  
company for items damaged in transit.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Page 60 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
If an attendant console must be returned to the factory, pack it in the  
appropriate container to avoid damage during transit. Remember to include  
all loose parts (cords, handset, power unit, labels, and lenses) in the shipment.  
Installation and removal  
Use the following procedures to install and remove M2250 attendant  
consoles.  
Note: Although M2250 attendant consoles do not require a static  
discharge ground connection, the connection should be installed to  
protect any earlier vintage attendant consoles that may be used as  
replacements.  
Choose a clean, level work surface and place several sheets of soft, clean  
paper between the attendant console and the work surface. This will prevent  
scratching or otherwise damaging the top cover, LCD indicators and screen,  
and the feature keys of the attendant console.  
Installing the M2250 attendant console  
Follow the steps in Procedure 6 to install the M2250 attendant console.  
Procedure 6  
Installing the M2250 attendant console  
1
Ensure that a 16-pair or 25-pair cable equipped with a 25-pair Amphenol  
connector is installed at the attendant console’s location.  
2
Unpack and inspect the attendant console for damage. If the console is  
damaged, notify the supplier.  
3
4
Designate the console according to the features provided.  
Connect the Amphenol plug on the attendant console to the Amphenol  
jack coming from the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).  
a. Fasten the Amphenol connectors together and secure the captive  
screws on the cable.  
b. Ensure that the connectors are secured in a connector mounting, if  
provided, or to the wall. Do not leave connectors unprotected on the  
floor.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Attendant consoles  
Page 61 of 504  
5
6
7
8
Add a line circuit for the attendant console, if not already done. Refer to  
Circuit Card: Description and Installation (553-3001-211).  
Cross-connect the attendant console at the cross-connect terminal. See  
Procedure 12 on page 69.  
Enter the related attendant console data in the system. Refer to Software  
Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
Test the console features using the attendant console user guide.  
Note: Refer to Circuit Card: Description and Installation (553-3001-211)  
for circuit card installation procedures.  
End of Procedure  
Removing the M2250 attendant console  
Follow the steps in Procedure 7 if it is necessary to remove an M2250  
attendant console.  
Procedure 7  
Removing the M2250 attendant console  
1
2
3
Remove related attendant console data from the system memory. Refer  
to the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
Locate and remove cross-connections from the attendant console cable  
at the cross-connect terminal. See Procedure 12 on page 69.  
Remove the circuit card if required. Refer to Circuit Card: Description and  
Installation (553-3001-211).  
Note: Do not remove the circuit card if any of the remaining units on the  
card are assigned.  
4
5
Disconnect the Amphenol connector on the end of the cable leading to the  
cross-connect terminal from the connector on the cable leading to the  
attendant console.  
Pack the attendant console, handset, and cords in a suitable container.  
End of Procedure  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 62 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Removing the M2250 attendant console top cover  
Follow the steps in Procedure 8 to remove the M2250 Attendant top cover.  
Procedure 8  
Removing the M2250 attendant console top cover  
1
2
Disconnect any plugs and cords from the attendant console.  
Remove the ten 10-mm fastening screws in the flange of the attendant  
console, as well as one 10-mm and one 40-mm screw on the base of the  
attendant console. See Figure 13 for the M2250 assembly drawing.  
Figure 13  
M2250 assembly drawing (exploded view)  
Support screw  
(1 of 10)  
LCD screen  
LCD screen  
hinge assembly  
Base housing  
assembly  
Ribbon cable  
553-AAA0580  
Faceplate  
assembly  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Attendant consoles  
Page 63 of 504  
3
4
Holding the top cover and the base together by hand, turn the attendant  
console right-side up and place it back on the work surface.  
Carefully lift the faceplate straight up and disconnect the 20-pin plug  
ribbon cable located at J2.  
Note: On attendant consoles with a display attached to the top cover, do  
not connect or disconnect the cable to the display unless the attendant  
console line cord is disconnected.  
End of Procedure  
Installing the M2250 attendant console top cover  
Follow the steps in Procedure 9 to install the M2250 attendant console top  
cover.  
Procedure 9  
Installing the M2250 attendant console top cover  
1
Set the QMT2 dip switch. To locate the dip switch, look at the attendant  
console from the top. The QMT2 dip switch is the only dip switch on the  
topmost circuit board. Set the switch to ON (enable QMT2) or OFF  
(disable QMT2).  
Note: The QMT2 feature must be enabled in system software. Refer to  
LD 12 in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
2
3
Carefully lift the top cover straight up and connect the 20-pin plug ribbon  
cable to J2.  
Put the top cover back on the attendant console:  
a. Place the top cover onto the base housing, and turn the attendant  
console upside down.  
b. Reinsert and tighten the ten 10-mm fastening screws on the flange.  
c. Reinsert and tighten one 10-mm and one 40-mm fastening screw on  
the back.  
4
Return the attendant console to its working position, reconnect the plugs  
and cords, and test the features.  
End of Procedure  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 64 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Performing a loopback test  
Follow the steps in Procedure 10 to perform a loopback test on the M2250  
attendant console.  
Procedure 10  
Performing a loopback test on the  
M2250 attendant console  
1
Make a loopback connector. Prepare a blank 25-way RS-232 plug by  
internally connecting pins 2 and 3 together with strapping wire.  
2
3
Press the Shift key to access Level 1 mode.  
Press the F4 (function) key to access the Diagnostics menu on the LCD  
screen.  
4
5
Plug the loopback connector into the Data Port RS-232 jack in the back  
of the console.  
Select the Data Port option from the Diagnostics menu by dialing 3. The  
LCD screen displays OK when the test is successfully completed.  
If there is a hardware fault on the M2250, A0H is displayed.  
If the blank RS-232 connector is not plugged into the data port correctly  
(as described in Step 4), the display reads 90H or A0H.  
6
7
Press the asterisk (*) key to repeat the test.  
To exit the test mode press the octothorpe (#). to return to the main  
Diagnostics menu.  
8
9
Press the octothorpe (#) to return to normal operating mode.  
Remove the loopback connector from the Data Port RS-232 jack.  
End of Procedure  
Designating keys on the M2250 attendant console  
Refer to the work order to determine the features and key designations for  
each attendant console. Designate each key on the attendant console by  
placing its feature name (from the designation sheet) in the key cap that fits  
on the key.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Attendant consoles  
Page 65 of 504  
The Directory Number (DN) designation window on the attendant console is  
located above the keypad.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 11 to designate keys on an M2250 attendant  
console.  
Procedure 11  
Designating keys on an M2250 attendant console  
1
Remove the cap from each key requiring a designation by gently pulling  
upward on the cap.  
2
3
Remove the appropriate designation from the sheet of designations.  
Place the designation in the cap, place the cap over the corresponding  
key, and gently press down. Repeat this procedure for all keys requiring  
a designation.  
4
5
Insert a paper clip in the hole at the left or right end of the DN designation  
window. Pry the window open.  
Insert the number tag, and replace the designation window.  
End of Procedure  
The following figures show the typical key designations for the M2250  
attendant console:  
•
Figure 14 on page 66 shows the key designations for the M2250  
attendant console in Shift mode.  
•
Figure 15 on page 67 and Figure 16 on page 68 show the M2250  
attendant console in Unshift mode.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 66 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 14  
M2250 key designations in Shift mode (QMT2 not enabled)  
BLF Functions only  
Note  
CGM MODE  
ICI9  
FEAT9  
FEAT8  
FEAT7  
CAS  
C/H  
BSY  
OMN  
F1  
VDH  
F2  
VUP DMN  
F3 F4  
SS  
SD  
ICI8  
ICI7  
TGB7  
TGB6  
TGB5  
ICI6  
ICI5  
LPK5  
LPK4  
EX SR  
EX DS  
FEAT6  
FEAT5  
TGB4  
ICI4  
LPK3  
RL SR  
FEAT4  
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
9
TGB3  
TGB2  
ICI3  
ICI2  
LPK2  
LPK1  
RL DS  
BLF  
FEAT3  
FEAT2  
7
#
TGB1  
TGB0  
ICI1  
ICI0  
LPK0  
RLS  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
FEAT1  
FEAT0  
553-AAA0581  
*
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attendant consoles  
Page 67 of 504  
Figure 15  
M2250 key designations in Unshift mode (QMT2 enabled)  
CAS  
C/H  
BSY  
OMN  
F1  
VDH  
F2  
VUP DMN  
SS  
SD  
ICI09  
ICI08  
ICI07  
ICI19  
ICI18  
ICI17  
FEAT9  
FEAT8  
FEAT7  
F3  
F4  
ICI06  
ICI05  
ICI16  
ICI15  
LPK5  
EX SR  
EX DS  
FEAT6  
FEAT5  
LPK4  
LPK3  
ICI04  
ICI14  
RL SR  
FEAT4  
1
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
4
ICI03  
ICI02  
ICI13  
ICI12  
LPK2  
LPK1  
RL DS  
FEAT3  
FEAT2  
7
CONF 6  
#
ICI01  
ICI00  
ICI11  
ICI10  
LPK0  
RLS  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
FEAT1  
*
FEAT0  
553-AAA0583  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 68 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Figure 16  
M2250 designations in Unshift mode (QMT2 not enabled)  
LCD Display  
Screen  
(4 or 2 lines  
for M2250)  
Scrolling  
FEAT9  
FEAT8  
FEAT7  
ICI9  
SS SD  
BSY  
CAS  
C/H  
ICI8  
ICI7  
F1 F2  
F3 F4  
FEAT6  
FEAT5  
FEAT4  
ICI6  
ICI5  
ICI4  
EX SR  
LPK5  
LPK4  
LPK3  
EX DS  
RL SR  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
#
ICI3  
ICI2  
ICI1  
FEAT3  
FEAT2  
FEAT1  
LPK2  
LPK1  
LPK0  
RL DS  
CONF6  
SHIFT  
*
FEAT0  
ICI0  
HOLD  
RLS  
553-AAA0584  
Cross-connecting attendant consoles  
Terminations are located on the vertical side of the distributing frame when  
frame-mounted blocks are used and located in the blue field when  
wall-mounted blocks are used.  
Line circuit card (TN) terminations are located on the horizontal side of the  
distributing frame when frame-mounted blocks are used and located in the  
white field and wall-mounted blocks are used.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 12 on page 69 to cross-connect attendant  
consoles.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Attendant consoles  
Page 69 of 504  
Procedure 12  
Cross-connecting attendant consoles  
1
2
Locate the attendant console terminations at the cross-connect terminal.  
Connect Z-type cross-connecting wire to the leads of the attendant  
console.  
3
4
Locate the line circuit card (TN) terminations.  
Run and connect the other end of the cross-connecting wire to the  
assigned TN terminal block.  
End of Procedure  
Refer to Table 6 for details on Z-type cross-connecting wire and Table 7 on  
page 70 for a list of inside wiring colors.  
Table 6  
Z-type cross-connecting wire  
Size  
Gauge  
Color  
Designation  
1 pr  
24  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
Tip  
Ring  
3 pr  
24  
Voice T  
Voice R  
Signal T  
Signal R  
Power  
Power  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 70 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Table 7  
Inside wiring colors  
Connect to  
Z station wire  
16/25-pair cable  
equipment TN  
G
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
First pair Tip  
R
First pair Ring  
Second pair Tip  
Second pair Ring  
BK  
Y
O-W  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attendant consoles  
Page 71 of 504  
Figure 17  
M2250 attendant console cross-connections  
Cross connect  
block  
W-BL  
BL-W  
26  
1
To 1st TN  
TCM Primary  
27  
2
W-OR  
OR-W  
To 2nd TN  
To 3rd TN  
TCM Secondary  
W-SL  
SL-W  
30  
5
ASM  
To 4th TN Tip  
To 4th TN Ring  
To 5th TN Tip  
To 5th TN Ring  
+AUX  
R-OR  
OR-R  
32  
7
•
•
•
Note 1  
–AUX  
33  
8
R-G  
G-R  
•
BK-BL  
BL-BK  
36  
11  
Part of Power Fail  
or Energy Transfer  
GND  
TC  
GND  
ALARM  
BK-BR  
BR-BK  
39  
14  
M2250 Console  
(console connector)  
Major Alarm  
+ VPS  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
41  
16  
Note 2  
VPS RTN  
Y-OR  
OR-Y  
42  
17  
25 pair cable from console to MDF  
V-SL  
SL-V  
Relay 2  
Relay 1  
50  
25  
Code Blue  
553-AAA0585  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 72 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
The following notes refer to Figure 17 on page 71, which illustrates the  
M2250 attendant console cross-connections.  
Note 1: The M2250 is powered by means of the line circuits. In addition  
to the primary TN, secondary TN, and ASM TN, two TNs are cabled to  
the M2250 using the +AUX and –AUX leads. The maximum loop length  
is 3000 ft of 24 AWG wire.  
Note 2: When additional options are used (BLF or display backlight  
option), an additional 16 V DC power supply is required. The 16 V DC  
source is cabled using +VPS and VPS RTN leads. The maximum  
distance from the console to the power source is 120 feet of 24 AWG  
wire. Please note: if both options are installed, only one 16 V DC power  
supply is required.  
Note 3: Nortel recommends that five consecutive TNs on the line circuit  
be allocated for each console.  
Note 4: When used with the ISDLC, the M2250 requires NT8D02 or  
later.  
Note 5: The third TN must be cross-connected to the console cable  
WH/SL pair whether or not an ASM (Attendant Supervisory Module) is  
installed. This third TN provides additional console power which is  
required.  
Table 8 on page 73 explains where each M2250 cable pair is connected.  
Table 9 on page 75 lists the M2250 typical cross-connections.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Attendant consoles  
Page 73 of 504  
Table 8  
M2250 attendant console connections (Part 1 of 3)  
Mounting cord  
16/25-pair connector cable  
Lead  
Pin  
Pair  
designation  
number  
number  
Color  
Connected to  
TCM primary  
26  
1
1T  
R
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
TN #1  
TCM secondary  
27  
2
2T  
R
TN #2  
TN #3  
O-W  
Attendant  
Supervisory  
Module  
30  
5
5T  
R
W-SL  
SL-W  
Spare  
+AUX  
–AUX  
Spare  
31  
6
6T  
R
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
32  
7
7T  
R
TN #4  
TN #5  
O-R  
33  
8
8T  
R
R-G  
G-R  
34  
9
9T  
R
R-BR  
BR-R  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 74 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Table 8  
M2250 attendant console connections (Part 2 of 3)  
Mounting cord  
16/25-pair connector cable  
Lead  
Pin  
Pair  
designation  
number  
number  
Color  
Connected to  
Spare  
35  
10  
36  
11  
37  
12  
38  
13  
39  
14  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
10T  
R
R-SL  
SL-R  
BK-BL  
BL-BK  
BK-O  
O-BK  
BK-G  
G-BK  
BK-BR  
BR-BK  
BK-SL  
SL-BK  
Y-BL  
Power Fail or  
Energy Transfer  
Spare  
11T  
R
GND (Note 1)  
TC (Note 2)  
12T  
R
Spare  
Spare  
13T  
R
Spare  
GND  
14T  
R
GND (Note 1)  
ALM (Note 2)  
Major Alarm  
Spare  
15T  
R
VPS  
16T  
R
BL-Y  
VPS RTN  
17T  
R
Y-O  
O-Y  
Spare  
Code Blue  
50  
25  
25T  
R
Y-SL  
SL-Y  
Relay 2  
Relay 1  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attendant consoles  
Page 75 of 504  
Table 8  
M2250 attendant console connections (Part 3 of 3)  
Mounting cord  
16/25-pair connector cable  
Lead  
Pin  
Pair  
designation  
number  
number  
Color  
Connected to  
Note 1: Connect to Pin 3 or 28 of the appropriate PFJ5 terminal block.  
Note 2: Connect TC to Pin 29 or 5 and ALM to Pin 4 or 31 of the  
appropriate PFJ5 terminal block.  
Table 9  
M2250 typical cross-connections (Part 1 of 2)  
Pair  
DLC  
ISDLC  
Pair  
Pins  
Color  
Connections  
Connections  
1T  
1R  
2T  
2R  
3T  
3R  
4T  
4R  
5T  
5R  
6T  
6R  
7T  
7R  
26  
1
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
Unit  
0
Unit  
0
27  
2
Unit  
1
Unit  
8
28  
3
Unit  
2
Unit  
1
29  
4
Unit  
3
Unit  
9
30  
5
Unit  
4
Unit  
2
S-W  
31  
6
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
Unit  
5
Unit  
10  
Unit  
3
32  
7
Unit  
6
O-R  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 76 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Table 9  
M2250 typical cross-connections (Part 2 of 2)  
Pair  
DLC  
ISDLC  
Pair  
Pins  
Color  
Connections  
Connections  
8T  
33  
8
R-G  
Unit  
7
Unit  
11  
8R  
G-R  
9T  
34  
9
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
Unit  
8
Unit  
4
9R  
10T  
10R  
11T  
11R  
12T  
12R  
13T  
13R  
14T  
14R  
15T  
15R  
16T  
16R  
35  
10  
36  
11  
37  
12  
38  
13  
39  
14  
40  
15  
41  
16  
Unit  
9
Unit  
12  
S-R  
BK-BL  
BL-BK  
BK-O  
O-BK  
BK-G  
G-BK  
BK-BR  
BR-BK  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
Unit  
10  
Unit  
5
Unit  
11  
Unit  
13  
Unit  
12  
Unit  
6
Unit  
13  
Unit  
14  
Unit  
14  
Unit  
7
Unit  
15  
Unit  
15  
BL-Y  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attendant consoles  
Page 77 of 504  
Operation  
This section contains operating procedures for the M2250 attendant console.  
The attendant console faceplate layout is shown in Figures 14 through 16,  
starting on page 66. Refer to these figures as the basis for component location  
references throughout this section.  
M2250 configurations  
The M2250 attendant console can be configured to operate with the QMT2  
feature, which is provided by a QMT2 add-on module incorporated in the  
console. Instead of having to add a keystrip unit, the technician can set a dip  
switch on the keyboard/controller Printed Circuit Panel (PCP) to ON (enable  
QMT2) or OFF (disable QMT2). It is important that the system software  
configuration and the QMT2 dip switch be set correctly.  
For more information, refer to the section on LD15 in the following  
documents:  
•
•
Features and Services (553-3001-306)  
Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311)  
QMT2 feature disabled  
When the QMT2 feature is disabled, the following conditions apply:  
•
•
If the console is not in Shift mode, keystrip AK is inactive.  
If the console is in Shift mode, the keys in strip AK function as Trunk  
Group Busy (TGB) keys, if configured in the system software.  
•
If the operator presses any of these keys, the associated trunk group is  
busied out.  
•
•
The triangle points aimed to the left of keystrip AK are never active.  
If the operator presses any key outside keystrip AK when the console is  
in Shift mode, the console performs the function associated with that key.  
The Shift indicator remains on.  
•
The keys in keystrip BK function as Incoming Call Identification  
(ICI) keys.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Page 78 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
QMT2 feature enabled  
When the QMT2 feature is enabled, the following conditions apply:  
•
If the console is not in Shift mode, the keys in strip AK and/or BK  
function as Incoming Call Identification (ICI) keys.  
•
If the console is in Shift mode, the keys in keystrips AK and BK function  
as Trunk Group Busy (TGB) keys. That is, they imitate the keystrips of  
the QMT2 add-on module as follows:  
— The LCD indicators pointing to the left indicate busy trunks.  
— The LCD indicators pointing to the right indicate incoming calls.  
Attendant PC requirements  
To install the PC-based Console software application, a PC-compatible  
Pentium system is required, with the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
minimum 16 MB RAM  
hard disk with at least 10 MB free disk space  
17-inch SVGA color monitor  
16 bit sound board  
Network interface adapter  
RS232 serial port  
For complete installation and operation instructions, refer to the  
Attendant PC: Description, Installation, and Operation (553-3001-320).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Attendant consoles  
Page 79 of 504  
Figure 18  
PC Console Interface Unit  
brandline  
insert  
headset/handset  
volume control  
Status LED  
alerter speaker  
553-AAA0576  
M2250 feature key modes  
Functions shown for some of the feature keys in Table 3 page 51 vary  
depending on which console mode is in effect while the key is being pressed.  
Table 10 on page 80 lists the various alternate feature key functions.  
When a feature key is pressed while the attendant console is in a mode other  
than normal or Level 1, nothing happens.  
When in the normal call processing mode, access the Level 1 mode by  
pressing the Shift key. The LCD indicator beside the shift key lights and  
remains on throughout all options and menus. It goes out only upon return to  
normal call processing. All call processing keys that do not have a dual  
function perform normally while the console is in Level 1 mode. Press the  
Shift key again to return to normal call processing.  
On the M2250 attendant console, press the pound (#) key to exit from any  
submenu from the Options menu, or from the Diagnostics menu to normal  
operating mode. Press the Shift key to return to the Level 1 mode.  
Level 1 mode also provides access to additional call processing features, as  
well as to options and maintenance features. One of the additional call  
processing features is access to Trunk Group Busy (TGB) keys that are  
locked out in normal mode. For example, in normal mode, there are ten  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Page 80 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
available TGB keys on the M2250. With QMT2 enabled, the number of TGB  
keys on each console is doubled.  
Table 10  
Softkey alternate functions  
Key  
Operational mode  
Function  
F1  
F2  
Normal  
Normal  
Selects line 2 of the display for scrolling.  
Scrolls left on the selected line, at 8 characters  
per step.  
F3  
Normal  
Scrolls right on the selected line, at 8 characters  
per step.  
F4  
Normal  
Level 1  
Level 1  
Level 1  
Level 1  
Selects line 3 of the display screen for scrolling.  
Selects the Options menu.  
Shift, F1  
Shift, F2  
Shift, F3  
Shift, F4  
Turns down the alerter speaker volume.  
Turns up the alerter speaker volume.  
Selects the Diagnostic menu. (A password must  
be entered on the M2250 before the Diagnostics  
menu appears.)  
Example:  
Press Shift and  
Options menu  
The Options menu is displayed.  
F1 (in sequence)  
Press dial pad key 1  
Press dial pad key #  
Accesses Contrast menu. (Refer to user guide  
for contrast setting routines.)  
Returns to Options menu.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Attendant consoles  
Page 81 of 504  
M2250 console diagnostics  
Use the Diagnostics menu to check the functions of the console and to  
perform tests. To enter the Diagnostics mode, use Procedure 13. Figure 19  
shows the main Diagnostics menu for the M2250 attendant console.  
Procedure 13  
Entering the M2250 Diagnostics mode  
1
2
3
4
Press the Shift key.  
Press the  
key (F4 function key).  
On M2250 consoles, enter the password 9999.  
Press the asterisk (*) key to enter Diagnostics menu 1. To toggle between  
menu 1 and menu 2, press the asterisk (*) key.  
5
To quit the Diagnostics mode, press the octothorpe (#) key.  
End of Procedure  
Follow the procedures listed below to perform the Diagnostic tests.  
Figure 19  
Console Diagnostics menus  
DIAGNOSTICS MENU:  
{ 1 }  
1. KEYBOARD  
4. ICs  
2. LAMPS  
5. LAMP FIELD  
<next>  
3. DATA PORT  
6. ALERTER  
# <exit>  
*
DIAGNOSTICS MENU:  
{ 2 }  
1. DISPLAY  
2. FIRMWARE  
5. RESET  
<next>  
3. QMT2  
# <exit>  
4. CONTROL  
*
553-AAA0577  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 82 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Procedure 14  
Testing the Keyboard  
Use this procedure to check the functionality of each key on the console.  
When a key is pressed, its location code is displayed within parentheses. For  
example, (00) denotes the upper left-hand ICI key.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 1, press 1.  
Press any key on the console. The display shows the key’s location code,  
indicating that the key is functional. Table 11 shows the key location  
codes.  
3
Press the octothorpe (#) key to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
Table 11  
Key location codes for console diagnostics  
22 21  
20  
34  
54  
60 61  
62  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
70  
71  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
72  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
63 73  
64 74  
65 75  
66 76  
67 77  
68 78  
69 79  
35  
36  
37  
38  
45 55  
46 56  
47 57  
48 58  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Attendant consoles  
Page 83 of 504  
Procedure 15  
Testing the LCD indicators  
Use this procedure to check the functionality of each LCD indicator on the  
console.  
1
2
From the Diagnostics menu 1, press 2.  
Press 1 to turn all lamps ON. Press the asterisk (*) to turn each lamp OFF  
one by one.  
3
4
Press 2 to turn all lamps OFF. Press the asterisk (*) to turn each lamp ON  
one by one.  
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 16  
Testing the data port  
Use this procedure to perform a loopback test on the RS-232 port at the back  
of the console. Before performing the test, a connector (25-way D-plug) with  
pin 2 shorted to pin 3 should be inserted in RS-232 port. A failure code is  
displayed if any error is found.  
1
From Diagnostics menu 1, press 3. The display shows OK if the test is  
successful.  
2
3
Press the asterisk (*) to repeat the loopback test.  
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 17  
Testing the ICS  
Use this procedure to check the functionality of any peripheral devices  
connected to the User Interface Printed (UIP)and the Audio System Interface  
Printed (ASIP) microprocessor circuit cards within the console. A failure code  
is displayed if any error is found.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 1, press 4.  
Press the asterisk (*) to perform the ICS test.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Page 84 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
3
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 18  
Testing the Busy Lamp Field/Console  
Graphics Module  
Use this procedure to check the functionality of the BLF/CGM. Once in this  
menu, the dial pad is in CGM mode. When any dial pad keys are pressed,  
except the octothorpe (#) key, the keys are echoed on the BLF/CGM.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 1, press 5.  
Press keys from 0 – 9 and the asterisk (*) on the dial pad. Check the CGM  
to see that they are echoed.  
3
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
Note: For more information on installation and operation of this feature,  
see “Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module” on page 32, or refer to  
the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module User Guide.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 19  
Checking the Alerter  
Use this procedure to check the pitches and volume levels of the alerter and  
auxiliary tone channel.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 1, press 6.  
Follow these instructions in any order:  
Press key 1 to turn the buzz and auxiliary tones ON.  
Press key 2 to turn the buzz and auxiliary tones OFF.  
Press key 3 to increase the pitch of the buzz and auxiliary tones.  
Press key 4 to decrease the pitch of the buzz and auxiliary tones.  
Press key 5 to increase the volume of the buzz and auxiliary tones.  
Press key 6 to decrease the volume of the buzz and auxiliary tones.  
3
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Attendant consoles  
Page 85 of 504  
Procedure 20  
Testing the Display  
Use this procedure to check the functionality of the alphanumeric display  
panel. Cycle through a number of different display patterns to check for visual  
defects.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 2, press 1.  
Press the asterisk (*) to change the display screen pattern. Continue  
changing the pattern until all the patterns have been cycled through.  
3
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 21  
Displaying the firmware version numbers  
Use this procedure to display the release and issue numbers of the firmware  
installed on the UIP and ASIP microprocessor circuit cards.  
1
From Diagnostics menu 2, press 2. The display shows the firmware  
release and issue numbers, as shown below:  
DIAGNOSTICS: FIRMWARE  
ASIP: XX XX  
UIP: XX XX  
2
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 22  
Displaying and resetting the QMT2 switch status  
Use this procedure to display the current state of the QMT2 dip switch inside  
the console and to change the setting for verification testing (LD 31). After a  
change, the actual switch setting will return to its original state after a time-out  
period of about three minutes.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 2, press 3.  
Press the asterisk (*) to toggle between QMT2 ON and OFF.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Page 86 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
3
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 23  
Toggling control gates  
Use this procedure to turn the conference bridge analog control gates, the  
auxiliary tone channel, and the Code Blue Relay ON or OFF. Note that the  
auxiliary control only affects the control gate on the ASIP circuit card. To  
actually generate a tone, use the Alerter menu.  
1
2
From Diagnostics menu 2, press “4.”  
DIAGNOSTICS: CONTROL  
1. SCR  
{ 0 }  
2. DST  
{ 0 }  
3. ARX  
{ 0 }  
4. ATX  
{ 0 }  
5. TON  
{ 0 }  
6. REL  
{ 0 }  
* <OFF>  
# <exit>  
Follow the appropriate instruction below:  
Press key 1 to toggle the primary control gate between ON and OFF.  
Press key 2 to toggle the secondary control gate between ON and OFF.  
Press key 3 to toggle the attendant receive control between ON and OFF.  
Press key 4 to toggle the attendant transmit control between ON and  
OFF.  
Press key 5 to toggle the auxiliary tone control between ON and OFF.  
Press key 6 to toggle the relay control between ON and OFF.  
Press the asterisk (*) to turn all the control gates OFF.  
3
4
Press the octothorpe (#) to exit and return to Diagnostics menu 1.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Attendant consoles  
Page 87 of 504  
Reset  
To perform a hard reset of the console, from Diagnostics menu 2, press 5. The  
reset is performed immediately. All devices and memory on the UIP and  
ASIP boards are reset as if the power cord were unplugged and plugged in  
again.  
M2250 failure codes  
A failure code appears on the display in response to the detection of a  
hardware fault.  
Refer to Table 12 for an explanation of failure codes and possible solutions.  
Table 12  
M2250 failure codes (Part 1 of 2)  
Printed  
Failure  
code  
circuit  
pack (PCP)  
Reason  
What to do  
40H  
UIP  
The PSG, U13, is not  
responding.  
Unplug the line cord and plug it in  
again. If the failure code still appears,  
there is an electrical fault in the  
console, and it should be returned.  
Note: Log the failure code with the  
returned unit, as it gives an indication  
of which component has failed.  
20H  
10H  
08H  
UIP  
UIP  
UIP  
The RTC, U16, is faulty.  
The RAM IC, U1, is faulty.  
A key in column A is stuck.  
Same as for 40H.  
Same as for 40H.  
Unplug the line cord.  
Free the key if it is stuck.  
Plug in the line cord.  
If the failure code still appears, the  
console is faulty and should be  
returned.  
09H  
UIP  
A key in column B is stuck.  
Same as for 08H.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Page 88 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Table 12  
M2250 failure codes (Part 2 of 2)  
Printed  
Failure  
code  
circuit  
pack (PCP)  
Reason  
What to do  
0AH  
0BH  
UIP  
UIP  
A key in column C is stuck.  
Same as for 08H.  
A key in column D0 is  
stuck.  
Same as for 08H.  
0CH  
0DH  
UIP  
UIP  
A key in column D1 is  
stuck.  
Same as for 08H.  
A key in column D2 is  
stuck.  
Same as for 08H.  
0EH  
0FH  
A0H  
UIP  
A key in column E is stuck.  
A key in column F is stuck.  
Same as for 08H.  
UIP  
Same as for 08H.  
ASIP  
The RS-232 has failed the  
loopback test.  
Check to see if the loopback  
connector is inserted. If not, insert it  
and perform the loopback test again.  
If the failure code still appears, turn  
the console off and on while the  
connector is inserted.  
Perform the loopback test again. If the  
failure code still appears, the console  
is faulty and should be returned.  
90H  
88H  
ASIP  
ASIP  
ASM A44#3, U1, is faulty.  
Same as for 40H.  
Secondary A44#2, U2, is  
faulty.  
Same as for 40H.  
84H  
ASIP  
Primary A44#1, U1, is  
faulty.  
Same as for 40H.  
82H  
81H  
ASIP  
ASIP  
The UART, U5, is faulty.  
The RAM, U8, is faulty.  
Same as for 40H.  
Same as for 40H.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attendant consoles  
Page 89 of 504  
The failure codes produced by the firmware in response to the detection of a  
hardware fault are bit-significant as follows:  
B7  
B6  
B5  
B4  
B3  
B2  
B1  
B0  
0
1
PSG  
ASIP  
RTC  
RAM  
KEYS  
c2*  
c1*  
c0*  
RS-232  
A44#3 A44#2 A44#1 UART  
RAM  
* Refers to key’s column number.  
Note: Bit 7 indicates whether the failure occurred on the user interface  
printed circuit card (UIP) (B7=0) or on the audio and system interface  
printed circuit card (ASIP) (B7=1).  
In most instances, the failure code accurately identifies the faulty hardware  
component. However, if the microprocessor is faulty, the readings may be  
unreliable or misleading.  
Failure code A0H is always shown if the loopback test has not been  
performed. Refer to “Testing the data port” on page 83.  
M2250 feature operation  
Time and date  
On the M2250, the time and date are automatically downloaded from the  
system on power-up or console reset. The time and date are downloaded by  
the switch whenever it runs a lamp audit. Only the visual format can be  
changed.  
Trunk Group Busy indicators  
Trunk Group Busy (TGB) indicators show the status of each group of trunks.  
If a TGB indicator is on steadily, the attendant has busied out all trunks in that  
group by pressing the Shift key plus the TGB key. If a TGB indicator is  
flashing, all the trunks in that group are actually busy.  
In Supervisory mode, TGB indicators show the status of other consoles in the  
customer group. If the indicator is off, the attendant position is in a Position  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page 90 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Busy mode. When an indicator associated with a particular attendant is on,  
the attendant is available to service calls.  
Note: The M2250 attendant console must be equipped with the  
Attendant Supervisory Module (NT7G10AA) to allow attendant  
supervision.  
Incoming Call Indicators  
Incoming Call Indicators (ICI) display the various types of incoming calls  
presented to the attendant console. They also indicate the number of calls and  
the length of time calls have been queued.  
•
If the indicator is on, one call has been queued for less than a certain  
length of time (as defined by software).  
•
If the indicator is flashing, one call has been queued for more than the  
defined length of time, or there is more than one call in the queue.  
Night service/busy  
When the Shift key is off, press the Busy key to put the attendant console into  
Position Busy mode. When the Shift key is on, press the Busy key to put the  
console into Night Service mode. To return to normal operating mode, press  
the Busy key again.  
In a multi-console system, activating Night Service mode will busy out all  
attendant consoles in the system.  
Enhanced Night Service  
This feature allows Public Network (Central Office [CO], Direct Inward Dial  
[DID], Foreign Exchange [FEX], and Wide Area Telephone service [WAT])  
trunks to be assigned to specific Directory Numbers (DN) during Night  
Service.  
With this feature each customer will be able to assign Public Network trunks  
to one of nine Night Groups. Each Night Group will allow the customer to  
define up to nine Night DNs. During Night Service incoming calls will be  
routed to one of the Night DNs defined for the group. The actual DN the call  
will be routed to is determined by the Night Service Option number selected  
at that time.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Attendant consoles  
Page 91 of 504  
The customer will also be able to define whether Night Call Waiting tone will  
be given to Night stations. With Night Call Waiting tone allowed, busy Night  
stations are notified when an incoming call is terminating on them. The  
incoming call will be queued on the Night station until it becomes idle. When  
the Night station becomes idle, the incoming call will be presented.  
This enhancement allows incoming DID trunks to be queued against busy  
Night stations, thereby making the operation of the DID trunks the same as  
for all other Public Network trunks.  
Attendant Blocking of DN  
The Attendant Blocking of DN (ABDN) feature enables the attendant to  
block a DN for a telephone from receiving or making calls. This is  
particularly useful when a caller dials the attendant DN and requests an  
external (long distance) call. If the caller chooses to disconnect until the  
attendant successfully places the call, the requesting DN becomes idle and  
can receive or make calls. Therefore, the requesting DN could be busy when  
the attendant establishes the requested call.  
To prevent the requesting DN from being busy when the requested call is  
completed, the attendant can block the DN from making or receiving calls. To  
callers attempting to contact the blocked DN, the line appears busy. To a  
caller attempting to use the blocked DN, the line is connected to the attendant.  
When the attendant completes the external call, the attendant can call the  
blocked DN and extend the call. This feature applies to both stand-alone and  
ISDN network environments.  
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature is available on the M2250 attendant  
consoles. It is not valid on M2616 telephones used as attendant consoles.  
Attendant and Network Wide Remote Call Forward  
This modification to the Remote Call Forward feature (RCFW) allows a user  
to program a call forward Directory Number from any attendant console or  
station throughout the network. An RFW key on the attendant console allows  
an attendant to view any station’s call forward status and to activate or  
deactivate call forward for a station.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 92 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Features (553-3001-369) for further  
details.  
Network Attendant Services  
This feature allows attendant services to be distributed anywhere within a  
Meridian ISDN network. If, at the time of an attendant request, attendant  
services are not available at a station’s local node, connection to an attendant  
at a remote node takes place. Call treatment is the same as for a connection to  
a local attendant node.  
Call processing  
The attendant answers an incoming call by pressing the flashing loop key.  
To answer a specific type of incoming call, press the ICI key next to the  
appropriate ICI indicator. This removes the call from the queue and presents  
it to the attendant.  
ICI key assignments  
An ICI key may be assigned more than one call type. Refer to Software Input/  
Output: Administration (553-3001-311). If the Attendant Call Party Name  
Display (ACPND) feature is equipped, all incoming calls are displayed by  
calling party name or external call source. The following examples list  
possible ICI key assignments:  
•
Attendant Intercept indicates that a call is being made by a station to a  
facility to which that station is restricted, and the call has been routed to  
the attendant console.  
•
Listed Directory Numbers (maximum four) indicates that a call is  
being made to an attendant console associated with one of the listed  
directory numbers.  
•
•
Dial 0 indicates that a station that is not fully restricted has dialed 0.  
Fully Restricted Station indicates that a fully restricted station has  
dialed 0.  
•
Foreign Exchange indicates that the incoming call is from a foreign  
exchange.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Attendant consoles  
Page 93 of 504  
•
•
Wide Area Telephone Service indicates that the incoming call  
originated at a wide area telephone exchange.  
Recall indicates that a camped-on call or a call extended to an idle station  
has not been answered for 30 seconds or that a station is recalling the  
attendant.  
•
•
Call Forward indicates that the call is being forwarded to the console  
from a station within the system.  
Tie Trunk indicates that the incoming call is on a tie trunk.  
Operating keys  
The operating key/lamp strips CI/CK, DI, EI, and FI/FK allow the attendant  
to process calls from the console.  
Key/lamp strips CI/CK and FI/FK have permanently assigned functions as  
given in the following list.  
•
Release allows the attendant to release a call presented to the console.  
When the LCD associated with the RLS key is lit, it indicates that no  
incoming calls are being presented to the console.  
•
Loop Keys/Lamps allow the attendant to answer and originate calls  
from the console. The first call in the incoming queue is automatically  
presented to an idle loop key. Subsequent calls are queued and presented  
to a loop key when a loop becomes idle. Call selection is made by  
pressing the required ICI key. This action causes the call, which was  
automatically presented to the loop key by the system, to be replaced by  
the selected incoming call. In all cases, when the loop key is pressed, all  
ICIs go dark except the one associated with the call presented to the  
loop key.  
•
Position Busy enables the attendant to put the console in Position Busy  
mode. All calls directed to a console in Position Busy mode are  
redirected to a free console in multiconsole installations or to the night  
connection in single console installations. When a console is in Position  
Busy mode, “BUSY” is shown on line 4 of the display.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Page 94 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
•
Night Service permits incoming calls to the attendant to be routed to a  
preselected station. The Night Service key enables the attendant to assign  
the Night Directory Number (DN) and to initiate Night Service. When  
assigning the Night Service DN, “NIGHT” flashes on line 4 of the  
display. When Night Service is on, “NIGHT” appears without flashing  
on the display.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In a multiconsole system, activating Night Service will busy out all  
attendant consoles in the system.  
Hold allows the attendant to hold an active call at the console while  
serving other calls.  
Conference permits the attendant to set up a conference of up to five  
conferees plus the attendant.  
Release Destination allows the attendant to release the called party from  
a call held at the console while holding the calling party.  
Release Source allows the attendant to release the calling party from a  
call held at the console while holding the called party.  
Signal Source and Destination allows the operator to recall either party  
to a call held on the console.  
Exclude Destination excludes the called party from an established call  
held at the console, allowing the attendant to speak privately with the  
calling party.  
•
Exclude Source excludes the calling party from an established call  
held at the console, allowing the attendant to speak privately with the  
called party.  
Feature keys  
Any of the keys on keystrip FK can be assigned any of the optional features  
in the list that follows except the Barge-In and Busy Verify features. These  
require five LCD indicator states (off, on, and flash at 30, 60, or 120 impulses  
per minute). If Barge-In or Busy Verify is required, it must be assigned to  
keys FK-0 and FK-1.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Attendant consoles  
Page 95 of 504  
All other features may be assigned to any of the keys on strip FK. Refer to  
Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for additional  
information. The following are some of the more common feature keys:  
•
•
•
Attendant End to End Signaling enables the attendant to send dual tone  
multifrequency (DTMF) signals to either the source or destination party.  
Busy Verify allows the attendant to confirm that a station returning a  
busy signal is actually being used.  
Barge-In allows the attendant to enter an established trunk connection  
for the purpose of talking to one or both parties.  
•
•
Paging allows access to a public address facility.  
Speed Call allows numbers to be dialed automatically by pressing the  
SPEED CALL key and dialing a 1- or 2-digit code.  
Call Waiting indicator  
The Call Waiting indicator indicates that there is a queue of calls to be  
answered. When one or more calls are waiting, “CW” appears on line 4 of the  
display. The CW display changes from steady to flashing when waiting calls  
exceed a certain number or when a call has been waiting longer than a  
specified time.  
The maximum number of waiting calls and the maximum hold time for each  
waiting call to be answered can be set with a data administration task. Refer  
to Features and Services (553-3001-306) for more information.  
An optional buzz is available to indicate when the first call enters the queue.  
The number of waiting calls can be viewed on the LCD screen by pressing a  
key assigned on the attendant console. On the M2250, the number of waiting  
calls can be displayed continuously on line 4 of the display, if defined in  
LD15 and selected from the Options menu.  
Alarm indicators  
Alarms appear on line 4 of the display. “MN” indicates a minor alarm  
condition; “MJ” indicates a major alarm. A minor alarm is an indication of a  
minor system failure affecting a limited number of lines or trunks. A major  
alarm indicates that Emergency Transfer may have been initiated. See  
“Emergency Transfer” on page 96.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Page 96 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
Emergency Transfer  
If a major equipment or power failure halts local call processing, preselected  
CO trunks are automatically connected to preselected stations (predetermined  
and hard-wired at installation time) through relays in the system. Emergency  
Transfer can also be activated manually by a switch underneath the attendant  
console.  
If the switch is activated while the console has power, the word  
“EMERGENCY” appears on line 4 of the display.  
Attendant Administration  
Attendant Administration is an optional feature that allows the attendant to  
modify some of the features assigned to selected telephone sets within the  
attendant’s customer group. The attendant can enter a special program mode  
with an assigned key.  
Once in the program mode, the console key/lamp strips have different  
functions from those during normal call processing. A plastic overlay can be  
placed over the console keyboard to identify the altered key functions. Refer  
to Features and Services (553-3001-306) for Attendant Administration  
description and operating procedures.  
Collect Call Blocking  
The Collect Call Blocking feature enables a system administrator to block  
long distance collect call service calls on incoming Direct Inward Dialing  
(DID) and Public Exchange/Central Office trunks (analog or DT12).  
Under the following conditions, the system sends a special answer signal to  
the Central Office to indicate that collect calls cannot be accepted:  
•
•
The Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is enabled.  
The incoming route has CCB enabled via the CCB prompt in the Route  
Data Block.  
•
The call is answered by a CCB user (that is, Collect Call Blocking  
Allowed Class of Service or option).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Attendant consoles  
Page 97 of 504  
Classes of service and prompts are provided which enable administrators to  
inhibit specific users from receiving collect DID and Central Office calls.  
These can be configured for the following:  
•
PBX and BCS through the Collect Call Blocking Allowed/Denied  
(CCBA/CCBD) option  
•
Attendant and Network Alternate Route Selection calls on a per customer  
basis through CCBA/CCBD option  
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) queues through the CCBA prompt  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) through the CCBA prompt  
Tandem calls dialed with Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) (Trunk  
Steering Code, Distant Steering Code) through the CCBA prompt  
•
Tandem non-CDP calls through the CCBA prompt in the Route Data  
Block from the outgoing trunk route  
When a call is answered by a CCB user, the system sends the CCB answer  
signal in place of the regular signal for incoming DID/CO calls from the  
routes with CCB enabled. If the call is a collect call, The CO will disconnect  
the call.  
Alarm Management  
The Integrated Alarm Management feature is a series of subfeatures which  
improve the handling of key alarm messages generated by the system and its  
Application Processors.  
It also clarifies existing alarm messages and makes attendant console alarm  
lamp signals more meaningful. The system has three levels of alarm: critical,  
major, and minor. The attendant console alarm lamp will light when critical  
alarms occur.  
Digital Trunk Interface – CIS  
The CIS DTI trunk feature provides connectivity between the system and  
digital trunks used in the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS).  
The CIS 2 Mbps DTI feature enables the system to connect digital DID/COT  
trunks to a CIS Local Central Office and to a CIS Toll Exchange (through  
Local CO and Public Network, or directly for incoming toll call connections).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 98 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
This link supports DID/COT trunking types, and requires that the system be  
equipped with at least one CDTI2/CSDTI2 digital trunks pack, as well as  
associated software.  
DPNSS Executive Intrusion  
Executive Intrusion (EI) allows an originating party to break into an  
established call between two other parties (the wanted and the unwanted  
parties) under certain circumstances. If intrusion succeeds, a conference takes  
place on the wanted node between the originating, wanted and unwanted  
parties.  
EI succeeds in breaking into the call based on comparisons between the  
Intrusion Capability Level (ICL) of the originating party and the Intrusion  
Protection levels (IPL) of the wanted and unwanted parties.  
The system provides Executive Intrusion from attendant consoles. Executive  
Intrusion from Telephone Sets is not supported. However, a Meridian 1,  
CS 1000M, or CS 1000S PBX will accept an EI activation request from an  
ordinary set on a third party PBX.  
Attendant Monitor  
Attendant Monitor is a customer-defined option which allows the attendant to  
monitor – in listen only mode – any established call involving a set or trunk  
on the customer with or without the connected parties being aware that  
monitoring is taking place (depending on the configuration of the customer  
tone option).  
The differences between the existing Busy Verify and Barge-in features and  
the Attendant Monitor feature are the following:  
•
•
Attendant Monitor provides a listen only path for the attendant.  
There is no click sound given to the connected parties upon Attendant  
connection when the no tone option is configured.  
•
•
The tone to the connected parties may or may not be given depending on  
the customer tone options for Attendant Monitor.  
The display (if there is one) on any of the parties involved in the calls  
does not indicate that the Attendant is monitoring.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attendant consoles  
Busy Verify and Barge-in Enhancement  
Page 99 of 504  
Attendant Monitor changes the operation of Busy Verify and Barge-in  
slightly. Tone is now configurable. Busy Verify and Barge-in restrictions  
relating to the Warning Tone Allowed/Denied Class of Service apply to  
Attendant Monitor as well.  
Attendant Forward No Answer  
Attendant Forward No Answer allows two enhancements to existing  
operations. The first enhancement permits calls presented to the attendant to  
forward to a second attendant or the night DN when a customer-defined time  
expires. The second enhancement allows DID or CO calls to any set during  
night service to disconnect if not answered within a predefined number of  
ring cycles.  
Attendant Forward No Answer is selectable on a customer basis, and is  
included in the package 134, AFNA.  
Semi-Automatic Camp-On  
Semi-Automatic Camp-On is an option to the current camp-on operation.  
When the party to which a call is camped-on becomes free, the attendant is  
recalled first instead of the wanted party being rung immediately. The  
modification is implemented under the Semi-Automatic Camp-on (SACP)  
package.  
When an external call is camped on to a busy DN by an attendant or a set, the  
called party receives a buzz (for digital sets) or a burst of tone (for analog  
[500/2500-type] sets), indicating camp-on. Without SACP, if the called party  
becomes idle within a customer-defined time, the camped-on call rings the  
station immediately.  
With SACP, if the called party becomes idle, the camped-on call recalls the  
attendant instead of ringing the called party. The called party meanwhile is  
kept busy from receiving any calls (but is still able to originate calls).  
A programmable key, the Semi-Automatic Camp-on Recall (SACP) key is  
included with the SACP feature.When a recall is presented to the console, the  
RECALL ICI lamp and the SACP lamp light up. After answering the recall  
from the calling party, the attendant can ring the called party by pressing the  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 100 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
SACP key. The attendant can then hold the call on the console, or release the  
call as usual.  
When the attendant tries to present the call (after it has recalled to the  
attendant) to the wanted party, this party may have originated another call. In  
that case, the attendant receives the indication that the set is busy, and can  
then camp-on the call again or release it, as usual. On a second camp-on, the  
attendant must activate the SACP feature again, if needed.  
The SACP feature is active either for all camped-on calls or on a per-call basis  
depending on the customer option. When the per-call basis is chosen, the  
attendant activates the feature by pressing the SACP key before camping-on  
the call. If the SACP key is pressed twice, the associated lamp goes dark, and  
the SACP feature becomes inactive for the call.  
Series Call  
The Series Call feature causes a source call (either an attendant-answered  
incoming call, or an attendant-originated trunk call), that has been extended  
to an internal destination party, to be recalled to the attendant when the  
destination party hangs up. The attendant can then send the source call to  
another destination party. This feature enables a caller to talk to more than  
one party without having to disconnect and call again. Recall to Same  
Attendant must be allowed, otherwise the recall is routed to the first available  
attendant. This process can be repeated for as many destinations as requested  
by the caller.  
A Series Call is canceled if one of the following occurs:  
•
•
•
the attendant presses the SECL key while the associated lamp is lit  
the attendant extends the source to a trunk while the SECL lamp is lit  
the attendant enters Night Service after extending the call and prior to  
receiving the recall  
•
•
the destination is call forwarded to a trunk  
the source disconnects  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attendant consoles  
Page 101 of 504  
Powering and reset  
After a power failure or a temporary corruption of data, the M2250 attendant  
console is reset automatically.  
If a permanent fault condition is detected, the console enters the maintenance  
mode (Position Busy), and a failure message is displayed on the LCD screen.  
Note 1: The failure code format is XXH, where XX is a two-digit  
hex-code indicating where the fault has been detected. Refer to Table 12  
on page 87 for explanations of the failure codes.  
Note 2: When the BLF/CGM is attached to the console, an additional 16  
V DC power supply (A0367601) is required for optional backlighting.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 102 of 504  
Attendant consoles  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
Page 103 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
LCD indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Volume control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Message Waiting lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Program key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
On-hook security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Environmental and safety considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Line engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Local alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Packing and unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Installation and removal of M2016S Secure Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Designate the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Cross-connect the telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 104 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Introduction  
The M2016S is a Telephone Security Group Class II-approved telephone  
designed to provide on-hook security. It is a high-performance multi-line  
telephone with 16 programmable feature keys. The M2016S uses relay  
circuitry that physically disconnects the handset from the telephone circuit  
when the switchhook is depressed. The red LED triangle lights steadily when  
the phone is not secure (that is, when the handset is off the hook, the phone is  
ringing, or the handset/piezo relays are connected). The red LED triangle  
blinks when a message is waiting.  
The M2016S has no handsfree capability. The M2016S does not support any  
accessories, options, or add-on modules.  
The telephone’s dimensions are as follows:  
Length: 9.75 in. (250 mm.)  
Width: 9.45 in. (235 mm.)  
Height: 3.64 in. (93 mm.)  
Weight: approximately 2 lbs. (1 kg.)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M2016S Secure Set  
Figure 20 illustrates the M2016 Secure Set.  
Page 105 of 504  
Figure 20  
M2016S Secure Set  
Filler plate  
Brandline  
insert  
Speaker  
Switchook  
Message waiting  
lamp  
Rls key  
Hold key  
16 Function keys  
with 8 LCDs  
Volume control  
Prime DN  
553-AAA1647.EPS  
Software requirements  
The option number for the M2016S is 170. The mnemonic is ARIE. The  
DSET package (88) and the TSET package (89) are required.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 106 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Physical description  
The M2016S is equipped with:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
LCD indicators  
Volume control  
Message Waiting lamp  
Hold key  
Release key  
Speaker  
LCD indicators  
The M2016S has a number of programmable keys with LCD indicators that  
can be assigned to any combination of directory numbers and features. The  
lower right-hand key (key 0) is reserved for the Primary DN.  
When equipped with a Display module, key 07 is automatically assigned as  
the Program key and cannot be changed.  
LCD indicators support 4 key/LCD states:  
Function  
idle  
LCD state  
off  
active  
ringing  
hold  
on (steady)  
flash (60 Hz)  
fast flash (120 Hz)  
Note: An indicator fast flashes when a feature key is pressed but the  
procedure necessary to activate the feature has not been completed.  
Volume control  
One key with two toggle positions controls volume. Pressing the right  
“volume up” or left “volume down” side of the key incrementally increases  
or decreases the volume for the tone or sound which is currently active.  
The volume settings are retained for subsequent calls until new volume  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 107 of 504  
adjustments are made. If the telephone is equipped with a Display Module,  
volume can be adjusted at any time with the setting displayed on the screen  
(in Program mode).  
Handset volumes can be configured to return to nominal on a per call basis.  
You can adjust the volume of the following tones, while they are audible:  
•
•
•
•
ringing  
handset/headset  
buzz  
on-hook dialing  
When the telephone is disconnected, all volume levels will return to default  
values upon reconnection.  
Message Waiting lamp  
The telephone has a red triangle in the upper right-hand corner that lights  
brightly to indicate a message is waiting. This LED is the primary message  
waiting indicator and lets you know a message is waiting regardless of  
whether the telephone has a message waiting key/lamp pair. You must have  
Message Waiting CCOS configured.  
If you do assign a message waiting key/lamp pair, there will be two  
indications of a message waiting:  
•
•
the red Message Waiting triangle blinks, and  
the LCD associated with the Message Waiting key flashes.  
You may assign an Autodial key that dials the message center (or voice mail  
system) to avoid the double indication, or have no key/lamp pair assigned to  
the message center.  
The Message Waiting lamp is also used to indicate security of the M2016S.  
The red LED triangle lights steadily when the phone is not secure (handset is  
off-hook, phone is ringing or any time the handset/piezo relays are  
connected). The red LED triangle blinks when a message is waiting.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 108 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Features  
The M2016S has 16 programmable keys. Earlier models can have a Display  
Module added. Later models of the set come with a display pre-installed.  
Note: If the set is equipped with a Display, the number of programmable  
keys is reduced by one, as key 07 automatically becomes the Program  
key.  
The features of the M2016S are as follows:  
•
•
•
Display Module (field-installable)  
Program key  
On-hook security  
For more information on M2016S features and operation, refer to  
Nortel M2016S Secure Set User Guide or Nortel M2016S Secure Set Quick  
Reference Guide.  
Display Module  
A 2-line by 24-character Display Module (NT2K28ABxx) provides system  
prompts, feedback on active features and valuable calling party information.  
In addition, you can modify various set features such as volume and screen  
contrast using the Program key (top right function key). You can enable a Call  
Timer which times calls made or received on the prime DN.  
The Display Module supports normal business features in several languages,  
including English, Spanish, and Quebec French.  
Note: You can adjust the display screen contrast so that it is too light or  
too dark to read. If you cannot read the display, disconnect and then  
reconnect the line cord to return to the default settings.  
Program key  
The Program key is automatically assigned to telephones with a Display  
Module. The Program key allows you to change a variety of display features  
such as screen format, contrast and language.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 109 of 504  
The upper right-hand key (key 07) automatically becomes the Program key  
when a Display Module is configured with the telephone. The Program key  
is local to the set and shows blank when you print key assignments in LD 20.  
On-hook security  
The M2016S is a Telephone Security Group Class II-approved telephone  
designed to provide on-hook security. The M2016S uses relay circuitry that  
physically disconnects the handset from the telephone circuit when the  
switchhook is depressed.  
On-hook security is indicated by the Message Waiting lamp. The red LED  
triangle lights steadily when the phone is not secure (handset is off-hook,  
phone is ringing or any time the handset/piezo relays are connected). The red  
LED triangle blinks when a message is waiting.  
Specifications  
The following specifications govern the performance of the M2016S  
telephone under the environmental conditions described.  
Environmental and safety considerations  
The M2016S meets the requirements of Electronic Industries Association  
(EIA) specification PN-1361.  
Temperature and humidity  
Tables 13 and 14 show the M2016S temperature and humidity requirements.  
Table 13  
M2016S operating state temperature and humidity requirements  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
0° to 50° C (32° to 104° F)  
5% to 95% (non-condensing). At  
temperatures above 34°C (93°F) relative  
humidity is limited to 53 mbar of water vapor  
pressure.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Page 110 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Table 14  
M2016S storage state temperature and humidity requirements  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
-50° to 70° C (-58° to 158° F)  
5% to 95% (non-condensing). At  
temperatures above 34°C (93°F) relative  
humidity is limited to 53 mbar of water vapor  
pressure.  
Electromagnetic interference  
The radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference meets the  
requirements of Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules for Class A computing  
devices.  
Line engineering  
The maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft. (915 m), assuming 24  
AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge taps. A 15.5 dB loss at  
256 KHz defines the loop length limit (longer lengths are possible, depending  
on the wire's gauge and insulation).  
The M2016S uses a 6 conductor line cord (A0346862).  
Note: Use only the line cord provided with the telephone. Using a cord  
designed for other digital telephones could result in damage to the  
M2016S.  
Local alerting tones  
The M2016S telephone provides four alerting tones and a buzz sound. The  
system controls the ringing cadence by sending tone-ON and tone-OFF  
messages to the telephone. The alerting tone cadences cannot be changed  
from the telephone, but can be altered for individual telephones by  
software-controlled adjustments.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 111 of 504  
Alerting tone characteristics  
The tone frequency combinations are:  
Tone  
Frequencies  
Warble Rate (Hz)  
1
2
3
4
667 Hz, 500 Hz  
667 Hz, 500 Hz  
333 Hz, 250 H  
333 Hz, 250 Hz  
10.4  
2.6  
10.4  
2.6  
A 500 Hz buzz signal is provided for incoming call notification while the  
receiver is off-hook.  
Power requirements  
Power Supply Board  
The power supply option consists of a Power Supply Board which mounts  
inside the telephone, coupled with an external wall-mount transformer which  
provides power to the Power Supply Board. The Power Supply Board  
receives its power through pins 1 and 6 of the line cord.  
The Power Supply Board connects to the telephone through a 14 pin bottom  
entry connector.  
The Power Supply Board comes factory installed with any configuration of  
the M2016S.  
Local plug-in transformer  
A single winding transformer equipped with a 10 ft. (3 m) cord of 22 AWG  
two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular RJ-11 duplex  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 112 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
adapter (refer to Figure 21 on page 113) can provide the additional power  
needed to operate the telephone and its options.  
WARNING  
Do not plug any equipment (computer, modem, LAN  
card) other than the M2016S into the RJ-11 transformer  
adapter, as damage to equipment may result.  
120 V transformer (AO367335 or equivalent). The following minimum  
specifications must be met by this transformer:  
Input voltage: 120 V AC / 60 Hz  
No load output voltage: 29 V AC maximum  
Voltage at rated current: 26.7 V AC minimum  
Rated load current: 700 mA  
240 V transformer (AO367914 or equivalent). The following minimum  
specifications have to be met by this transformer:  
Input voltage: 240 V AC / 50 Hz  
No load output voltage: 29 V AC maximum  
Voltage at rated current: 26.7 V AC minimum  
Rated load current: 700 mA  
Note: You cannot wall mount the telephone over the wall jack when  
using a transformer, due to the size of the RJ-11 adapter. Hang it above  
or to the side of the jack and run the line and power cords to it.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 113 of 504  
Figure 21  
Configuration of local plug-in transformer  
553-AAA0725  
Installation  
Packing and unpacking  
Use proper care when unpacking the M2016S. Check for damaged containers  
so that appropriate claims can be made to the transport company for items  
damaged in transit.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 114 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
If a telephone must be returned to the factory, pack it in the appropriate  
container to avoid damage during transit. Remember to include all loose parts  
(cords, handset, power unit, labels, and lenses) in the shipment.  
Installation and removal of M2016S Secure Set  
Follow the steps in Procedure 24 on page 114 to install the M2016S.  
Procedure 24  
Installing the M2016S telephone  
1
Complete the wiring and cross-connections (loop power) before  
connecting the telephone to the TELADAPT connector. See Figure 22 on  
page 115 and Figure 23 on page 116.  
2
Place the telephone upside down on a number of sheets of soft, clean  
paper on a solid, level work surface to prevent damage to movable keys  
and the telephone’s face.  
3
4
Connect the handset cord (5-conductor TELADAPT connectors) to the  
handset and snap it into place.  
Connect the other end of the handset cord to the connector in the bottom  
cover of the telephone. Turn the smooth side of the handset cord up  
(away from the telephone bottom cover) before tucking it under the  
restraining tab to ensure that the telephone will sit level on the desk after  
installation is complete.  
5
6
7
Connect the line cord to the telephone bottom cover. Route the cord  
through the channels.  
Turn the telephone right-side up and place it in the normal operating  
position.  
Print the directory number on the designation card. Using a paper clip,  
remove the number lens from the telephone. Insert the designation card  
and snap the lens back into place.  
8
9
Designate the feature keys.  
Insert the line cord TELADAPT connector into the connecting block (jack)  
and snap it into place.  
10 Perform the self-test (see Procedure 25 on page 116) and acceptance  
test procedures. See LD 31 in the Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 115 of 504  
11 Supply the user with a Quick Reference Card and all user documentation.  
Make sure the SPRE number is printed on the Quick Reference Card.  
End of Procedure  
Figure 22  
M2016S Secure Set connections  
White  
Black  
Meridian  
Digital  
Telephone  
CS 1000  
/ Meridian 1  
(R)  
Red  
(T) Green  
Yellow  
Blue  
Alternate power  
To closet  
Power Supply  
Wall mount  
transformer  
553-AAA2030  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 116 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Figure 23  
M2016S cross-connections.  
Telephone  
connecting  
block, or connector  
Pack  
connector  
PE shelf  
Cross connect  
block  
Line  
Pack  
T0  
26  
G
R
Line cord  
to telephone  
W-BL  
BL-W  
T0  
R0  
R0  
Unit 0  
1
W
B
For Power  
Supply leads  
T1  
28  
T1  
R1  
W-G  
G-W  
Unit 1  
R1  
3
to telephone  
T6  
R6  
BK-G  
G-BK  
Unit 6  
Unit 7  
38  
13  
T6  
R6  
to telephone  
to telephone  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
BK-S  
S-BK  
T7  
R7  
Part of  
25 pair cable  
Shelf  
connector  
Part of 25  
pair cable  
553-AAA0587  
The M2016S set has a self-testing capability. Follow the steps in  
Procedure 25 to perform the self-test after installing an M2016S set, or any of  
the hardware options, to ensure proper operation.  
Procedure 25  
M2016S self-test  
1
2
Unplug the line cord from the telephone.  
While holding down the RLS key, plug in the line cord to the telephone.  
Let go of the RLS key.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 117 of 504  
3
Follow the steps in Table 15 to perform the necessary steps and check  
results.  
Table 15  
M2016S telephone self-test steps and results (Part 1 of 2)  
Step  
1
Action  
Result  
Begin test (plug in line cord while  
holding down the RLS key).  
Speaker beeps once, all LCDs flash.  
Message Waiting lamps light steadily.  
Display reads:LOCAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
PRESS RLS KEY TO EXIT  
The handset is on hook.  
2
Press each Function key, from zero  
to fifteen (if there are Key Expansion  
Modules, continue pressing the  
Function keys, in any order).  
Adjacent LCD goes off when a key is  
pressed.  
3
Press the Hold key.  
Speaker beeps.  
4
Press each dial pad key.  
Lift the handset (if applicable).  
Press the dial pad keys.  
Replace the handset.  
Speaker beeps each time a key is pressed.  
Speaker beeps.  
5a  
Handset beeps.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 118 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Table 15  
M2016S telephone self-test steps and results (Part 2 of 2)  
Step  
5b  
Action  
Result  
Plug in the headset (if applicable).  
Press the dial pad keys.  
Unplug the headset.  
Speaker beeps.  
Headset beeps.  
6
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display is filled with dark squares.  
Speaker beeps.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Display is blank.  
Press the right side of volume control  
key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display shows symbols including digits 0–9  
and uppercase alphabet  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display shows symbols including upper- and  
lowercase alphabet.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display shows various symbols.  
Speaker beeps.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Display shows symbols.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display is filled with dark squares.  
Message Waiting lamp goes off.  
Display shows idle screen within 10 seconds.  
7
Press the RLS key (end of test).  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 119 of 504  
Designate the telephone  
Before designating the M2016S telephone, check the work order for the  
features enabled and key designations. Designate each key by placing its  
feature name (from the designation sheet) in the key cap that fits on the key.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 26 to designate the M2016S telephone.  
Procedure 26  
Designating the M2016S telephone  
1
2
Remove the cap from each key requiring a designation.  
Place the designation in the cap, place the cap over the corresponding  
key, and gently press down. Repeat for all keys requiring designations.  
3
4
5
Insert a paper clip into the hole at the left or right end of the designation  
window.  
Gently pry the window toward the center and remove, and insert the  
number tag.  
Replace the designation window.  
End of Procedure  
Cross-connect the telephone  
Be sure to connect the telephones as shown in Figure 24 on page 121.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 27 to cross-connect the telephones.  
Procedure 27  
Cross-connecting the telephones  
1
Locate the telephone terminations at the cross-connect terminal.  
Telephone terminations are located on the vertical side of the frame when  
frame-mounted blocks are used and in the blue field when wall-mounted  
blocks are used.  
2
3
Connect Z-type cross-connecting wire to the leads of the telephone. See  
Table 16 on page 120 and Table 17 on page 121.  
Locate the line circuit card (TN) terminations.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Page 120 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
Line circuit card (TN) terminations are located on the horizontal side of the  
distributing frame when frame-mounted blocks are used and in the white  
field when wall-mounted blocks are used.  
4
Run and connect the other end of the cross-connecting wire to the  
assigned TN terminal block.  
End of Procedure  
Table 16  
Z-type cross-connecting wire  
Size  
Gauge  
Color  
Designation  
1 pr  
22  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
Tip  
Ring  
3 pr  
24  
Voice T  
Voice R  
Signal T  
Signal R  
Power  
Power  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M2016S Secure Set  
Page 121 of 504  
Table 17  
Inside wiring colors  
Inside wiring colors  
Connect to  
Z station wire  
16/25-pair cable  
equipment TN  
G
R
W-BL  
BL-W  
First pair Tip  
First pair Ring  
BK  
W-O  
Second pair Tip  
Y
O-W  
Second pair Ring  
Figure 24  
M2016S telephone cross-connections  
Telephone  
connecting  
block, or connector  
Pack  
connector  
PE shelf  
Cross connect  
block  
Line  
Pack  
T0  
G
R
Line cord  
to telephone  
26  
1
W-BL  
BL-W  
T0  
R0  
R0  
Unit 0  
W
B
For Power  
Supply leads  
T1  
R1  
28  
3
T1  
R1  
W-G  
G-W  
Unit 1  
to telephone  
T6  
R6  
BK-G  
G-BK  
Unit 6  
Unit 7  
38  
13  
T6  
R6  
to telephone  
to telephone  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
BK-S  
S-BK  
T7  
R7  
Part of  
25 pair cable  
Shelf  
connector  
Part of 25  
pair cable  
553-AAA0587  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 122 of 504  
M2016S Secure Set  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
Page 123 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Automatic Call Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
M3901 Entry Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
M3902 Basic Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
M3903 Enhanced Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
M3904 Professional Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
M3905 Call Center Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Set-to-Set Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Personal Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Corporate Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Full Icon Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Language selection during software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Feature keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
M3900 accessories and add-ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Accessory Connection Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Analog Terminal Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Computer Telephony Integration Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI) software . . 151  
Personal Directory PC Utility Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Accessory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 124 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Alternate key caps for the M3905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Handset option for the M3905 Call Center Telephone . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Headset options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Telephone wall-mount kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Full Duplex Handsfree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Brandline insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Key descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
M3901 key descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
M3902 key descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
M3903 key descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
M3904 key descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
M3905 key descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Introduction  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephones consists of the following telephones:  
•
•
M3901 Entry Telephone — an entry-level telephone for occasional use  
M3902 Basic Telephone — for manufacturing floor, warehouse, and  
low telephone use  
•
•
•
M3903 Enhanced Telephone — an enhanced telephone for office  
professionals and technical specialists  
M3904 Professional Telephone — a professional telephone for  
Managers, Executives, Administrative Assistants  
M3905 Call Center Telephone — a call center telephone for Agents  
and Supervisors  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephones, X11 Release 25 and later, supports the  
following features:  
•
•
•
•
Context-sensitive soft keys (M3903 and M3904)  
Set-to-Set Messaging (M3903 and M3904)  
Corporate Directory (M3903 and M3904)  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office (M3903 and M3904)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Display-Based Accessory Module (M3904)  
Page 125 of 504  
•
•
•
Flash download of firmware (M3902, M3903, M3904. and M3905)  
Language selection during software installation for M3900 Series Digital  
Telephones  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephones, X11 Release 25.40 (Phase III) and  
later, supports the following features and enhancements:  
•
•
Full Duplex Handsfree (M3904 Phase III)  
System-initiated language selection (M3902, M3903, M3904, and  
M3905)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forward enhancements (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
31-digit dialing (M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Callers List soft key (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Redial List soft key (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Pause in dialing string (M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Special character support (M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Headset state support (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Set-to-Set Messaging enhancements (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
One-button feature access to Corporate Directory (M3903, M3904, and  
M3905)  
•
•
•
Corporate Directory search enhancement (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office enhancements  
Virtual Office clearing of the Callers List and Redial List (M3903 and  
M3904)  
•
•
•
•
Automatic log out of Virtual Office  
Speed Call for Virtual Office  
System-initiated language download  
Personal Directory fixed feature key  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 126 of 504  
M 3900 description  
M3900 Series Digital Telephones communicate with the CS 1000 and  
Meridian 1 through digital transmission over standard twisted-pair wiring.  
M3900 Series Digital Telephones can interface with all versions of the  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Digital Line Card (DLC). The DLC  
supports 16 voice ports and 16 data ports. The system software assigns a TN  
to each port in the system.  
For more information on features and telephone operations, refer to the  
following documents:  
•
•
•
Meridian Digital Telephones: M3901, M3902, M3903, M3904 User  
Guide  
Meridian Digital Telephones: M3902, M3903, M3904 Quick Reference  
Guide  
Meridian Digital Telephone: M3905 Call Center User Guide  
Automatic Call Failover  
The Active Call Failover (ACF) feature enables an M3900 Series Digital  
Telephone to reregister in the ACF mode during a supported system failure.  
The ACF mode preserves the following:  
•
•
•
active media stream  
LED status of the Mute, Handsfree, and Headset keys  
DRAM content  
Note: All other elements (feature keys, soft keys and text areas) are  
retained until the user presses a key or the connection with the Call  
Server is resumed. If the user presses a key during the failover, the  
display is cleared and a localized “Server Unreachable” message is  
displayed.  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephone uses this new mode of reregistration  
only when the Call Server explicitly tells the telephone to do so. M3900  
Series Digital Telephones clear all call information if they register to a Call  
Server or Line Terminal Proxy Server (LTPS) that does not support the ACF  
feature.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M 3900 description  
Page 127 of 504  
For more information on Active Call Failover, refer to IP Line: Description,  
Installation, and Operation (553-3001-365).  
Physical description  
These telephones are digital, integrated voice/data telephones with the  
physical features listed in Table 18.  
Table 18  
M3900 features (Part 1 of 2)  
M3901  
entry level  
M3902  
basic  
M3903  
enhanced  
M3904  
professional  
M3905  
call center  
lines sup-  
ported  
1
1
4
12  
7
Program-  
mable  
5
3
4
4
4
feature keys  
fixed fea-  
ture keys  
no  
no  
Options/  
Program,  
Message  
(with LED),  
Transfer  
Options/  
Program,  
Message,  
Application,  
Shift, Call  
Log  
Options/  
Program,  
Message,  
Application,  
Shift, Direc-  
tory/Log  
Supervisor,  
Emergency,  
Not Ready,  
Make Busy,  
In-calls  
(with LED)  
fixed keys  
for call  
processing  
Hold,  
Hold, Good-bye,  
Hold,  
Good-bye,  
Smart Mute  
(with LED),  
Handsfree  
(with LED)  
Smart Mute (with LED),  
Headset (with LED),  
Handsfree (with LED)  
Good-bye,  
Smart Mute  
(with LED),  
Headset  
(with LED)  
Supervisor  
Observe  
Key (with  
LED)  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
fixed appli-  
cation keys  
Up, Down,  
Left, Right  
Up, Down, Left, Right, Quit, and Copy  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 128 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 18  
M3900 features (Part 2 of 2)  
M3901  
entry level  
M3902  
basic  
M3903  
enhanced  
M3904  
professional  
M3905  
call center  
Display  
no  
(2 x 24):  
(3 x 24):  
(5 x 24):  
(4 x 24):  
1 Text Lines,  
1 Label Line  
1 Info Line,  
1 Text Lines,  
1 Label Line  
1 Info Line,  
3 Text Lines,  
1 Label Line  
1 Info Line,  
2 Text Lines,  
1 Label Line  
Accessory  
Ports  
no  
no  
1
2
2
2
Accessories  
ATA, Com-  
puter Tele-  
phony  
Interface  
Adapter  
ATA, CTIA,  
MEARI  
ATA, CTIA,  
Display-  
Based  
Accessory  
(DBA),  
MEARI, Full  
Duplex  
ATA, CTIA,  
DBA,  
MEARI,  
KBA, Per-  
sonal Direc-  
tory PC  
(CTIA),  
Meridian  
External  
Alerter &  
Recording  
Interface  
(MEARI)  
Utility  
Handsfree  
(FDHF),  
Key-Based  
Accessory  
(KBA), Per-  
sonal Direc-  
tory PC  
Utility  
Headset  
through MPA jack  
Direct Connect  
Note 1: All telephones are desk- or wall-mountable, have message  
waiting LED with visual ringing, and have volume control.  
Note 2: The KBA and DBA modules cannot be wall mounted.  
M3901 Entry Telephone  
The features of the M3901 include:  
one line Directory Number (DN) capability  
•
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 129 of 504  
•
•
•
five programmable features  
fixed feature keys: Line, Feature, Hold, Goodbye, and Volume control  
feature activation and Message waiting/incoming call status indicator  
LED  
•
support for an amplified headset  
Figure 25  
M3901 Entry Telephone  
Feature activation indicator  
Hold  
Feature  
Goodbye  
Line  
Message and call  
status indicator  
Feature card  
Volume bar  
553-AAA0660  
M3902 Basic Telephone  
The features of the M3902 include:  
•
•
•
one line Directory Number (DN) capability  
three programmable soft keys (soft-labeled)  
fixed feature keys: Options, Message, Transfer, Goodbye, Hold, “Smart”  
Mute, and Volume control  
•
•
two lines by twenty-four character display area  
Group Listening  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 130 of 504  
M 3900 description  
•
•
•
•
on-hook dialing  
support for an amplified headset  
one accessory port  
handsfree calling option with LED  
Figure 26  
M3902 Basic Telephone  
LCD indicator  
Message waiting light  
One line  
Programmable  
feature keys  
LED  
Handsfree key  
eys  
eature k  
Fixed f  
eys  
Navigation k  
Volume bar  
LED  
553-AAA0661  
M3903 Enhanced Telephone  
The features of the M3903 include:  
•
•
•
two programmable line/feature keys (soft-labeled) which have two  
layers each, giving the user access to four line/feature keys  
four Context-sensitive soft keys (soft-labeled) that change functionality  
depending on the features available or the application in use  
Handsfree calling with LED  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 131 of 504  
•
fixed feature keys: Goodbye, Message, Call log (including Redial List),  
Applications, Shift, Goodbye, Hold, “Smart” Mute, and volume control  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation cluster, Quit, and Copy  
three line by twenty-four character display area  
Call Log (includes Redial List)  
Group Listening  
on-hook dialing  
two accessory ports  
support for an amplified or unamplified headset  
Direct connect headset port  
Full icon support (with expansion module)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 132 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 27  
M3903 Enhanced Telephone  
LCD indicator  
Goodbye  
Hold  
Message waiting light  
Soft-labeled line/  
feature keys.  
Programmable  
feature keys  
LED  
Handsfree key  
Fixed feature keys  
Copy  
Navigation keys  
Volume bar  
LED  
Options  
Quit  
553-AAA0662  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 133 of 504  
M3904 Professional Telephone  
The features of the M3904 telephone include:  
•
six programmable line/feature keys (soft-labeled) which have two layers  
each, giving the user access to 12 line/feature keys  
•
four Context-sensitive soft keys (soft-labeled) that change functionality  
depending on the features available or the application in use  
•
•
Handsfree calling with LED  
fixed feature keys: Options, Message, Directory/Log (including Redial  
List), Applications, Shift, Goodbye, Hold, “Smart” Mute, Volume  
control  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation cluster, Quit, and Copy  
five line by twenty-four character display  
Personal Directory  
Call Log (includes Redial List)  
Group Listening  
on-hook dialing  
two accessory ports (support for an amplified/unamplified headset)  
Direct connect headset port  
Full icon support (with expansion modules)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 134 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 28  
M3904 Professional Telephone  
LCD indicator  
Goodbye  
Hold  
Message waiting light  
Soft-labeled line/  
feature keys  
Programmable  
feature keys  
LED  
Handsfree key  
Fixed feature keys  
Copy  
Volume bar  
Navigation keys  
LED  
Options  
Quit  
553-AAA0663  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 135 of 504  
M3905 Call Center Telephone  
The features of the M3905 Call Center Telephone include:  
•
•
•
seven programmable line/feature keys (soft-labeled), giving the user  
access to seven line/feature keys  
four Context-sensitive soft keys (soft-labeled) that change functionality  
depending on the features available or the application in use  
fixed feature keys with LED: Headset, Supervisor, Emergency, Not  
Ready, Make Busy, In-Calls, goodbye, Hold, “Smart” Mute, Volume  
control  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation cluster, Quit and Copy  
four line by twenty-four character display  
an optional handset  
two accessory ports (supports amplified/unamplified headset)  
Supervisor Observe Key with LED  
Full icon support (with expansion modules)  
Supervisor Headset Observe port  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 136 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 29  
M3905 Call Center Telephone  
LCD display  
Goodbye  
Hold  
Message waiting light/  
incoming call indicator  
LED  
Programmable line/  
Supervisor  
Observe key  
feature keys  
(Self-labeled)  
Programmable  
feature keys  
(Self-labeled)  
Fixed feature keys  
In-Calls  
Copy  
Volume control bar  
LED  
Make Busy  
Headset  
Navigation keys  
Not Ready  
Mute  
Supervisor  
Quit  
Emergency  
553-AAA0664  
Note: The system administrator can configure four of the bottom six  
fixed feature keys (Make Busy, Not Ready, Supervisor and Emergency)  
to feature keys that suit the business needs of the Call Center user.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 137 of 504  
Features  
The following section describes the following key features supported on  
M3900 Series Digital Telephones:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set-to-Set Messaging  
Personal Directory  
Corporate Directory  
Full Icon Support  
Language selection during software installation  
Feature keys  
Set-to-Set Messaging  
The Set-to-Set Messaging feature provides a visual message from one M3900  
telephone to another M3900 telephone when a user makes a call to that  
telephone. The user on an M3903, M3904, or M3905 set enters the Set-to-Set  
Messaging text at the telephone. Set-to-Set Messaging is accessed through  
the Applications key.  
The maximum length for Set-to-Set Messaging text is 24 characters (one line  
of the set display).  
Table 19 shows examples of Set-to-Set Messaging text.  
Table 19  
Examples of message text (Part 1 of 2)  
OUT TO LUNCH  
BACK TO WORK: 4 Dec 02  
BACK TO OFFICE: Jan 03  
WILL REPLY AFTER 1 PM  
BACK @ 4:00 PM  
NOT IN TODAY  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 138 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 19  
Examples of message text (Part 2 of 2)  
RETURN SOON -- 8:10 AM  
GONE FOR THE DAY  
The user may have only one Set-to-Set message on their telephone at a time.  
To activate Set-to-Set Messaging, the user must first define a message. If  
password protection is active for the M3900, it also applies to Set-to-Set  
Messaging.  
If the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) feature is active, then  
MARP determines which DNs receive the Set-to-Set Message. If MARP is  
not active, then Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN) determines  
which DNs configured on the telephone receive the Set-to-Set Message.  
To use Set-to-Set Messaging, the M3903, M3904, or M3905 telephone must  
have:  
•
•
•
Set-to-Set Messaging feature Class of Service enabled  
Set-to-Set Message text created  
Set-to-Set Messaging feature enabled  
When Set-to-Set Messaging is active, the caller hears an audible tone and the  
Set-to-Set Message appears on their display. The caller then hears ringback  
and the call goes to voice messaging. If the called set is busy, a call waiting  
tone is heard by the called party.  
Personal Directory  
With M3900 Phase III, press the Directory/Log fixed feature key to access  
the Personal Directory on M3904 telephones. On M3905 telephones, press  
the Directory self-labeled programmable feature key. You do not have to  
press the Select key after pressing the Directory/Log or DIR/LOG key.  
Once you press the Directory/Log or DIR/LOG key, you can immediately  
begin a search using the dial pad keys, provided that Personal Directory was  
highlighted in the selection list.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 139 of 504  
Note: M3900 Phase III allows you to perform a three-letter search in the  
Personal Directory.  
Corporate Directory  
The M3903, M3904, and M3905 telephones provide access from the  
telephone to a corporate-wide directory. The Corporate Directory is accessed  
through the Applications Key. The Corporate Directory allows users to:  
•
•
•
•
•
search by name  
view additional information on each entry  
dial from the Corporate Directory  
copy and paste an entry into the Personal Directory (M3904)  
view an alphabetical listing of entries by last name (system generated)  
Note: When names are copied to the Personal Directory (M3904), the  
names are listed by first name.  
The system administrator can configure Optivity Telephony Manager (OTM)  
to download the directory database manually or automatically to the system.  
Operating parameters  
The user must have an M3903, M3904, or M3905 telephone to support the  
Corporate Directory feature. To access the Corporate Directory from the  
telephone, the user must have the Corporate Directory Class of Service  
enabled.  
When the Corporate Directory is being updated with new data, the user  
cannot access the Corporate Directory. The user exits the Corporate Directory  
by pressing the Quit key or the Applications key.  
The OTM utility gathers data from OTM databases and downloads it to the  
system. To use Corporate Directory, OTM must be installed.  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
The Virtual Office feature allows users to log in to a designated M3903 or  
M3904 Digital Telephone and user their individual telephone configurations  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 140 of 504  
M 3900 description  
at that telephone. The calls to the user’s primary DN are routed to the Virtual  
Office Host Terminal where the Virtual Office worker is logged in.  
For further information on Virtual Office, refer to “M3900 (single site)  
Virtual Office” on page 173.  
Full Icon Support  
The M3900 Full Icon Support feature enables distinct icons and flashing  
cadences for the display of different call states. These icons are displayed for  
the Directory Number (DN) keys on the Phase II and Phase III M3903 and  
M3904 telephones, as well as the Phase III M3905 telephones.  
The M3900 Full Icon Support feature requires a minimum of Release 9 of the  
Key-Based Accessory module (KBA).  
The icons also display on the Key-Based Accessory module and the  
Display-Based Accessory module. This feature allows the user to quickly  
determine the call state of a DN, instead of viewing just the flashing cadence  
of a single generic icon to determine the call state.  
The functions displayed with the Full Icon Support feature are: I-Ringing,  
I-Active, U-Active, I-Hold, and U-Hold. The icons appear on the LCD  
displays located next to the DN keys. The scenarios for these icons are as  
follows:  
•
•
•
•
•
I-Ringing: The I-Ringing icon is displayed on the ringing DN of a set  
that is being called.  
I-Active: The I-Active icon is displayed on DNs on telephones in the  
active call state.  
U-Active: The U-Active icon appears on the MADN of a set when  
another set on the MADN is in the active call state.  
I-Hold: The I-Hold icon appears on the DN of the set that has a call on  
hold.  
U-Hold: The U-Hold icon appears on the MADN of a set when another  
set on the MADN has a call in the hold state.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 141 of 504  
The Ringing, I-Hold, U-Hold, and Active DN keys, represented by a generic  
icon in previous releases, displays the following icons with the Full  
Icon Support feature:  
Table 20  
Icons and Cadences  
Call/Feature state  
DN key icon  
Cadence  
Ringing  
Flash  
I-Hold  
U-Hold  
I-Active  
U-Active  
Wink  
Flicker  
On  
On  
Feature interactions  
There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.  
Feature packaging  
The M3900 Full Icon Support feature requires the following packages:  
•
•
M3900 Full Icon Support (ICON_PACKAGE) package 397  
Digital Sets (DSET) package 88  
Feature implementation  
Use LD 17 to enable M3900 Full Icon Support:  
LD 17 - Enable M3900 Full Icon Support (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
CHG  
Change existing data  
System Parameters  
TYPE  
PARM  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 142 of 504  
M 3900 description  
LD 17 - Enable M3900 Full Icon Support (Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
.....  
ICON  
(NO) YES  
Enable the M3900 Full Icon Support feature  
NO = Disable the M3900 Full Icon Support feature  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Language selection during software installation  
The system software installer selects one of seven language sets to be  
installed on the system. This selection determines the languages available to  
M3900 Series telephone users. The language sets are as follows:  
1
2
3
4
Global 10 Languages — English, French, German, Spanish, Swedish,  
Italian, Norwegian, Brazilian Portuguese, Finnish, Japanese Katakana  
Western Europe 10 Languages — English, French, German, Spanish,  
Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Brazilian Portuguese  
Eastern Europe 10 Languages — English, French, German, Dutch,  
Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Russian, Latvian, Turkish  
North America 6 Languages — English, French, German, Spanish,  
Brazilian Portuguese, Japanese Katakana  
5
6
7
Spare Group A  
Spare Group B (duplicate of set 4)  
Packaged Languages  
During the software installation process, the installer selects one of the above  
seven Peripheral Software DownLoad (PSDL) files. Refer to the following  
documents for more information on software installation:  
•
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Small System  
Installation and Configuration (553-3011-210)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 143 of 504  
•
•
•
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System  
Installation and Configuration (553-3021-210)  
Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration  
(553-3031-210)  
Communication Server 1000E: Installation and Configuration  
(553-3041-210)  
Feature keys  
The fixed feature keys (see Table 21) are the feature keys on the  
M3900 Series Digital Telephone that are prelabeled with the assigned  
feature. The fixed feature keys appear on the telephone with text or icon  
labels. Telephones with icon labels are only available in specific market  
regions.  
Table 21  
Fixed Feature Key text and icon labels (Part 1 of 4)  
Feature  
Text Key Label  
Icon Key Label  
Goodbye  
Goodbye  
Hold  
Hold  
or  
Mute  
Mute  
Handsfree  
Volume  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 144 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 21  
Fixed Feature Key text and icon labels (Part 2 of 4)  
Feature  
Text Key Label  
Icon Key Label  
Headset  
Headset  
Options  
Line  
Options  
DN line  
Feature (M3901)  
Message  
Fx  
Feature  
Message  
Directory/Log  
Call Log  
Directory/Log  
(M3904)  
Call Log (M3903)  
Shift  
Shift  
Application  
Navigation  
Applications  
Copy  
Quit  
Copy  
Quit  
Quit  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 145 of 504  
Table 21  
Fixed Feature Key text and icon labels (Part 3 of 4)  
Feature  
Text Key Label  
Icon Key Label  
Transfer  
(M3902)  
Transfer  
InCalls  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
In - Calls  
Not Ready  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Not Ready  
Make Busy  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Make Busy  
Supervisor  
Ans Agent  
Activity  
Call Supervisor  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Answer Agent  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Activity Code  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Answer Emergency  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Ans Emerg  
Emergency  
Emergency  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 146 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 21  
Fixed Feature Key text and icon labels (Part 4 of 4)  
Feature  
Text Key Label  
Icon Key Label  
Observe Agent  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Obv Agent  
Display Queue  
(M3905 Call  
Center)  
Dsply Queue  
Note: Icon key labels are available in specific markets areas.  
Programmable line/feature keys (soft-labeled)  
The programmable line/feature keys (soft-labeled) are the keys located at the  
left and right sides of the upper section of the display area. Soft-labeled keys  
are keys that are labeled on the telephone’s LCD display.  
The user-defined programmable line/feature keys of the M3900 Series  
Digital Telephones deliver the ability for a user to change the LCD labels of  
their set keys (with the exception of the primary Directory Number key) to  
meet their business needs. The M3900 soft-labeling is similar to the previous  
digital telephones, which required paper labels to be created and inserted  
under clear key caps. By design, this information is stored in the set itself. A  
user-defined soft label is fully controlled by the set user and will not change  
if the key programming is changed. It does not depend on the actual  
programming of the key, which is defined by the system software.  
The programmable line/feature key (soft-labeled) provides two layers of  
functionality on the M3903 and M3904. Pressing the Shift key allows access  
to the second layer. The two layer keys on the M3903 and M3904 provide the  
user access to two lines/features per key. For example, the M3904 has six  
programmable line/feature keys (soft-labeled), which provide the user with  
12 line/feature keys accessible on the six keys.  
Soft Keys (soft-labeled)  
The soft keys (soft-labeled) are the three (M3902) or four (M3903, M3904,  
and M3905) keys located below the display on the M3900 Series Digital  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 147 of 504  
Telephones. The labels and corresponding functionality of these keys change  
depending on the features available or the application in use.  
Programmable Features  
For feature key assignment information, refer to:  
•
•
•
•
•
Table 24 on page 159  
Table 25 on page 161  
Table 26 on page 162  
Table 27 on page 166  
Table 28 on page 169  
M3900 accessories and add-ons  
Table 22 lists the accessories and optional hardware available for each  
M3900 Series Digital Telephone.  
Table 22  
M3900 series telephone accessories compatibility (Part 1 of 2)  
X11  
M3900  
release  
introduced  
phase  
introduced  
Accessory  
M3902  
M3903  
M3904  
M3905  
Accessory  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Connection  
Module (ACM)  
Analog Terminal  
Adapter (ATA)1  
Release  
24.24  
Phase I  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Computer  
Telephony  
Release  
25.40  
Phase III  
Supports2  
Integration  
Adapter (CTIA)  
Display-Based  
Accessory Module  
(DBA)  
Release  
25.10  
Phase II  
NA  
NA  
Supports  
Supports2  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 148 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 22  
M3900 series telephone accessories compatibility (Part 2 of 2)  
X11  
M3900  
release  
introduced  
phase  
introduced  
Accessory  
M3902  
M3903  
M3904  
M3905  
Key-Based  
Accessory Module  
(KBA)  
Release  
24.24  
Phase I  
Phase I  
NA  
NA  
Supports  
Supports  
Meridian External  
Alerter and  
Release  
24.24  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Recording  
Interface (MEARI)  
Full Duplex  
Handsfree (FDHF)  
Release  
25.40  
Phase III  
Phase I  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Supports3  
Supports  
Supports  
NA  
Personal Directory  
PC Utility  
Release  
24.24  
NA  
Supports2  
Supports  
Headset  
Supports  
(non-amplified)  
connects through  
the direct connect  
headset jack  
Headset  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
Supports  
(amplified)  
connects through  
the headset jack  
1. In the EMEA market region, the ATA is not supported on the M3902, M3903, or M3905.  
2. M3905 Phase III firmware is required to support the Personal Directory PC Utility, DBA, and CTIA  
accessories.  
3. M3904 Phase III firmware and hardware are required to support Full-Duplex Handsfree accessory.  
Accessory Connection Module  
The Accessory Connection Module (ACM) provides the interface for adding  
the Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA), Meridian External Alerter and  
Recording Interface (MEARI), Computer Telephony Interface Adapter  
(CTIA), Personal Directory PC Utility, and Full Duplex Handsfree (FDHF).  
The ACM is available for the M3902, M3903, M3904 and the M3905. It also  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 149 of 504  
acts as a footstand for the telephone. The ACM and its accessory cartridges  
cannot be used in wall-mount applications.  
The ACM requires one of the following wall transformers to power any of the  
accessory cartridges:  
•
•
•
110 V wall transformer (NTMN80AA)  
EU (EMEA) 230 V wall transformer (NTHC09AA)  
UK 230 V wall transformer (NTHC08AA)  
You must order the wall transformer separately from your Nortel distributor  
to power the ACM and/or the M3900 accessories.  
Table 23 shows the compatibilities of M3900 Series Digital Telephone  
accessories.  
Table 23  
Accessory compatibilities  
Personal  
Directory  
PC Utility  
ATA  
CTIA  
FDHF  
MEARI  
KBA  
DBA  
ATA  
N/A  
YES  
N/A  
YES  
NO  
YES  
NO  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
1
CTIA  
YES  
YES  
YES  
N/A  
YES  
1
PC  
YES  
N/A  
YES  
Utility  
2
FDHF  
MEARI  
KBA  
NO  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
N/A  
YES  
N/A  
YES  
N/A  
NO  
N/A  
YES  
NO  
2
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
N/A  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
DBA  
N/A  
Note: Not all of the above accessories are supported on all telephones in the M3900 Series  
portfolio. Refer to Table 22 on page 147.  
1. If either the CTIA or the PC Utility cartridge is installed, no additional cartridge is required. The applicable  
software may be purchased separately.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 150 of 504  
M 3900 description  
2. The Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface can only be used for external alerting when used with  
the Full Duplex Handsfree. Call Recording is not supported.  
Accessory keying  
A maximum of two cartridge accessories can plug into the slots at the rear of  
the ACM stand. The ports provide access to a SIDL/SDI port, USART port,  
and GPIO0. Two accessories cannot access the same serial port. The  
mechanical keying prevents this situation from occurring. Refer to Figure 30  
for a better understanding of mechanical keying.  
Figure 30  
M3900 Series mechanical keying  
USART  
SDI  
accessory  
accessory  
SDI + USART  
accessory  
non-serial  
accessory  
Analog Terminal Adapter  
The Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA) lets you connect an analog device such  
as a fax machine or modem to your telephone. You can have simultaneous use  
of the telephone and the analog device. The ATA is available for the M3902,  
M3903, M3904 and the M3905 models. In the EMEA market region, the  
ATA is supported only on the M3904.  
Computer Telephony Integration Adapter  
The Computer Telephony Integration Adapter (CTIA), along with the  
desktop TAPI Service Provider software, provides an interface to connect a  
PC to the M3900 Series Digital Telephone. This enables PC applications to  
monitor or control the M3900 telephone for first-party (individual) call  
control type applications. The CTIA integrates the PC and the telephone,  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M 3900 description  
Page 151 of 504  
allowing more effective management of calls using PC applications such as  
Microsoft Outlook™.  
An RS-232C cable is required to connect the PC to the CTIA. The CTIA  
connects to the M3900 Series Digital Telephone through the Accessory  
Connection Module (ACM). The CTIA is a small cartridge accessory and can  
be inserted into either the small or large footstand opening.  
The CTIA is powered through the ACM. The ACM receives power through  
the telephone through the telephone line cord which is connected to a  
Teladapt wall transformer power supply (see Figure 37 on page 194). Check  
with your Nortel distributor for the recommended wall transformer for the  
M3900 accessories. Install the Accessory Connection Module (ACM) into  
your M3900 Series Digital Telephone (refer to the ACM Installation Sheet)  
before you install your CTIA.  
The CTIA cartridge provides the user:  
•
•
connectivity to the PC  
voice call control, using the TAPI SP software included with the CTIA  
Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI) software  
The Desktop TAPI Service Provider software accompanies your CTIA  
Cartridge. The Desktop TAPI Service Provider software interprets the  
information sent to the telephone and passes it on to a TAPI application.  
TAPI-compliant applications usually support activities such as placing,  
answering, holding transferring, and conferencing calls. This can include the  
information presented to the set display.  
Personal Directory PC Utility Software  
In addition to the TAPI software which is included with the CTIA, you may  
wish to purchase the Personal Directory PC Utility Software. The Personal  
Directory PC Utility software uses your CTIA Cartridge to connect your PC  
and M3904 telephone so that you may exchange data between your PC and  
your telephone’s directory.  
The Personal Directory PC Utility software provides a faster, easier way to  
create or modify a Personal Directory on the M3904 and M3905 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 152 of 504  
M 3900 description  
You can enter names and numbers into a Personal Directory file on your  
Personal Computer (PC). You can download (program) the PC file directly to  
the M3904 and M3905 telephones. You can upload (read) a directory from  
the M3904 and M3905 telephones to your PC to modify the directory.  
An RS-232C cable is required to connect the PC to the Personal Directory PC  
Utility Interface Cartridge. The cartridge connects to the M3900 Series  
Digital Telephone through the Accessory Connection Module (ACM). The  
Personal Directory PC Utility Interface Cartridge is a small cartridge  
accessory and can be inserted into either the small or large footstand opening.  
The Personal Directory PC Utility Interface Cartridge is powered through the  
ACM. The ACM receives power through the telephone via the telephone line  
cord which is connected to a Teladapt wall transformer power supply (see  
Figure 37 on page 194). Check with your Nortel distributor for the  
recommended wall transformer for the M3900 accessories. You must install  
the Accessory Connection Module (ACM) into your M3900 Series Digital  
Telephone (refer to the ACM Installation Sheet) before you install your  
Personal Directory PC Utility Interface Cartridge.  
Note: The CTIA Cartridge and the Personal Directory PC Utility  
Interface Cartridge are identical. If both products are to be used, only one  
cartridge is required.  
The Personal Directory PC Utility supports the following languages: English,  
French, Spanish, German, Danish, Portuguese, Italian, Norwegian, Swedish,  
Finnish, Dutch. The default language is English.  
Full Duplex Handsfree  
The Full Duplex Handsfree (FDHF) functionality allows simultaneous  
two-way communication during a handsfree call. Regular handsfree  
operation is half-duplex. Only one party can be heard at a time. FDHF allows  
a speaker to be aware when another party on the call is also speaking.  
Note: To ensure optimal functionality, the receive audio level is  
attenuated during the FDHF mode when both parties are speaking. As a  
result, fluctuations in the receive volume can occur during FDHF calls.  
If this occurs, do not increase the set speaker volume, as this may cause  
the set to revert to half-duplex operation.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M 3900 description  
Page 153 of 504  
For Full Duplex Handsfree functionality, you require an M3904 Phase III set  
equipped with an FDHF cartridge.  
Note: Phase III hardware is required since design modifications were  
made to theM3900 Series Digital Telephones to accommodate the FDHF  
functionality.  
The FDHF functionality requires the following hardware (minimum vintages  
listed):  
•
M3904 Phase III set (NTMN34GA)  
Note: NTMN34TA is the M3904 Phase III Icon set.  
•
•
•
Full Duplex Handsfree cartridge (NTMN72xx)  
Accessory Connection Module (ACM) (NTMN71xx)  
One of the following wall transformers to power the FDHF cartridge:  
— 110 V wall transfer (NTMN80AA)  
— EU (EMEA) 230 V wall transformer (NTHC09AA)  
— UK 230 V wall transformer (NTHC08AA)  
Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface  
The Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface (MEARI) provides an  
interface for a remote ringer device installed in a location separate from your  
M3902, M3903, M3904, or M3905 telephone. The MEARI provides access  
to a standard, off-the-shelf remote ringer, call status relay, audio recorder or  
visual indicator.  
You can program the MEARI to activate a ringer (or light) when the  
telephone rings or when the telephone is in use (off hook). A call to any DN  
configured on the telephone triggers the alerter. The MEARI alerts to one  
active call at a time. If the telephone is already active on a call, a second call  
will not activate MEARI.  
If used on the M3904 in conjunction with the Full Duplex Handsfree  
accessory, the MEARI can be used only for external alerting, not recording.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 154 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Note: The MEARI is an interface only. The ringer, light, buzzer, or  
other alerting device is to be obtained through a third-party vendor of the  
customer’s choice.  
Accessory Modules  
The Display-Based and Key-Based Accessory Modules are mutually  
exclusive. A set with one or two KBAs configured or installed cannot have a  
DBA.  
Both the KBA and DBA modules are loop-powered and do not require the  
110V wall transformer. Neither the KBA nor the DBA modules is supported  
for wall-mount applications.  
Key-Based Accessory Module  
The Key-Based Accessory Module (KBA) attaches to the M3904 and M3905  
Digital Telephones. The KBA provides 22 additional line/feature keys. These  
keys are equipped with clear key caps and paper labels. You can attach a  
maximum of two KBAs to the M3904 and M3905.  
The KBA requires an additional footstand kit to secure the module(s) to the  
set. If using one KBA, Kit 1 must be ordered. If installing two KBAs on the  
same set, Kit 1 and Kit 2 must be used. If a second KBA is being installed on  
a set with an existing KBA and stand, only Kit 2 is required.  
Display-Based Accessory Module  
The Display-Based Accessory Module (DBA) provides additional line/  
programmable feature keys (soft-labeled) for the M3904 and M3905  
telephones. The DBA supports up to 3 layers of 8 additional keys for a total  
of 24 keys.  
Note: Refer to Table 22 on page 147 for a list of the telephones with  
which the DBA module is compatible.  
A Page fixed key located on the DBA allows a user to switch between the  
three layers of soft-labeled programmable feature keys. Visual indication is  
also provided to indicate which page (or layer) of soft-labeled programmable  
feature keys is in use. Feature activation and deactivation on the DBA keys is  
the same as the programmable feature keys on the M3904 and M3905.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M 3900 description  
Page 155 of 504  
Note: If an incoming call is posted to a DN key located on page 2 or 3  
of the DBA, the unit does not automatically scroll to that page. This  
prevents the disruption of other user operations already in progress.  
The user may change the feature key labels by selecting “Change feature key  
label” from the Options list on the M3904 or M3905.  
The DBA is supported only on the M3904 and M3905. You can attach a  
maximum of one DBA to an M3904 or M3905 telephone.  
The DBA comes with its own attachment arm and plug to secure the  
accessory module to the set.  
Alternate key caps for the M3905  
The M3905 Call Center Telephone provides an alternate key cap kit to  
customize your M3905 telephone to fit your business needs. Use the key cap  
tool to remove any of the middle four fixed programmable keys, located at  
bottom front of the M3905, and replace them with alternate keys. The  
alternate key caps include: Answer Emergency, Answer Agent, Activity  
Code, Call Agent, Observe Agent, and Display Queue.  
Handset option for the M3905 Call Center Telephone  
The M3905 Call Centre Telephone is designed to have a headset always  
present. The M3905 does not come equipped with a handset. The optional  
Handset Kit (NTMN18AA) is a hardware package that can be added to the  
M3905 and includes a handset, handset cord, and an add-on handset cradle.  
To install the handset cradle, uncover the hookswitch by removing the plate  
at the top front of the telephone, and snap the handset cradle in over this area.  
A headset, handset, or both must be plugged into the M3905 when ACD  
queue login is required. Login to an ACD queue is not a supported operation  
when neither a headset nor a handset is plugged into the M3905. If neither a  
headset nor a handset are present, and the hookswitch is uncovered, it may  
still be possible to login to the ACD queue. This could result in calls being  
presented to the M3905 without being answered. Therefore, care must be  
taken to ensure a headset or handset is plugged in before queue login is  
attempted. As of CS 1000 Release 4.5, if the hookswitch remains covered, or  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 156 of 504  
M 3900 description  
if the handset is properly cradled on the hookswitch, login cannot occur even  
if a headset is not plugged in.  
The handset can be used without the headset plugged in. However, some  
functionality, including the ability to login to the ACD queue, can vary with  
the version of firmware installed on the M3905 and the release of software  
running on the system. Refer to “M3900 Flash Download” on page 227 for  
details on how to determine the firmware version installed on an M3900  
Series Digital Telephone.  
Earlier software releases and previous versions of M3900 firmware deliver  
different operations. Phase I and Phase II M3905 telephones report a headset  
present even if one is not. This allows a handset to be used without a headset  
plugged in. The handset can plug into the handset port and ACD queue login  
proceeds normally. Login can occur even if neither a handset or headset is  
present.  
Phase III telephones correctly recognize the presence or absence of a headset.  
If a headset is present on a Phase III M3905, then a handset can also be used.  
If a headset is not present, a handset must to be plugged into the headset port  
to allow normal ACD queue login. However, when the handset is in the  
headset port, the system does not accept signals from the telephone's  
hookswitch. Hanging up the handset (going ONHOOK) does not disconnect  
calls. The Goodbye key must be used to release a call.  
As of Succession 3.0 and later software, when the M3905 is in use, the system  
software checks the headset port to verify that a headset, or some other  
device, is plugged in. If no device is present and the HEADSET button is off,  
the system assumes a handset is being used in the handset port of the set. The  
system is then prepared to respond to signals from the M3905 telephone’s  
hookswitch, even though a headset is not present. M3905 firmware version  
8.9 or later is required to send these hookswitch signals to the system. This  
allows the set to login to the ACD queue when the handset is taken  
OFFHOOK, and calls to be disconnected when the handset is hung up (placed  
ONHOOK).  
Headset options  
The M3901, M3902, and M3904 supports an amplified headset when the  
headset connects to the handset jack.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M 3900 description  
Page 157 of 504  
On a M3905, plug the amplified headset into the headset port. Do not plug an  
amplified headset into the handset jack.  
The M3903, M3904 and M3905 have a dedicated headset jack which  
supports a non-amplified headset. The M3903, M3904 and M3905 have a  
Headset fixed feature key to turn the Headset on and off.  
Contact your Nortel distributor for qualified headset equipment.  
Headset considerations  
Test the headset with the telephone before using. In a noisy environment, an  
amplified headset is an option. When the amplified headset is used, two  
choices of volume control are available: the rocker control on the telephone  
and the switch on the headset. The user should adjust the telephone volume  
before adjusting the headset volume. To provide the best communication with  
the least amount of distortion, the amplifier should have a higher setting than  
the telephone volume control.  
Telephone wall-mount kit  
For the M3903, M3904, and M3905 telephones, a separate wall-mount  
bracket kit must be used. This kit contains a one-piece wall-mount plate that  
attaches the telephone to the wall. The wall-mount kit is available from your  
local Nortel distributor.  
The footstand supplied with the M3901 and M3902 telephones can be  
reversed to allow wall mount installations. To provide additional support, an  
optional wall-mount brace kit may be purchased.  
The wall-mount kit does not support the Accessory Connection Module  
(ACM) and its accessory cartridges.  
Brandline insert  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephones contain a removable insert made to  
accommodate your company logo. You can order blank Brandline Inserts  
with your company logo.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 158 of 504  
M 3900 description  
The M3903, M3904, and M3905 also support Electronic Brandline. Refer to  
Features and Services (553-3001-306) for information on the Electronic  
Brandline feature.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 159 of 504  
Key descriptions  
This section provides key description and key configuration information for  
each model of the M3900 series. This section also shows the physical  
placement of the keys on each model: M3901, M3902, M3903, M3904, and  
M3905.  
M3901 key descriptions  
Table 24 gives a description of the keys on the M3901. Figure 31 on page 160  
shows the physical placement of the keys on the M3901.  
Table 24  
M3901 key description  
Key Number  
Description  
Key 0  
Line (Directory Number)  
Note: The system administrator can configure Key 0 as a Voice Call  
(VCC), HotLine (HOT) Key, Single Call Non-ringing (SCN), Multiple Call  
Ringing (MCR), Multiple Call Non-ringing (MCN), Private Line Ringing  
(PLR), or Private Line Non-ringing (PLN).  
Key 1  
Key 2  
Key 3  
Key 4  
Key 5  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Note: The system administrator can configure Keys 1 - 5 with any feature that does not require  
a display (DAG, DWG, DSP, and RMK).  
Note: Nortel recommends that the M3901 is not configured as an ACD DN.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 160 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 31  
M3901 key positions  
Key 0  
553-AAA0665  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 161 of 504  
M3902 key descriptions  
Table 25 gives a description of the keys on the M3902. Figure 32 on page 162  
shows the physical placement of the keys on the M3902.  
Table 25  
M3902 key description  
Key  
Description  
Key 0  
You must configure Key 0 as the Directory Number line.  
Note: The system administrator can configure Key 0 as a Voice Call (VCC),  
HotLine (HOT) Key, Single Call Non-ringing (SCN), Multiple Call Ringing  
(MCR), Multiple Call Non-ringing (MCN), Private Line Ringing (PLR), or  
Private Line Non-ringing (PLN).  
Key 1  
Key 2  
Key 3  
Key 4  
Key 5  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Feature or Auto Dial  
Call Transfer (default) or 3 Party Conference or 6 Party Conference  
Message Waiting  
Note: The M3902 is a single-line set. Only one line can be configured, and this must be on  
Key 0. Do not configure Keys 1–5 as:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple Call Non-ringing  
Multiple Call Ringing  
Private Line Non-ringing  
Private Line Ringing  
Single Call Non-ringing  
Single Call Ringing  
Configuring Keys 1–5 as anything other than the allowed features will cause an error message.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 162 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 32  
M3902 key positions  
Key 2  
Key 1  
Key 3  
Key 0  
Key 5  
Key 4  
553-AAA0666  
M3903 key descriptions  
Table 26 gives a description of the keys on the M3903. Figure 33 shows the  
physical placement of the keys on the M3903.  
Table 26  
M3903 key description (Part 1 of 3)  
Key  
Description  
Key 0  
Key 1  
Key 2  
Primary Directory Number  
Secondary Directory Number or Feature or Auto Dial  
Secondary Directory Number or Feature or Auto Dial  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M 3900 description  
Page 163 of 504  
Table 26  
M3903 key description (Part 2 of 3)  
Key  
Description  
Key 3  
Secondary Directory Number or Feature or Auto Dial  
Note 1: Keys 1-3 cannot be configured as the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 Party Conference  
6 Party Conference  
Call Forward  
Account Charge  
Calling Party Number  
Call Park  
Privacy Release  
Ring Again  
RPN  
Call Transfer  
Configuring Keys 1-3 as anything other than the allowed features will cause an  
error message.  
Note 2: Keys 1-3 can be configured as Speed Call (Speed Call, System Speed  
Call, Speed Call Controller and System Speed Call Controller). Nortel  
recommends that Key 23 be used for Speed Call features.  
Key 4-15  
Key 16  
Key 17  
Key 18  
Key 19  
Key 20  
Key 21  
Not used at this time  
Message Waiting (default)  
Call Transfer (default)  
6 Party Conference (default) or 3 Party Conference  
Call Forward (default)  
Ring Again (default)  
Call Park (default)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 164 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 26  
M3903 key description (Part 3 of 3)  
Key  
Description  
Key 22  
Key 23  
Ringing Number Pickup  
Configure as:  
•
•
•
•
Speed Call  
System Speed Call  
Speed Call Controller  
System Speed Call Controller (manual configuration—needs speed call list #)  
Key 24  
Privacy Release (default)  
Charge Account (default)  
Calling Party number (default)  
Callers List (default)  
Redial List (default)  
NUL  
Key 25  
Key 26  
Key 27  
Key 28  
Keys 29-31  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 165 of 504  
Figure 33  
M3903 key positions  
Key [1,3]  
Key [0,2]  
Key [17,20,23]  
Key [18,21,24]  
Key [19,22,25]  
Key 16  
553-AAA0667  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 166 of 504  
M 3900 description  
M3904 key descriptions  
Table 27 gives a description of the keys on the M3904. Figure 34 on page 168  
shows the physical placement of the keys on the M3904.  
Table 27  
M3904 key description (Part 1 of 2)  
Key  
Description  
Key 0  
Primary Directory Number  
Key 1-11  
Secondary Directory Number or Feature or Auto Dial  
Note 1: Keys 1-11 cannot be configured as the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Message Waiting  
Transfer  
3 Party Conference  
6 Party Conference  
Call Forward  
Ring Again  
Call Park  
Ringing Number Pickup  
Privacy Release  
Charge Account  
Call Party Number  
Configuring Keys 1-11 as anything other than the allowed features will cause an  
error message.  
Note 2: Keys 1-11 can be configured as Speed Call (Speed Call, System  
Speed Call, Speed Call Controller and System Speed Call Controller). Nortel  
recommends that Key 23 be used for Speed Call features.  
Keys 12-15  
Key 16  
Blocked  
Message Waiting is not a default feature for this key  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M 3900 description  
Page 167 of 504  
Table 27  
M3904 key description (Part 2 of 2)  
Key  
Description  
Key 17  
Key 18  
Key 19  
Key 20  
Key 21  
Key 22  
Key 23  
Call Transfer (default)  
6 Party Conference (default) or 3 Party Conference  
Call Forward (default)  
Ring Again (default)  
Call Park (default)  
Ringing Number Pickup (default)  
Configure as one of the following:  
•
•
•
•
Speed Call  
System Speed Call  
Speed Call Controller  
System Speed Call Controller  
Note: The above services are not a default feature for this key. These features  
can be used on any of the programmable keys.  
Key 24  
Privacy Release (default)  
Charge Account (default)  
Calling Party Number (default)  
Callers List (default)  
Redial List (default)  
NUL  
Key 25  
Key 26  
Key 27  
Key 28  
Keys 29-31  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 168 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 34  
M3904 key positions  
Key [4,10]  
Key [5,11]  
Key [3,9]  
Key [2,8]  
Key [1,7]  
Key [0,6]  
Key [17,20,23]  
Key [18,21,24]  
Key [19,22,25]  
553-AAA0668  
Key 16  
Note: For M3904 and M3905 telephones, One-button feature access  
keys for the Callers and Redial lists cannot be programmed on DBA or  
KBA modules.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 169 of 504  
M3905 key descriptions  
Table 28 gives a description of the keys on the M3905. Figure 35 on page 172  
shows the physical placement of the keys on the M3905.  
Table 28  
M3905 key description (Part 1 of 3)  
Key  
Description  
Key 0  
Primary ACD Directory Number equivalent to the * In-Calls Key  
Note 1: The user can edit the label on Key 0 to display desired information.  
Note 2: The In-Calls fixed key and the Primary DN line key are linked together  
and both represent Key 0.  
Key 1-4  
Secondary Directory Number or Feature or Auto Dial  
Note 1: Keys 1-4 cannot be configured as the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Message Waiting  
Transfer  
3 Party Conference  
6 Party Conference  
Call Forward  
Ring Again  
Call Park  
Ringing Number Pickup  
Privacy Release  
Charge Account  
Call Party Number  
Configuring Keys 1-4 as anything other than the allowed features will cause an  
error message.  
Note 2: Keys 1-4 can be configured as Speed Call (Speed Call, System  
Speed Call, Speed Call Controller and System Speed Call Controller). Nortel  
recommends that Key 23 be used for Speed Call features.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 170 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Table 28  
M3905 key description (Part 2 of 3)  
Key  
Description  
Key 5  
Feature  
Key 6  
Feature  
Key 7  
Options menu key  
Key 8-11  
Configured as one of the following standard Call Center features:  
Key 8 = * Make Set Busy  
Key 9 = * Not Ready (must have CLS = AGN)  
Key 10 = * Emergency (must have CLS = AGN)  
Key 11 = * Call Supervisor (must have CLS = AGN)  
The following features can be configured on any Key 8-11 with the change of  
the prelabeled key cap:  
Activity Code entry.Agent Answer  
Answer Emergency Call  
Display Queue = DWC (used with supervisor or agent telephones).  
Observe agent  
Ring Agent (must have CLS = SPV)  
Note: Keys 8-11 are prelabeled in the factory; they are marked in this table  
with an asterisk.  
Key 16  
Key 17  
Key 18  
Key 19  
Key 20  
Key 21  
Key 22  
Message waiting key or another feature  
Call Transfer key (default)  
6 Party Conference (default) or A03 (3 Party Conference)  
Call Forward (default)  
Ring Again (default)  
Call Park (default)  
Ringing Number Pickup (default)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M 3900 description  
Page 171 of 504  
Table 28  
M3905 key description (Part 3 of 3)  
Key  
Description  
Configured as one of the following speed call services:  
Key 23  
•
•
•
•
Speed Call  
System Speed Call  
Speed Call Controller  
System Speed Call Controller  
Key 24  
Privacy Release (default)  
Charge Account (default)  
Calling Party Number (default)  
Callers List (default)  
Redial List (default)  
NUL  
Key 25  
Key 26  
Key 27  
Key 28  
Keys 29-31  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 172 of 504  
M 3900 description  
Figure 35  
M3905 key positions  
Key 3  
Key 7  
Key 6  
Key 5  
Key 4  
Key 2  
Key 1  
Key 0  
Key [16,19,22]  
Key [17,20,23]  
Key [18,21,24]  
Key 10 Key 8  
Key 11 Key 9  
Key 0  
553-AAA0669  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Page 173 of 504  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
Contents  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Operating parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Feature implementation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Introduction  
The Virtual Office feature is useful for telecommuters, visitors, and workers  
who are frequently out of the office. Virtual Office maximizes the use of  
office space and desktop equipment for Hoteling or Hot-desk applications.  
The Virtual Office feature provides the capability for the telephone user to  
login to a designated telephone and be presented with their individual features  
and services. For example, office space could be set up with host telephones  
allowing visiting telecommuters to login using the Flexible Feature Code  
(FFC) and their individual DN. Calls to the user’s primary DN are then routed  
to the Virtual Office host telephone where the Virtual Office worker is logged  
in.  
Description  
The Virtual Office feature allows users to log in to a designated M3903 or  
M3904 Digital Telephone and use their individual telephone configurations  
at that telephone. The calls to the user’s primary DN are routed to the Virtual  
Office Host Terminal where the Virtual Office worker is logged in.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Page 174 of 504  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
The Host Terminal is the physical telephone that a user can user to log in as  
a Virtual Office worker. Both the M3903 and the M3904 can be configured  
as Host Terminals; however, a Virtual Office worker is required to log in to  
a Host Terminal that matches their Virtual Office telephone type. For  
example, when the Virtual Terminal of a Virtual Office worker is configured  
as an M3904, the login process is blocked if they attempt to login to an M3903  
Host Terminal.  
The Virtual Terminal is a set of features configured for a user and defined on  
a phantom loop. There is no permanent physical telephone associated with a  
Virtual Terminal.  
The Virtual Office recognizes all system configuration related to the Virtual  
Office Worker. The Virtual Office feature operates on a stand-alone  
Meridian 1 and a CS 1000 system only.  
Only one active session per user login ID is allowed at one time in the system.  
The Virtual Office Worker is identified by their primary DN, which cannot  
be used as the primary DN for any other telephone, virtual or physical, in the  
system. Use the Station Control Password (SCPW), configured in LD 11 to  
validate the login. For further information on configuring the SCPW in  
LD 11, refer to Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
Nortel recommends that the Host Terminal have at least internal call and  
emergency call (911 in North America) capability.  
Clearing the Directory Services Password  
With Phase III M3900 Series Digital Telephones, the Meridian 1 or CS 1000  
system clears the Directory Services password when a Virtual Office worker  
logs in or logs out of an M3903 or an M3904 Host telephone. The system  
administrator configures this functionality by defining Class of Service as  
Erase List Allowed (ELA) in LD 11 for the M3903 or M3904 Virtual  
telephone. For further information on configuring ELA in LD 11, see LD 11  
on page 177.  
Clearing the Directory Services Password functionality allows multiple  
Virtual Office worker using the same host telephone to have access to  
password-protected features if one of the users set the password and does not  
turn it off when the Virtual Office worker log out.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
Page 175 of 504  
Clearing the Callers List and Redial List  
With Phase III M3900 Series Digital Telephones, the Meridian 1, or the  
CS 1000 system clears the Callers List and Redial List when a Virtual Office  
worker logs in or logs out of an M3903 or an M3904 Host telephone. The  
system administrator configures this functionality by defining Class of  
Service as Erase List Allowed (ELA) in LD 11 for the M3903 or M3904  
Virtual telephone. For further information on configuring ELA in LD 11, see  
LD 11 on page 177.  
When the ELA Class of Service is defined, the Callers List and Redial List  
are automatically cleared when the Virtual Office worker logs in or logs out.  
Automatic Logout for Virtual Office  
Phase III M3900 Series Digital Telephones introduces Automatic Logout for  
Virtual Office workers. If a Virtual Office worker, who is already logged in  
to telephone A, tries to log on to telephone B, the system automatically logs  
out the Virtual Office worker from telephone A and logs the Virtual Office  
worker in to Telephone B (provided the correct login password is entered).  
This feature is activated by the system administrator in LD 15 at the Virtual  
Office Automatic Logout (VO_ALO) prompt. For further information on  
configuring the Automatic Logout for Virtual Office in LD 15, see LD 15 on  
page 177.  
The system administrator can also define a time at which all Virtual  
Terminals are automatically logged out. The automatic log out time is  
configured in LD 15 at the Virtual Office Automatic Logout Time  
(VO_ALOHR) prompt.  
If the telephone is busy at the automatic logout time, (for example, if the  
Virtual Office worker is using Corporate Directory or Set-to-Set Messaging),  
the telephone is not logged out until it is in the idle state.  
Note: If the user logs in to a Virtual telephone after automatic logout  
occurs, the telephone does not automatically log out a second time.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 176 of 504  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
Speed Call for Virtual Office  
Phase III Meridian Series Digital Telephones support Speed Call (SCU/SCC)  
and System Speed Call (SSU only) on Virtual Terminal numbers.  
Operating parameters  
The Virtual Terminal Prime DN cannot be a Primary DN on another terminal.  
The Virtual Terminal Prime DN (user A) can be the secondary DN of another  
Virtual Terminal (user B). If both user A and user B are logged in, a call to  
user A’s Primary DN can be answered by user B’s Secondary DN.  
If Virtual Office user A logs out, user B logs in, and another user calls the  
Primary DN of user A, the following scenarios can occur:  
•
If user A has Call Forward configured before logout, the call is  
forwarded.  
•
If user A does not have Call Forward configured, but has Default Call  
Forward (DCFW) configured, the call is forwarded to that DN (the DN  
can be Call Pilot).  
•
If neither of the above scenarios apply, the caller receives an overflow  
tone.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
Page 177 of 504  
Feature implementation  
LD 15 – Configure the automatic logout time for Virtual Office terminals  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system  
Range for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media  
Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T  
...  
VO_ALO  
(NO)  
YES  
Disable Virtual Office Automatic Logout (default).  
Enable Virtual Office Automatic Logout  
VO_ALOHR  
(0)-23  
Virtual Office Automatic Logout time  
Use the 24-hour clock  
LD 11 – Allow or deny the erasing of the Callers and Redial lists for Virtual  
Terminals (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
M3900 series telephone types  
3903V  
3904 V  
M3903 Virtual Terminal  
M3904 Virtual Terminal  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 178 of 504  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
LD 11 – Allow or deny the erasing of the Callers and Redial lists for Virtual  
Terminals (Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
CLS  
(ELD) ELA  
Erase Lists (Denied)/Allowed  
LD 57 – Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for the Virtual Office feature  
(Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
OUT  
END  
Add new data block information  
Change data block information  
Remove data block information  
Exit data block  
TYPE  
...  
FFC  
...  
Flexible Feature Codes data block  
...  
CODE  
VTLN  
ALL  
FFC for logging a Virtual Terminal onto a Host Terminal  
Every FFC is prompted  
<CR>  
No further prompt; returns to “REQ”  
VTLN  
xxxx  
Enter Virtual Terminal logging code  
Returns to “CODE”  
<CR>  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
Page 179 of 504  
LD 57 – Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for the Virtual Office feature  
(Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
CODE  
VTLF  
ALL  
FFC type for logging off a Virtual Terminal  
Every FFC is prompted  
<CR>  
No further prompt; returns to “REQ”  
VTLF  
xxxx  
Enter Virtual Terminal logging off code  
Returns to “CODE”  
<CR>  
Note: You cannot move or copy a Virtual Terminal Number.  
LD 97 – Configure a Phantom loop for the Virtual Office feature  
Prompt Response  
Description  
REQ  
CHG  
SUPL  
Naaa  
Change the loop configuration  
Superloops  
TYPE  
SUPL  
N = designates the superloop as a phantom loop  
aaa = designates the superloop number  
...  
...  
...  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 180 of 504  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
LD 20 – Print Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for Virtual and Host Terminals  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
PRT  
LTN  
Print data block for the requested terminal type(s)  
List Terminal Numbers of the requested terminal type(s)  
TYPE:  
xxxxx  
3903V  
3904V  
3903H  
3904H  
TNB  
Enter appropriate telephone model where xxxxx:  
3903V = M3903 Virtual Terminal  
3904V = M3904 Virtual Terminal  
3903H = M3903 Host Terminal  
3904H = M3904 Host Terminal  
Note 1: Only M3903 and M3904 Digital Telephones can be  
configured as a Virtual or Host Terminal.  
Note 2: The Print TNB and List TNB requests always show  
the logged-off TNB data. In logged-in state, an indication of  
the logged-in TN (“HOST TN” or “VIRTUAL TN”) is added.  
...  
...  
...  
LD 81 – Print a list or count of telephones with a specified Class of Service or  
feature (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
REQ  
LST  
LST = Print list of telephones  
CNT  
CNT = Print count of telephones  
CUST  
Customer number, where xx designates one customer number, and  
xx yy designates a range of customer numbers  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system  
Range for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media Gateway 1000B,  
and Media Gateway 1000T  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
Page 181 of 504  
LD 81 – Print a list or count of telephones with a specified Class of Service or  
feature (Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
<CR>  
Print all customers  
...  
...  
...  
FEAT  
aaaa  
3900  
aaaa = Designates a feature mnemonic  
3900 = prints M3900-type telephones, including Virtual and Host  
Terminals  
DCFW  
...  
DCFW = prints Default Call Forward Virtual Terminals  
...  
...  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 182 of 504  
M3900 (single site) Virtual Office  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
Page 183 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Environmental and safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Safety and Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Line engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
M3900 set power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Installing the M3900 Series Digital Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Changing telephone positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Wall-mounting the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Installing the Accessory Connection Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Accessory keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Installing the Analog Terminal Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Installing Personal Directory PC Utility software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Installing the Key-Based Accessory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Installing the Single KBA footstand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Installing the Expansion KBA footstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Installing the Display-Based Accessory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Installing the handset option for the M3905 Call Center Telephone 202  
Installing alternate key caps for the M3905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Installing the Full Duplex Handsfree cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Task summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 184 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Reliability  
Reliability is measured by the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF). The  
MTBF ratings for M3900 Series Digital Telephones are shown in Table 29.  
Table 29  
M3900 Mean Time Between Failure ratings  
Set  
MTBF  
Return rate per year  
M3901  
M3902  
M3903  
M3904  
M3905  
250 years  
200 years  
150 years  
93 years  
0.4%  
0.5%  
0.4%  
0.23%  
0.25%  
0.2%  
100 years  
500 years  
Key-Based Accessory  
module (KBA)  
CTI Accessory (CTIA)  
Power supply  
50 years  
30 years  
2%  
3%  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 185 of 504  
Environmental and safety considerations  
Temperature and humidity  
Table 30  
M3900 operating temperature and humidity requirements  
Operating state  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
0° to 50°C (32° to 104°F)  
5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures  
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity limited to  
53 mbar of water vapor pressure.  
Table 31  
M3900 storage temperature and humidity requirements  
Storage  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
–50° to 70°C (–58° to 158°F)  
5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures  
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity limited to  
53 mbar of water vapor pressure.  
Safety and Electromagnetic compatibility  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephones have been tested and found to comply  
with Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards as shown in  
Table 32 on page 186 and Tables 33 and 34 on page 188.  
Refer to Product Bulletins or check with your Nortel representative for the  
latest developments in EMC standards.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Page 186 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Table 32  
M3900 Safety standards compliance  
Safety  
Description  
EN 60950 /  
IEC 60950  
Safety of Information Technology Equipment  
including Electrical Business Equipment (Europe)  
UL 60950  
Safety of Information Technology Equipment (USA)  
CSA 22.2 60950  
Safety of Information Technology Equipment  
(Canada)  
AS3260, TS001,  
TA-1302  
Safety (Australia)  
JATE  
Safety of Telecom Equipment (Japan)  
Table 33  
M3900 Electromagnetic Compatibility standards: Radiated and  
conducted (Part 1 of 2)  
EMC - Radiated  
and Conducted  
Description  
FCC CFR 47  
Part 15  
FCC Rules for Radio Frequency Devices (USA)  
(See Note 1 below.)  
CSA C108.8  
ICES-003  
Radiated Emissions (Canada)  
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard: Digital  
Apparatus (Canada)  
EN55022 /  
CISPR 22  
Information technology equipment — Radio  
disturbance characteristics — Limits and methods of  
measurement (Europe) (See Notes 2 and 3 below.)  
EN 61000-3-2  
EN 61000-3-3  
Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment  
output current <= 16 A per phase)  
Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in  
low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated  
current <= 16 A  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 187 of 504  
Table 33  
M3900 Electromagnetic Compatibility standards: Radiated and  
conducted (Part 2 of 2)  
EMC - Radiated  
and Conducted  
Description  
VCCI  
EMC (Japan)  
AS/NZS 3548  
CISPR 22  
Limits and methods of measurement of radio  
disturbance characteristics of information  
technology equipment (Australia / New Zealand)  
(See Notes 2 and 3 below.)  
Note 1: M3900 Class A telephones comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules  
to Class A limits. In a domestic environment, this equipment may cause  
radio interference, in which case the user may be required to provide  
adequate protective measures.  
M3900 Class B telephones comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules to  
Class B limits. Operation of Class B equipment is subject the following  
conditions:  
•
•
The equipment may not cause harmful interference.  
The equipment must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nortel could void the  
user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
Note 2: The M3903 telephone (NTMN33GA) is CISPR A compliant. The  
M3903 meets CISPR 22 to Class B limits in the regions of Europe, the  
Middle East, and Africa.  
Note 3: The Analog Terminal Adapter (NTMN68xx) is CISPR A compliant.  
It meets CISPR 22 to Class B limits when used with the M3904 or M3905  
telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 188 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Table 34  
M3900 Electromagnetic Compatibility standards: Immunity  
EMC - Immunity  
Description  
EN50082-1  
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic immunity  
standard Part 1: Residential, commercial and light  
industry (Europe)  
EN 55024  
Information technology equipment — Immunity  
characteristics — Limits and methods of  
measurement (Europe)  
IEC 801-2 (level 4) Electro Static Discharge (Europe)  
IEC 801-3 (level 2) Radiated Immunity (Europe)  
IEC 801-4 (level 3) Fast Transient/Burst Immunity (Europe)  
Line engineering  
The M3900 Series Digital Telephones use twisted pair wiring on transmission  
lines determined by the rules in “Digital telephones line engineering” on  
page 289. The maximum acceptable loop length is 1067 m. (3500 ft),  
assuming 24 AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge taps. A  
15.5 dB loss at 256 kHz defines the loop length limit. Longer lengths are  
possible, depending on the wire’s gauge and insulation.  
CAUTION  
Use only the line cord provided with the telephone. A line cord  
designed for another telephone can cause damage to the equipment.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 189 of 504  
M3900 set power consumption  
Table 35 shows power consumption measurements of the M3900 telephones  
in various states.  
Table 35  
M3900 set power consumption  
M3901  
M3902  
M3903  
M3904  
M3905  
Idle  
29.3  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
37.3  
45.7  
64.3  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
42.5  
48.7  
59.7  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
31.5  
37.5  
46.4  
39.29  
45.9  
52  
15.02  
N/A  
H/F Nominal  
H/F Maximum  
DBA Idle  
N/A  
15.31  
N/A  
DBA H/F Nominal  
DBA H/F  
N/A  
Maximum 2 KBA  
Idle  
33.42  
14.98  
Note: All measurements are in milli-amps.  
Installation  
Use Procedure 28 to install the M3900 Series Digital Telephone  
Procedure 28  
Installing the M3900 Series Digital Telephone  
1
Complete the wiring and cross-connections (loop power).  
Note: The M3901, M3902, and M3903 are polarity sensitive. The Tip and  
Ring connections from the telephones to the Digital Line Cards (DLC)  
must be connected directly. If the Tip and Ring signals are crossed on an  
M3901, M3902, or M3903, the telephone will not function.  
2
3
Connect the telephone to the connecting block.  
Place the telephone upright on the desk in the normal operating position.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Page 190 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
4
Supply the user with a quick reference guide.  
CAUTION  
Before handling internal telephone components, you  
must discharge static electricity from your hands and  
tools by touching any grounded metal surface or  
conductor.  
Changing telephone positions  
The M3903, M3904 and M3905 Digital Telephones have several different  
height selections for the desktop positions.  
Use Procedure 29 to change the telephone position.  
Procedure 29  
Changing the telephone position  
1
2
Press the tilt handle located at the top back side of the telephone.  
With the tilt handle pressed in, raise or lower the telephone to the desired  
angle or height.  
3
Release the tilt handle to lock the telephone in the desired position.  
Note: The M3903 and M3904 can be wall-mounted using the optional  
wall-mount bracket.  
The M3901 and M3902 Digital Telephones have three different angled height  
desktop positions.  
Use Procedure 30 to change the telephone angle.  
Procedure 30  
Changing the telephone angle  
1
2
Move the top of the footstand away from the telephone base (it has a snap  
connection).  
Place the footstand in the desired position and snap the top of the  
footstand back into place.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 191 of 504  
Wall-mounting the telephone  
For the M3903, M3904, and M3905 Digital Telephones, a separate  
wall-mount bracket kit must be used to wall-mount the telephone. The  
telephone wall-mount bracket kit contains a one-piece wall-mount plate to  
attach the telephone to the wall. For the M3901 and M3902 telephones, the  
supplied footstand can be reversed to allow wall-mount installation. An  
optional wall-mount brace kit may be purchased for the M3901 and M3902  
to provide additional support.  
Note: The Key-Based and Display-Based Accessory modules cannot be  
wall-mounted.  
Use Procedure 31 to wall-mount the telephone.  
Procedure 31  
Wall-mounting the telephone  
1
Place the wall-mount bracket against the wall and mark the spot to insert  
the screws.  
Note: M3901 and M3902 have built-in wall-mount brackets.  
2
3
4
5
Screw the five screws in and leave about 3 1/2 mm (1/8 inch) between the  
head of the screw and the wall.  
Remove the footstand from the telephone by sliding the footstand down  
(using the plastic hinges) about 7 mm (1/4 inch).  
Swing the footstand away from the telephone base and remove from the  
telephone.  
Attach the wall-mount bracket onto the back of the telephone by placing  
the telephone at the top edge of the wall-mount bracket and sliding the  
telephone into place.  
6
Mount the wall-mount bracket, attached to the telephone onto the screws  
located on the wall.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 192 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Installing the Accessory Connection Module  
Use the Procedure 32 to install the Accessory Connection Module (ACM).  
Procedure 32  
Installing the ACM  
1
Disconnect the line cord from the telephone base before installing the  
ACM.  
2
Slide the footstand down (using the plastic hinges) about 7 mm (1/4 in.)  
and swing the footstand away from the telephone base.  
3
4
5
Snap the ACM into the rectangular opening on the back of the telephone.  
Connect the ACM cable to the back of the telephone.  
Put the ACM attached ribbon cable into the track running down the back  
of the telephone base.  
6
7
8
9
Put the hard plastic cable cover over the ACM ribbon cable.  
Snap the ACM plastic cable cover into place.  
Place the footstand on the hinges.  
Swing the footstand back into place.  
10 Snap the footstand into a non-movable position.  
11 Reconnect the line cord to the telephone base.  
12 Return the telephone to an upright position.  
There is a cutout on the base of the footstand which displays the ACM  
connector ports. When ready to attach an accessory, insert the appropriate  
cartridge into the port slot. There is one accessory port available on the  
M3902. There are two accessory ports available on the M3903, M3904 and  
M3905.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 193 of 504  
Note 1: A wall transformer is required to power any accessory cartridges.  
The transformer does not come with the ACM unit. Contact your Nortel  
local distributor to order this ACM compatible wall transformer. Refer to  
the procedure “Installing the wall transformer” on page 194.  
Note 2: Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for complete  
installation and configuration instructions for your external analog device  
(FAX machine, modem, or 500/2500 telephone).  
Note 3: The accessories you attach to the telephone must be  
compatible. Table 23: “Accessory compatibilities” on page 149 shows the  
compatibility of the available options.  
Figure 36 shows the installation of the ACM into the telephone footstand.  
Figure 36  
ACM module  
553-AAA0670  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 194 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Installing the wall transformer  
Use Procedure 33 to install the wall transformer.  
Procedure 33  
Installing the wall transformer  
1
2
3
Remove the line cord from the telephone jack.  
Insert the transformer adapter plug into the telephone wall jack.  
Insert the line cord into the wall transformer adapter jack.  
Figure 37 shows the connections for the wall transformer.  
Figure 37  
Wall transformer connections  
To IDF  
Adapter jack  
Adapter  
plug  
6-conductor  
line cord  
from telephone  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Plug  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Jack  
Wall  
transformer  
(110 V or 220 V)  
Adapter  
553-AAA0671  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 195 of 504  
Accessory keying  
On the M3903, M3904, and M3905 Digital Telephones there are two  
accessory ports on the back of the telephone footstand. On the M3902, there  
is a single accessory port on the back of the footstand. Each port can support  
one cartridge accessory.  
You cannot use two accessories that require the same port type at the same  
time. For example, you cannot use two accessories that require a serial port  
connection at the same time.  
The shape and size of the plug in the accessory cartridge prevents the user  
from accidentally connecting incompatible accessories. To check the  
compatibility of accessories, refer to Table 23 on page 149, which shows the  
optional accessories and their compatibility.  
Installing the Analog Terminal Adapter  
The Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA) allows an off-the-shelf analog device  
(FAX, modem, or analog [500/2500-type] telephone) to work simultaneously  
with your M3902, M3903, M3904, or M3905 Digital Telephone. The ATA is  
not supported on the M3901 telephone.  
Install the Accessory Connection Module (ACM) into your M3900 Series  
Digital Telephone. Refer to “Installing the Accessory Connection Module”  
on page 192 before you install your ATA. The ACM provides connection  
capabilities between the M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905 telephones and  
the ATA.  
Use the Procedure 34 to install the ATA.  
Procedure 34  
Installing the ATA  
1
2
Disconnect the line cord from the telephone before installing the ATA.  
Insert the ATA accessory cartridge into the ACM. The latch should be at  
the top.  
3
Connect the commercial device you have selected to use, either your FAX  
machine, modem, or analog (500/2500-type) telephone, to the connection  
on your ATA cartridge interface.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 196 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
4
5
Plug the transformer into the electrical outlet (use only the transformer  
designed for your ACM accessories).  
Connect the Adapter plug, attached to your transformer, into the  
telephone wall jack.  
The wall transformer Adapter plug attaches between the telephone line  
cord and the telephone wall jack.  
6
7
Connect the line cord to the Adapter jack attached to the wall transformer.  
Reconnect the line cord back to your telephone base.  
Note: The ATA supports connections to Plain Old Telephone Service  
(POTS) only. ATA does not support features such as Message Waiting,  
Switchhook Flash/Link, Transfer, Conference, and CLASS type  
services.  
A red LED status light located on the ATA indicates the status of the ATA.  
•
Flashing red indicates that the ATA is operating normally. For more  
troubleshooting guidelines, refer to the user documentation that came  
with your analog device.  
•
•
Solid red indicates that the ATA is not operating normally. Contact your  
system administrator.  
Red light off indicates that there is no power going to the ATA or the  
unit is not operating correctly. Check the power connections to the ATA.  
If problems continue, contact your system administrator.  
Flexible voice and data capabilities allow you to have continuous use of both  
the M3900 Series Digital Telephone and the attached analog device. Your  
system administrator configures the flexible voice and data capabilities for  
your telephone on the system equipment. Contact your system administrator  
for more information about flexible voice and data capability.  
When there is a power failure to the ATA, the Analog Device does not store  
or keep information (for example, outgoing FAX from your FAX machine).  
You must send the information again when power returns.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 197 of 504  
Table 36 shows prompts and responses when configuring the ATA.  
Table 36  
ATA configuration  
Prompt  
Response  
NEW  
Description  
REQ  
Input new data  
CHG  
aaaa  
Change current data.  
CLS  
Class of Service options, where aaaa:  
= (FLXD) - Flexible voice/data denied  
= FLXA - Flexible voice/data allowed, required if ATA  
equipped.  
= (VCE) - Voice terminal, required if ATA equipped.  
= DTA - Data terminal.  
Note: If ATA is installed, CLS must be FLXA, VCE.  
KEY  
0 SCR xxxx  
Single Call Ringing, where xxxx = the DN for ATA  
Installing Personal Directory PC Utility software  
The Personal Directory PC Utility provides a faster, easier way to create or  
modify a personal directory. You can enter names and numbers into a  
Personal Directory file on your Personal Computer (PC). You can download  
the PC file directly to the M3904 or M3905 telephone. You can upload a  
directory from the M3904 to a PC to modify the M3904 directory.  
Use Procedure 35 to install the Personal Directory PC Utility software.  
Procedure 35  
Installing the Personal Directory PC Utility  
software  
1
Close all open applications before installing the Personal Directory PC  
Utility.  
2
3
4
Insert the Personal Directory PC Utility disk into your floppy disk drive.  
Click on Start.  
Select Run.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 198 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
5
6
Enter a:\setup (assuming that drive “a” is your floppy disk drive).  
Click on OK. The Nortel logo screen appears while the installation utility  
loads.  
7
8
9
The Welcome screen appears. Click Next to continue installation.  
If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement, click Yes.  
Continue to click Next until the installation is complete.  
10 When asked to, remove the disk from your floppy disk drive.  
11 Click Finish.  
Note: You must restart your PC to access the Personal Directory PC  
Utility.  
12 To select a port for the Personal Directory PC Utility; click Phone. Click  
Set port. The pull-down menu shows available PC ports:  
•
•
Com1  
Com2  
Note: The program selects the same port each time until you change it.  
Installing the Key-Based Accessory Module  
The Key-Based Accessory (KBA) module provides 22 additional line/feature  
keys for the M3904 and M3905 Digital Telephones. You can add up to two  
KBAs, providing a total of 75 line/feature keys.  
Use Procedure 36 to install the KBA.  
Procedure 36  
Installing the KBA  
1
While depressing the telephone tilt handle, pull the telephone away from  
the footstand until it clears the final stop. Gently pull the footstand off the  
clips.  
Note: If an ACM is installed, unplug the ACM and remove it from the  
footstand. Install the ACM in the Single KBA Footstand Assembly.  
2
Place the telephone and the KBA face down on a padded, level surface,  
and align them.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 199 of 504  
3
Plug the cable from the KBA into the 10-pin connection port on the  
telephone. See Figure 38.  
Figure 38  
KBA Installation  
Plug cable into10-pin  
Clips  
connection port  
ACM  
connection  
port  
Tilt Handles  
553-9538  
4
5
Thread the cable through the opening in the side of the telephone.  
Insert the clips on the telephone into the hinges on the footstand; then  
press on the front of the footstand until it snaps into place.  
6
Install the Single KBA Footstand Assembly. See Figure 39.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 200 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Figure 39  
KBA Footstand Assembly  
Single KBA  
Footstand Assembly  
Expansion KBA  
Footstand Assembly  
Install and tighten  
these screws  
Tighten  
these screws  
Expansion KBA Plate  
7
To add a second KBA:  
a. Place the telephone and the two modules face down on a  
non-abrasive surface.  
b. Plug the cable from the second module into the 10-pin connection  
port on the first module.  
c. Thread the cable through the routing clips on both modules.  
d. Install the Expansion KBA footstand.  
Installing the Single KBA footstand  
Use Procedure 37 to install the Single KBA footstand.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 201 of 504  
Procedure 37  
Installing the Single KBA footstand  
1
Insert the clips on both the telephone and the KBA into the hinges on the  
footstand assembly, and press on the front of the footstand until they snap  
into place.  
2
3
While squeezing both the telephone and the KBA tilt handles, swing the  
footstand into the desired position.  
Turn the completed assembly upright.  
Installing the Expansion KBA footstand  
Use Procedure 38 to install the Expansion KBA footstand.  
Procedure 38  
Installing the Expansion KBA footstand  
1
2
3
4
5
Place the Single KBA footstand and the Expansion KBA footstand face  
down on a flat surface.  
Align the Expansion KBA footstand with the Single KBA footstand and  
slide them together.  
Insert two screws through the Expansion KBA plate into the Single KBA  
footstand.  
Tighten all four screws, ensuring that the two footstand assemblies are  
properly aligned.  
Insert the clips on the telephone and the KBAs into the hinges on the  
combined Single Expansion KBA footstand Assembly, and while  
squeezing the Module tilt handles, swing the footstand into the desired  
position.  
6
Turn the completed assembly upright.  
Installing the Display-Based Accessory Module  
The Display-Based Accessory Module (DBA) gives you three layers of eight  
programmable line/feature (soft-labeled) keys, for a total of 24 (keys 32  
through 55).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 202 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
The Page button allows you to scroll to each key layer. The soft-labeled field  
is 10 characters in length. You can customize the DBA labels using the  
program mode and the dial pad keys.  
Use Procedure 39 to install the DBA.  
Procedure 39  
Installing the DBA  
1
While depressing the telephone tilt handle, pull the telephone away from  
the footstand until it clears the final stop. Gently pull the footstand off the  
clips.  
2
3
Place the telephone and the DBA face down on a padded level surface,  
and align them.  
Lower the DBA into place, and insert the 10-pin plug on the Module into  
the 10-pin slot on the telephone. Push in gently until the retaining tabs  
snap into place.  
4
5
6
Insert the clips on the telephone into the hinges on the footstand, then  
press on the front of the footstand until it snaps into place.  
While depressing the telephone tilt handle, swing the footstand into the  
desired position, then release the handle.  
Carefully turn the new assembly upright.  
Installing the handset option for the M3905 Call Center  
Telephone  
A handset does not accompany the M3905 Call Center Telephone. The  
Handset Kit is a hardware option for the M3905 Call Center Telephone, and  
includes a handset, cord, and add-on handset cradle. The handset can be  
added to the M3905 by removing the front plate of the telephone.  
Note: Nortel recommends that a systems administrator or technician  
complete this installation.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 203 of 504  
Figure 40  
Removal of the Hook Switch Cover  
553-AAA0672  
553-AAA0673  
Front view  
Rear view  
There are five tabs and two hidden snaps on the HookSwitch cover. There are  
two tabs along the right and three along the bottom edge (Front view). To  
remove the cover, the hidden snaps must be released (Rear view).  
Use Procedure 40 to remove the HookSwitch cover.  
Procedure 40  
Removing the HookSwitch cover  
1
2
Ease the cover to the left and pull on the left side to release the left snap.  
While holding the left snap out, ease the cover to the right and pull on the  
right side to release the right snap.  
3
Carefully maneuver the cover out from the three bottom slots and rotate  
the cover to release the two side tabs.  
Use Procedure 41 to install the cradle.  
Procedure 41  
Installing the cradle  
1
Hold the cradle in the same position as when you removed the Hook  
Switch Cover; move the cradle to the right to place the tab into the slot.  
2
Ease the other tabs on the bottom edge of the cradle into the slots.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 204 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Figure 41  
Installation of the cradle  
553-AAA0674  
3
When all tabs are in the proper position, secure the cradle into place by  
pushing straight downward.  
Installing alternate key caps for the M3905  
Use the Key Extractor Tool with the M3905 Call Center Telephone to remove  
the programmable keys and replace them with alternate keys customizing  
your telephone to fit your need.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 205 of 504  
Figure 42  
Install the alternate key caps  
553-AAA0675  
As shown in Figure 42, place the tips of the tool into the slots at the right and  
left of the key, grip tightly and pull straight upward. Do not rock or twist the  
key during removal or insertion, as this may damage the key seat and impair  
the functionality of the set.  
Use Procedure 42 to install the key caps.  
Procedure 42  
Installing the key caps  
1
2
Fit the two small elastomer posts into two slots on the undersides of the  
keys and firmly press downward.  
The key releases immediately after pressure is applied.  
Note: If the key does not release, remove it. Attempt the installation  
again making sure that the posts and the slots are properly aligned.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 206 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Installing the Full Duplex Handsfree cartridge  
Use Procedure 43 to install the Full Duplex Handsfree cartridge.  
Procedure 43  
Installing the Full Duplex Handsfree cartridge  
1
Check the label on the back of your set to make sure that it is an M3904  
Phase III set (NTMN34GA). If your set is an NTMN34GA, go to Step 2.  
If your set is not an NTMN34GA, it is not FDHF-compatible. Please  
contact your system administrator to obtain the correct set.  
2
Install the Accessory Connection Module (ACM). For information on how  
to install the ACM, refer to “Installing the Accessory Connection Module”  
on page 192.  
3
4
5
Insert the FDHF cartridge into one of the ACM ports.  
Plug the wall transformer into the electrical outlet.  
Disconnect the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack. See  
Figure 37 on page 194.  
6
7
8
Connect the wall transformer adapter plug into the telephone wall jack.  
See Figure 37 on page 194.  
Connect the telephone line cord to the wall transformer adapter jack. See  
Figure 37 on page 194.  
Verify that the FDHF cartridge is working properly.  
The FDHF cartridge is working properly when the red LED on the FDHF  
cartridge is flashing and when there are 18 segments on the volume bar.  
Configuration  
Task summary  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1
2
3
LD 11 – Configure the M3900 Series Digital Telephone  
LD 15 – Assign a default language and customize Set-to-Set Messages  
LD 11 – Configure the Callers List and Redial List keys on  
Context-sensitive soft keys or programmable feature keys.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 207 of 504  
4
5
LD 11 – Configure the default language for M3900 telephones  
LD 11 – Configure the Server-based Applications (Corporate Directory  
and Set-to-Set Messaging)  
6
7
LD 32 – Clear or reset a Personal Directory Password for M3900  
telephones.  
LD 22 – Print M3900 peripheral software versions  
Note: The firmware versions for each M3900 telephone type will  
printed along with the versions of any other downloadable peripheral  
software.  
8
9
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download  
LD 11 – Configure Full Duplex Handsfree Class of Service  
10 LD 32 – Flash Download commands  
Note: For more information, refer to Software Input/Output:  
Administration (553-3001-311), Software Input/Output: Maintenance  
(553-3001-511), and Software Input/Output: System Messages  
(553-3001-411).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 208 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 11 – Configure the M3900 Series Digital Telephone (Part 1 of 5)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
New data  
Change current data  
TYPE:  
x..x  
Type of telephone  
3901 = M3901  
3902 = M3902  
3903 = M3903  
3904 = M3904  
3905 = M3905  
3903H = M3903 Host Terminal  
3904H = M3904 Host Terminal  
3903V = M3903 Virtual Terminal  
3904V = M3904 Virtual Terminal  
Note 1: The M3903, M3904, and 3905 Digital Telephones only  
support the Host Terminal and the Virtual Terminal feature.  
Note 2: If the M3901, M3902 or M3905 are configured as a Virtual  
Terminal, the error message SCH0099 is output.  
Note 3: M3903, M3904, and M3905 Digital Telephones support  
Corporate Directory and Set-to-Set Messaging.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 209 of 504  
LD 11 – Configure the M3900 Series Digital Telephone (Part 2 of 5)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
If confirmed as 3903V or 3904V, the loop must be a phantom. If  
confirmed as 3903H or 3904H, the loop must NOT be a phantom.  
c u  
Format for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media Gateway 1000B,  
and Media Gateway 1000T, where c = card and u = unit.  
Input only the card and unit address. If confirmed as 3903V or 3904V,  
the card must be a phantom (card slots 61-80).  
If the telephone has an Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA), then use the  
voice Terminal Numbers 16-31.  
...  
...  
...  
DES  
d...d  
Designator  
d...d = represents an Office Data Administration System (ODAS)  
Station Designator of 1-6 alphanumeric characters  
...  
...  
xx  
...  
...  
CUST  
...  
Customer number as defined in LD 15  
...  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 210 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 11 – Configure the M3900 Series Digital Telephone (Part 3 of 5)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
KBA  
(0)-2  
Key-based Accessory module (configuration prompt KBA)  
The KBA prompt appears when the set type is M3904 or M3905.  
0 = allows configuration of up to and including key number 31  
1 = allows configuration of up to and including key number 53  
2 = allows configuration of up to and including key number 75  
Display-based Accessory module (configuration prompt DBA)  
DBA  
(0)-1  
If KBA is a non-zero value, then DBA is not prompted. If KBA is a  
zero value or if the carriage return is pressed, then the DBA prompt  
appears.  
0 = allows configuration of up to and including key number 31  
1 = allows configuration of up to and including key number 55  
FDN  
...  
xxx...x  
...  
Flexible CFNA (Call Forward No Answer) DN  
...  
SCPW  
...  
xxx...x  
...  
Station Control Password  
...  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 211 of 504  
LD 11 – Configure the M3900 Series Digital Telephone (Part 4 of 5)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
CLS  
aaaa  
Class of Service options where aaaa:  
= (GRLD) Group Listening Denied, (M3902, M3903, M3904)  
= GRLA Group Listening Allowed, (M3902, M3903, M3904)  
= (HFD) Handsfree Denied,M3902, M3903, M3904)  
= HFA Handsfree Allowed (M3902, M3903, M3904)  
= ADD Automatic Digit Display, default for M3902, M3903, M3904,  
M3905  
= (VCE) Voice Terminal, required if ATA equipped  
= DTA Data Terminal  
= (FLXD) Flexible voice/data denied  
= FLXA Flexible voice/data allowed, required if ATA equipped  
= (STSD) Set-to-Set Messaging Denied, (M3903, M3904, and  
M3905)  
= STSA Set-to-Set messaging Allowed, (M3903,M3904, and M3905)  
= (CRPD) Corporate Directory Denied, (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
= CRPA Corporate Directory Allowed. (M3903, M3904, and M3905)  
Note 1: If ATA is equipped, CLS = FLXA, VCE required  
Note 2: M3903 and M3904 must have HFA Class of Service for the  
Headset to operate.  
...  
...  
...  
DCFW  
z..z  
Default Call Forward DN  
DN where calls are forwarded (the target DN)  
The maximum length of the DCFW is 31  
x
x = remove the DCFW DN  
<CR>  
Note: The DCFW prompt appears only for Virtual Terminals (3903V,  
3904V).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 212 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 11 – Configure the M3900 Series Digital Telephone (Part 5 of 5)  
Prompt Response Description  
KEY  
xx aaa yyyy Telephone function key assignments where:  
xx = key number  
aaa = key name or function  
zzz  
yyyy, zzz = additional information required  
Refer to the Key description table for each M3900 telephone:  
“M3901 key description” on page 159  
“M3902 key description” on page 161  
“M3903 key description” on page 162  
“M3904 key description” on page 166  
“M3905 key description” on page 169  
MTAD (CS 1000 and Meridian 1 Time and Date) - the system puts a  
block on the time/date key on all the M3900 Series Meridian Digital  
Telephones  
Note 1: VTN primary DN cannot be a primary DN for any other TN,  
and the VTN must be defined as a MARP TN.  
Note 2: The DN of a Virtual Terminal cannot be defined on a Host  
Terminal, and the Host Terminal DN cannot be defined on a Virtual  
Terminal.  
...  
...  
...  
LD 15 – Assign a default language and customize Set-to-Set Messages (Part 1 of 3)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
FTR  
Features and options  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 213 of 504  
LD 15 – Assign a default language and customize Set-to-Set Messages (Part 2 of 3)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
CUST  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system  
Range for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media  
Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T  
...  
DFLT_LANG  
M3900 default language.  
(ENG)  
FRE  
GER  
DUT  
SPA  
ITA  
English (default)  
French  
German  
Dutch  
Spanish  
Italian  
NOR  
SWE  
DAN  
POR  
FIN  
Norwegian  
Swedish  
Danish  
Portuguese  
Finnish  
POL  
CZE  
HUN  
JAP  
Polish  
Czech  
Hungarian  
Japanese  
Russian  
RUS  
STS_MSG  
MSG 01  
(NO) YES  
Modify Set-to-Set messages  
<CR>  
Keeps current message  
<text string>  
Input the new message to be displayed (up to 24  
characters)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 214 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 15 – Assign a default language and customize Set-to-Set Messages (Part 3 of 3)  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
MSG 10  
<CR>  
Keeps current message  
<text string>  
Input the new message to be displayed (up to 24  
characters)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 215 of 504  
LD 11 – Configure the Callers List and Redial List keys on Context-sensitive soft  
keys or programmable feature keys.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
M3900 series telephone types  
3903H  
3904H  
3903V  
3904V  
3905  
M3903 Host set  
M3904 Host set  
M3903 Virtual set  
M3904 Virtual set  
M3905 set  
...  
KEY  
27 CLT  
28 RLT  
Configure Callers List key on a Context-sensitive soft  
key.  
CLT and NUL are the only options for KEY 27.  
KEY  
Configure the Redial List key on a Context-sensitive soft  
key.  
RLT and NUL are the only options for KEY 28.  
KEY  
KEY  
XX CLT  
XX RLT  
Configure the Callers List key on an available  
programmable feature key.  
Configure the Redial List key on an available  
programmable feature key.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 216 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 11 – Configure the default language for M3900 telephones (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
M3900 series telephone types  
3902  
M3902 set  
3903H  
3904H  
3903V  
3904V  
3905  
M3903 Host set  
M3904 Host set  
M3903 Virtual set  
M3904 Virtual set  
M3905 set  
...  
MLNG  
M3900 language selection  
The default is the language selection chosen for the  
customer in LD 15.  
Note: The user can change the language defined at the  
MLNG prompt from their set.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 217 of 504  
LD 11 – Configure the default language for M3900 telephones (Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
ENG  
FRE  
GER  
HEB  
DUT  
SPA  
ITA  
English  
French  
German  
Hebrew  
Dutch  
Spanish  
Italian  
NOR  
SWE  
Norwegian  
Swedish  
DAN  
POR  
FIN  
Danish  
Portuguese  
Finnish  
POL  
CZE  
HUN  
JAP  
RUS  
LAT  
Polish  
Czech  
Hungarian  
Japanese  
Russian  
Latvian  
TURK  
Turkish  
LD 11 – Configure the Server-based Applications (Corporate Directory and  
Set-to-Set Messaging) (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
New data  
Change current data  
TYPE:  
3903  
3904  
3905  
M3900 set types that support the Corporate Directory and the  
Set-to-Set Messaging.  
...  
...  
...  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 218 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 11 – Configure the Server-based Applications (Corporate Directory and  
Set-to-Set Messaging) (Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt Response  
CLS aaaa  
Description  
Class of Service options where aaaa:  
= ADD - Automatic Digit Display, default for M3903, M3904, and  
M3905  
= (VCE), DTA - Voice Terminal, Data Terminal  
= (FLXD) - Flexible voice/data Denied  
= FLXA - Flexible voice/data Allowed  
Note 1: Class of Service must be VCE, FLXA if telephone is  
equipped with the optional Analog Terminal Adapter.  
= (STSD) Set-to-Set Messaging Denied  
= STSA, Set-to-Set Messaging Allowed  
Note 2: STSD and STSA Class of Service applies to M3903, M3904,  
and M3905.  
= (CRPD), Corporate Directory Denied  
= CRPA, Corporate Directory Allowed  
Note 3: (CRPD) and CRPA Class of Service applies to M3903,  
M3904, and M3905.  
...  
...  
...  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 219 of 504  
LD 32 – Clear or reset a Personal Directory Password for M3900 telephones.  
Command  
Description  
CPWD l s c u  
Clear Directory Password and Terminal number, where:  
l = loop address  
s = shelf address  
c = card address  
u = unit address  
Note: The Clear command allows the system administrator to clear  
the M3900 Directory password of the specified M3900 Series Digital  
Telephone. This allows a user to access the M3900 Directory if the  
password has been forgotten or if the user wants to change the current  
password.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 220 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 20 – Print Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for Virtual and Host Terminals  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
PRT  
LTN  
Print data block for the requested terminal type(s)  
List Terminal Numbers of the requested terminal type(s)  
TYPE:  
xxxxx  
3903V  
3904V  
3903H  
3904H  
TNB  
Enter appropriate telephone model where xxxxx:  
3903V = M3903 Virtual Terminal  
3904V = M3904 Virtual Terminal  
3903H = M3903 Host Terminal  
3904H = M3904 Host Terminal  
Note 1: Only M3903 and M3904 Digital Telephones can be  
configured as a Virtual or Host Terminal.  
Note 2: The Print TNB and List TNB requests always show  
the logged-off TNB data. In logged-in state, an indication of  
the logged-in TN (“HOST TN” or “VIRTUAL TN”) is added.  
...  
...  
...  
.
LD 22 – Print M3900 peripheral software versions  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
PRT  
Print  
TYPE:  
PSWV  
Peripheral software versions on disk  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 221 of 504  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download (Part 1 of 3)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
CHG  
PRT  
Change Flash Download Parameters  
Print Flash Download Parameters  
TYPE  
FDTP  
FDL  
t
Flash Download for M3900 Series Digital Telephone  
Enter M3900 set type selected for Flash Download  
3902 = M3902  
3903 = M3903  
3904 = M3904  
3905 = M3905  
ALL = All of the above  
NONE = None of the above (default)  
No further prompt; returns to “REQ”  
FDTM  
(NO) YES  
Time interval restriction for Flash Download  
NO = Do not change time intervals (default)  
YES = Proceed to change time intervals  
Note 1: Flash Download is automatically paused one hour  
before virtual midnight (see TODR in LD 17) to allow midnight  
routines to run.  
Note 2: This option is not applicable to reporting.  
FDAY  
dn  
Enter day and number of time intervals for Flash Download.  
Prompt appears only if FDTM = YES  
Day is reprompted until carriage return <CR> alone is entered.  
d = day of the week (0-6 for Sunday to Saturday)  
n = number of time intervals (0-4); to disallow download for the  
day, enter 0  
Note: If two or more intervals are specified, they must be  
non-overlapping, non-consecutive, and in increasing order.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 222 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download (Part 2 of 3)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FINT  
sl  
Enter starting hour and length for a time interval.  
Prompted n times if n>0.  
s = starting hour (0-23)  
l = length of interval in hours (1-24)  
FTNR  
FSTN  
(NO) YES  
TN range restriction option for Flash Download  
NO = no TN restriction (default)  
YES = specify TN range  
Starting Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompt appears  
only if FTNR = YES.  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit  
Format for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media Gateway  
1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T, where c = card and u = unit  
FETN  
Ending Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompt appears  
only if FTNR = YES  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit  
Format for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media Gateway  
1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T, where c = card and u = unit  
FDNR  
(NO) YES  
DN range restriction option for Flash Download  
NO = no DN restriction (default)  
YES = specify DN range  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 installation and configuration  
Page 223 of 504  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download (Part 3 of 3)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FDDN  
c d1 d2  
Flash Download Prime Directory Number range  
Prompt appears only if FDNR = YES  
c = Customer number (0-99)  
d1 = starting Prime DN  
d2 = ending Prime DN  
FRCE  
(NO) YES  
System-wide Flash Download control option  
NO = Conditional (default). System-wide Flash Download (via  
FDLS in LD 32) applies only to an M3900 series set whose flash  
firmware version is different from the version currently found on  
the system disk  
YES = Forced. Force System-wide Flash Download to all of the  
specified M3900 Series Digital telephones regardless of their  
current flash firmware versions.  
Note 1: Use this option with caution! Once the download tree is  
built (i.e., after executing FDLS in LD 32), this option  
automatically reverts to NO.  
Note 2: This option is not applicable to reporting.  
FVER  
0-99  
Flash firmware version specified for full report. If 0, report all  
versions (default).  
Note: This option is applicable to reporting only (via FSUM ALL  
in LD 32).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 224 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 11 – Configure Full Duplex Handsfree Class of Service  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
3904  
M3900 series telephone type  
Full Duplex Handsfree functionality requires an M3904  
Phase III set.  
...  
CLS  
HFA  
Handsfree Allowed  
HFD = Handsfree Denied (default)  
LD 32 – Flash Download commands (Part 1 of 2)  
Command  
Description  
FDLU l s c u  
Initiate conditional download to one telephone  
Terminal number, where:  
l = loop address  
s = shelf address  
c = card address  
u = unit address  
FDLI l s c u  
FDLF l s c u  
FWVU l s c u  
FDLS  
Initiate conditional download to an M3900 Series Digital Telephone when it  
becomes idle.  
initiate a forced download to an M3900 Series Digital Telephone regardless  
of its version and state.  
Query and print the firmware versions currently on an M3900 Series Digital  
Telephone.  
Initiate system-wide flash download to all, or a specified type of M3900  
Series Digital Telephones, based on parameters specified in LD 97  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 installation and configuration  
LD 32 – Flash Download commands (Part 2 of 2)  
Page 225 of 504  
Command  
Description  
FDLC  
Cancel or gracefully stop the system-wide flash download for M3900 Series  
telephones.  
FSUM  
Display summary report of current firmware versions on all M3900 Series  
telephones.  
The format of the report is as follows:  
* * M390x SUMMARY REPORT * *  
dd - ON DISK  
ff (cc) - nnnn SETS FOUND  
ff (cc) - nnnn SETS FOUND  
Where:  
x = 2 to 5 for M3902 to M3905  
dd = the flash firmware version found on the system disk  
ff = the downloadable flash firmware version found on the telephone  
cc = the core firmware found on the telephone  
nnnn = the number of telephones found with firmware version ff (cc)  
FSUM ALL  
Display a complete report on all M3900 Series telephones based on  
parameters specified in LD 97.  
The format of the report is as follows:  
TYPE: tttt CUST: cc PDN: ddddddd TN: l s c u FW: vv  
Where:  
tttt = 3902, 3903, 3904 or 3905  
cc = 0-99  
ddddddd = the Primary DN of the telephone  
vv = the flash firmware version  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 226 of 504  
M3900 installation and configuration  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288  
Page 227 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Summary of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Determining software, M3900 PSWV, or firmware versions. . . . . . . . 261  
X11 software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261  
M3900 language PSWV versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262  
M3900 firmware versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262  
Flash Download advisements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
PSDL installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267  
Dynamic PSDL installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267  
Detailed Flash Download procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
Configuration parameters in LD 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274  
Single-Set Flash Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274  
System-wide Flash Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275  
Print Firmware Versions on M3900 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279  
Query Disk Firmware Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Commands for system-wide Flash Download of M3900 telephones . . 284  
Introduction  
M3900 Flash Download provides the capability to download a new firmware  
version from the CS 1000 and Meridian 1 to an M3900 telephone. Flash  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 228 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Download provides a way for installed M3900 telephones to be updated to the  
appropriate firmware release level for supporting features on the system.  
Firmware on all M3900 Series Digital Telephones can be upgraded using  
Flash Download, with the exception of the M3901. Flash Download can be  
invoked for one M3900 telephone, for a group of M3900 telephones, or all  
telephones on the system. It can be invoked locally or remotely for  
maintenance purposes. Features of the flash download procedure include the  
following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Telephone type can be specified (M3902, M3903, M3904, M3905, All)  
Day(s) of week can be specified  
Up to four intervals per day can be specified (start time, length)  
TN Range can be specified (start TN, end TN)  
DN Range can be specified (start DN, end DN)  
Force Download can be specified (yes, no)  
Flash download is incorporated in the existing Peripheral SoftWare Version  
(PSWV) background tasks of the Work Schedule. Therefore, regular call  
processing is impacted as little as possible. In the context of this document,  
PSWV represents the firmware file that is downloaded to an M3900  
telephone. It is sometimes referred to as a Peripheral Software DownLoad  
(PSDL). PSDL is a file that holds PSWV for hardware (for example,  
terminals or trunk cards) that supports a firmware upgrade.  
Flash Download requires the use of two software overlays. Use LD 97 to  
configure the parameters for the Flash Download capability. Use LD 32 to run  
the feature. Before the Flash Download feature is used, configure the feature  
in LD 97.  
Summary of steps  
See Tables 37 and 38 for the overall steps needed to perform a flash  
download. Table 37 is for Small Systems and Table 38 is for Large Systems.  
These tables list the versions of system software that an M3900 customer  
could be running and the high-level steps needed to upgrade to the latest  
Reissue software. The tables reference “PSDL installation” on page 267 for  
the steps to install the M3900 language set, PSWV. The tables also reference  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 229 of 504  
the “Detailed Flash Download procedure” on page 269 for the step-by-step  
procedure for flash downloading firmware to the M3900 Series Digital  
Telephones.  
If you have difficulties in determining versions of X11 software, M3900  
PSWV language files or firmware, refer to“Determining software, M3900  
PSWV, or firmware versions” on page 261.  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 1 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
24.24  
25.08  
Yes  
Phase I  
1. Call Nortel technical support to  
(Re-issue)  
find out how to obtain any  
necessary upgrades.  
•
A SIM upgrade from 8 to 16  
Meg is required.  
•
An upgrade from MAT 6.5 is  
required.  
2. Download software from the  
web.  
3. Follow the “PSDL installation” on  
page 267.  
4. Install manufactured patches.  
5. Download firmware to  
telephones, following the Flash  
Download procedure.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 230 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 2 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase II/III  
phones should not be configured  
on a Release 24.2x system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 24.2x to Release 25.08  
Reissue procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.08 Reissue  
contains M3900 Phase I firmware  
for M3902 and M3905 telephones  
and Phase II firmware for M3903  
and M3904 telephones. Follow the  
Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase II  
phones to Phase II/III firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 231 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 3 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.15  
Re-issue  
Yes  
Phase I  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase II/III  
phones should not be configured  
on a Release 24.2x system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 24.2x to Release 25.15  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.15 Re-issue  
contains M3900 Phase I firmware  
for M3905 telephones and Phase II  
firmware for M3902, M3903, and  
M3904 telephones. Follow the  
Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
phones to Phase I/II firmware.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 232 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 4 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase II/III  
phones should not be configured  
on a Release 24.2x system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 24.2x to Release 25.30  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware  
for M3902, M3903, and M3904  
telephones. Follow the Flash  
Download process to downgrade  
the M3900 Phase III phones to  
Phase I/II firmware.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase II/III  
phones should not be configured  
on a Release 24.2x system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 24.2x to Release 25.40/  
25.40B procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B  
contain M3900 Phase III firmware  
for M3900 telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 233 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 5 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase II/III  
phones should not be configured  
on a Release 24.2x system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 24.2x to Release 03.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase II/III  
phones should not be configured  
on a Release 24.2x system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 24.2x to Release 04.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 234 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 6 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.08  
25.08  
Re-issue  
No  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
1. Download software from the  
web.  
2. Follow “PSDL installation” on  
page 267.  
3. Install manufactured patches.  
4. Download firmware to  
telephones, following the Flash  
Download procedure.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 25.08  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The 25.08 Reissue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3902  
and M3905 telephones and  
Phase II firmware for M3903 and  
M3904 telephones. Follow the  
Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
phones to Phase I/II firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 235 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 7 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.15  
Re-issue  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 25.15  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The 25.08 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware  
for M3902, M3903, and M3904  
telephones. Follow the Flash  
Download process to downgrade  
the M3900 Phase III phones to  
Phase I/II firmware.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 236 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 8 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.10  
Re-issue  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
1. Call Nortel technical support to  
find out how to obtain any  
necessary upgrades.  
2. Determine M3900 PSWV to  
install (see Table 40 on page 281).  
Note: Select PSWV #5 (Phase I  
firmware for X11 Release 24;  
second PC card is needed) only if  
the customer is just running the  
Release 24 M3900 features.  
3. Download software from the web  
with the appropriate PSWV  
language file.  
4. Follow the PSDL Installation  
Procedure (see “PSDL installation”  
on page 267) to install software  
with the selected M3900 PSWV  
file.  
5. Install the manufactured patch.  
6. Download firmware to the  
telephones, following the Flash  
Download procedure.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 237 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 9 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 25.10  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The 25.10 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3902  
and M3905 telephones and  
Phase II firmware for M3903 and  
M3904 telephones. Follow the  
Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
phones to Phase I/II firmware.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 238 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 10 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 25.30  
procedure for Phase I and Phase II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware  
for M3902, M3903, and M3904  
telephones. Follow the Flash  
Download process to downgrade  
the M3900 Phase III phones to  
Phase I/II firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 239 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 11 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 25.40/  
25.40B Re-issue procedure for  
Phase I and Phase II telephones  
(above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B  
contain M3900 Phase III firmware  
for M3900 telephones.  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 03.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 240 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 12 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.08 to Release 04.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 241 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 13 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.15  
25.15  
Reissue  
No  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
1. Determine M3900 PSWV to  
install (see Table 40 on page 281).  
Select PSWV #1 Global or #4 N.A.  
(25% savings; second PC card  
needed).  
Note: Select PSWV #5 (Release 1  
firmware for X11 Release 24;  
second PC card needed) only if the  
customer is just running the  
Release 24 M3900 features.  
2. Download software from the web  
with appropriate PSWV language  
file.  
3. Follow the PSDL Installation  
Procedure, see “PSDL installation”  
on page 267 to install software with  
the selected M3900 PSWV file.  
4. Install manufactured patches.  
5. Download firmware to  
telephones, following the Flash  
Download procedure.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 242 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 14 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.15 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.15 to Release 25.15  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 25.15 Re-issue  
contains M3900 Phase I firmware  
for M3905 telephones and Phase II  
firmware for M3902, M3903, and  
M3904 telephones. Follow the  
Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
phones to Phase I/II firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 243 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 15 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.15 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.15 to Release 25.30  
procedure for Phase I and Phase II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware  
for M3902, M3903, and M3904  
telephones. Follow the Flash  
Download process to downgrade  
the M3900 Phase III phones to  
Phase I/II firmware.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.15 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.15 to Release 25.40/  
25.40B procedure for Phase I and  
Phase II telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B  
contain M3900 Phase III firmware  
for M3900 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 244 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 16 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.15 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.15 to Release 03.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.15 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.15 to Release 04.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 245 of 504  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 17 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
25.30  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.30 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.30 to Release 25.40/  
25.40B Re-issue procedure for  
Phase I and Phase II telephones  
(above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B  
contain M3900 Phase III firmware  
for M3900 telephones.  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.30 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.30 to Release 03.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 246 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 37  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Small Systems (Part 18 of 18)  
Present  
software  
Upgrade to  
software  
Keycode  
required  
M3900  
telephones Upgrade steps  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard  
process. M3900 Phase III phones  
should not be configured on a  
Release 25.30 system.  
1. Follow the Small System  
Release 25.30 to Release 04.00  
Re-issue procedure for Phase I  
and Phase II telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains  
M3900 Phase III firmware for  
M3900 telephones.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
03.00  
04.00  
04.00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase I,  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
03.00  
Phase I,  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 247 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 1 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
24.25  
25.08  
Yes  
Phase I  
1. Call Nortel technical support to find out  
Re-issue  
how to obtain any necessary upgrades.  
2. Follow the PSDL Installation  
Procedure (see “PSDL installation” on  
page 267).  
4. Install the manufactured patches.  
5. Download the firmware to the  
telephones, following the Flash  
Download procedure.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase II and  
Phase III telephones on a Release 24.2x  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
24.2x to 25.08 Re-issue procedure for  
Phase 1 telephones (above).  
The Release 25.08 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3902 and  
M3905 telephones and Phase II firmware  
for M3903 and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
telephones to Phase I/II firmware.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 248 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 2 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.15  
Re-issue  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase II and  
Phase III telephones on a Release 24.2x  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
24.2x to 25.15 Re-issue procedure for  
Phase 1 telephones (above).  
The Release 25.15 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
telephones to Phase I/II firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 249 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 3 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase II and  
Phase III telephones on a Release 24.2x  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
24.2x to 25.30 procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 contains M3900  
Phase I firmware for M3905 telephones  
and Phase II firmware for M3902,  
M3903, and M3904 telephones. Follow  
the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III  
telephones to Phase I/II firmware.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase II and  
Phase III telephones on a Release 24.2x  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
24.2x to 25.40/25.40B procedure for  
Phase I telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B contain  
M3900 Phase III firmware for M3900  
telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 250 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 4 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase II and  
Phase III telephones on a Release 24.2x  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
24.2x to 03.00 procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase II and  
Phase III telephones on a Release 24.2x  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
24.2x to 04.00 procedure for Phase I  
telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 251 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 5 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.08  
25.08  
Re-issue  
No  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
1. Call Nortel technical support to find out  
how to obtain any necessary upgrades.  
2. Follow the PSDL Installation  
Procedure (see “PSDL installation” on  
page 267).  
4. Install the manufactured patches.  
5. Download the firmware to telephones,  
following the Flash Download procedure.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Large System 25.08 to  
25.08 Re-issue procedure for Release 1  
telephones (above).  
The 25.08 Re-issue contains M3900  
Phase I firmware for M3902 and M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3903 and M3904 telephones. Follow  
the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 252 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 6 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.15  
Re-issue  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Large System 25.08 to  
25.15 Re-issue procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.15 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Large System 25.08 to  
25.30 Re-issue procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 253 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 7 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.08 to 25.40/25.40B procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B contain  
M3900 Phase III firmware for M3900  
telephones.  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.08 to 03.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 254 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 8 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.08 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.08 to 04.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
25.10  
25.15  
Re-issue  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.10 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.10 to 25.15 Re-issue procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Release 25.15 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 255 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 9 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.10 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.10 to 25.30 Re-issue procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.10 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.10 to 25.40/25.40B procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B contain  
M3900 Phase III firmware for M3900  
telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 256 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 10 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.10 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.10 to 03.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Releases 03.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.10 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.10 to 04.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Releases 04.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 257 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 11 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.15  
25.15  
Re-issue  
No  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
1. Determine M3900 PSWV to install  
(see Table 40 on page 281).  
Select PSWV #1 Global or #4 N.A. (25%  
savings; second PC card needed).  
Note: Select PSWV #5 (Release 1  
firmware for X11 Release 24; second PC  
card needed) only if the customer is just  
running the Release 24 M3900 features.  
2. Download software from the web with  
appropriate PSWV language file.  
3. Follow the procedure “PSDL  
installation” on page 267 to install  
software with the selected M3900 PSWV  
file.  
4. Install manufactured patches.  
5. Download firmware to telephones,  
following the Flash Download procedure.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a 25.15 system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.15 to 25.15 Re-issue procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Release 25.15 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 258 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 12 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.30  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.15  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.15 to 25.30 Re-issue procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Release 25.30 Re-issue contains  
M3900 Phase I firmware for M3905  
telephones and Phase II firmware for  
M3902, M3903, and M3904 telephones.  
Follow the Flash Download process to  
downgrade the M3900 Phase III phones  
to Phase I/II firmware.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.15  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.15 to 25.40/25.40B procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B contain  
M3900 Phase III firmware for M3900  
telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 259 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 13 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.15  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.15 to 03.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.15  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.15 to 04.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 260 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 14 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
25.30  
25.40,  
25.40B  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.30  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.30 to 25.40/25.40B procedure for  
Phase I/II telephones (above).  
The Releases 25.40 and 25.40B contain  
M3900 Phase III firmware for M3900  
telephones.  
03.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.30  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.30 to 03.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 03.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 261 of 504  
Table 38  
Flash Download procedure matrix for Large Systems (Part 15 of 15)  
Upgrade  
Present  
to  
Keycode  
M3900  
software  
software required  
telephones  
Upgrade steps  
04.00  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase III  
Note: This is not a standard process.  
There should not be M3900 Phase III  
phones configured on a Release 25.30  
system.  
1. Follow the Large System Release  
25.30 to 04.00 procedure for Phase I/II  
telephones (above).  
The Release 04.00 contains M3900  
Phase III firmware for M3900 telephones.  
25.40,  
25.40B  
03.00  
04.00  
04.00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Phase I,  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Phase I,  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
03.00  
Phase I,  
Phase II,  
Phase III  
Follow the standard software order  
process.  
Determining software, M3900 PSWV, or firmware versions  
X11 software versions  
Use the ISS command in LD 22 to identify X11 software versions. When  
trying to determine whether a system’s software has been upgraded to the  
Reissue of 25.08 or 25.15, patches MPLR13167 and MPLR13247 must be  
loaded and the LD 22 ISS command must be issued. If “PSWV Version 32”  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 262 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
appears for X11 Release 25.08 software, the 25.08 Reissue software has been  
loaded. If “PSWV Version 33” appears for X11 Release 25.15 software, the  
25.15 Reissue software has been loaded.  
M3900 language PSWV versions  
To find the M3900 Language PSWV version on Small Systems, see related  
procedures in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Small System  
Upgrade Procedures (553-3011-258). The system then prints the M3900  
Language PSWV file version and name, which is referenced in Table 40 on  
page 281.  
To find the M3900 Language PSWV version on Large Systems, follow the  
appropriate Large System procedure in Communication Server 1000M and  
Meridian 1: Large System Upgrade Procedures (553-3021-258). When you  
get to the PSDL Installation menu under the Install M3900 telephone  
Language menu, select item 2 “List 3900 telephone languages”. The system  
then displays the PSDL file that is currently installed on the machine, as well  
as other PSWV files available to install.  
An alternative procedure for both large and Small Systems is to download an  
M3900 telephone on the system and query the language version for that  
telephone through the telephone’s display diagnostics. See “M3900 firmware  
versions” on page 262 for information on obtaining the firmware version  
through display diagnostics. Once the firmware version has been obtained, it  
can be cross referenced to the M3900 PSWV language version in Table 40 on  
page 281.  
M3900 firmware versions  
Use the FWVU command in LD 32 to obtain the firmware version of an  
M3900 telephone. The firmware version or language version can be found  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 263 of 504  
through the display diagnostics on the M3900 telephone. You can obtain the  
display diagnostics through the following procedure.  
Procedure 44  
Displaying the M3900 Diagnostics  
1
2
Press the Options key on the M3900 telephone.  
Scroll to the Display Diagnostics entry, using the up or down navigation  
keys.  
3
4
Press the Select soft key.  
Scroll to the screen that shows the language file and firmware version  
using the up or down navigation keys.  
End of Procedure  
For the latest firmware versions contained in the X11 software Reissue, refer  
to Table 40 on page 281. For information on firmware versions which fix  
particular M3900 problems, refer to Matrix G in the latest version of the  
M3900 Series Digital Telephone Advisory Bulletin.  
The general rules for identifying which versions of firmware are Release 1  
and which are Release 2 for the M3903, M3904 and M3905 telephones are  
as follows:  
•
Phase 1 firmware vintages are less than version 4.0 (<40 from LD 32  
FWVU response).  
•
Phase 2 firmware vintages are greater or equal to version 4.0 (>= 40 from  
LD 32 FWVU response) but less than version 6.0 (<60 from LD 32  
FWVU response).  
•
Phase 3 firmware vintages are greater or equal to version 6.0 (>=60 from  
LD 32 FWVU response).  
Flash Download advisements  
Since the Flash Downloading feature of the M3900 takes some bandwidth  
from the system signaling path while it is operating, it is recommended that  
downloading be scheduled in off-peak hours for best results. There is some  
real time impact to the system since the system processor is busy doing the  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 264 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
downloads. However, there is no impact to call processing, since call  
processing has a higher priority. Therefore, downloads take longer during  
peak traffic times because the system processor is busy doing call processing  
and cannot devote as much time to the M3900 downloads. There is no  
difference between Large Systems and Small Systems for this.  
When a system is first brought into service with M3900 telephones, there is a  
significant amount of messaging that occurs to activate the telephones  
through the Lamp Audit background routine. The time required to bring all  
telephones into service on a system is dependent on the system configuration,  
and could take several hours. Performing a Flash Download directly after the  
system is brought into service adds to the message load on the system.  
Therefore, it is recommended that M3900 telephone download activities not  
occur in conjunction with systems being brought into service. Instead  
downloads should occur 24 hours after a system is brought into service.  
If a user attempts to use a telephone during a flash download, all telephone  
activity is ignored.  
When performing a flash download to an M3900 port that does not have a  
telephone installed, or downloading to an M3900 port that has the wrong  
M3900 telephone type installed, an SDL2110 error message is printed out at  
the system.  
During the middle of flash download operation, if the telephone is  
disconnected or if the telephone fails download for any reason, the telephone  
is rendered inoperable. Flash downloading must run to completion before the  
telephone can be made operable.  
For the manual individual download operation, if the telephone is not  
responding (is not operational) or if the telephone is not a M3900 telephone,  
flash download fails.  
If the firmware file(s) used as the source for flash download to M3900  
telephones are not present (in the proper location) on the system disks, the  
flash download operation fails.  
While a system-wide flash download operation is in progress, attempts to  
disable telephones that are currently being downloaded result in an SCH1958  
message that is printed with the list of telephones involved. If a loop, shelf, or  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 265 of 504  
card that contains the telephones being downloaded is disabled, then the  
download to the telephones on that loop, shelf, or card fails.  
According to the existing PSWV logic, when PSWV is in progress, an  
attempt to load an overlay is denied and result in an OVL0306 message.  
Nortel strongly recommends that you not force load an overlay (load with a  
Suspend option) unless there is an emergency while PSWV is in progress. In  
this instance, existing PSWV logic aborts downloading for the current PSWV  
block (of cards or telephones of a given type being downloaded) and restarts  
the download for that block and remaining ones after the overlay is exited. If  
this happens to M3900 flash download, the block of telephones are  
out-of-service for a lengthy period of time and this prolongs the completion  
of the system-wide flash download.  
If system warm-start (Initialization) or cold-start (Sysload) occurs while flash  
download is in progress, the download process is aborted abruptly. Any  
telephones which are in the middle of download fail to complete firmware  
download and are left inoperable. You must re-enter the single-telephone or  
system-wide flash download command later to restart and complete the  
download. For system-wide downloads, any previously scheduled telephones  
are no longer queued for download.  
While a manual individual download operation is still in progress, do not  
abort LD 32 (except in an emergency) by using the **** command. If the  
overlay is aborted before completing the download, the telephone is left  
inoperable until a flash download command for the telephone is re-entered  
and completed at a later time.  
During system wide download, you can use all overlays by issuing the  
ld x susp command. However, this ungracefully stops the download to the  
current group of telephones that are being downloaded and leaves them  
without firmware until the overlay is exited. The download to these  
telephones is then started again.  
While a system-wide flash download operation is in progress:  
•
Service change (CHG, MOV, or OUT) to a unit that is currently being  
downloaded is blocked in LD 11. An SCH1958 message is printed.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 266 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
•
Move (MOV) or remove (OUT through LD 11 or Automatic Set  
Relocation) to an M3900 telephone before its flash download starts  
prevents download to the telephone in this cycle of system-wide flash  
download.  
•
A new M3900 telephone added (through LD 11 or Automatic Set  
Relocation) after the FDLS command is issued is not included in this  
round of system-side download.  
When scheduling the Flash Download of telephones, note that one hour  
before the Midnight routines execute, the flash download process is  
gracefully stopped. The Flash downloading resumes once midnight routines  
are executed.  
When a schedule is defined in LD 97 and the Flash Download is started (by  
entering the FDLS command in LD 32), all scheduled telephones are queued  
for download. The download process remains active in the background until  
the download is complete or is canceled (using the FDLC command in LD  
32). If the download is active in the background (telephones not actively  
downloading per the scheduled download time) and the download schedule is  
removed in LD 97, the download begins immediately for the telephones that  
remain in the download queue. Use the LD x SUSP command to load an  
overlay when the download is active in the background (scheduled but not  
actively downloading telephones). It is also not possible to perform a single  
telephone download (FDLU, FDLI, or FDLF command from LD 32) while  
the download is active in the background. If an individual download is  
attempted in this case, the system indicates that the PSDL is not idle. If an  
individual telephone download is necessary while the download is active in  
the background, you must cancel the download in LD 32 using the FDLC  
command. Once the individual downloads are complete, you can restart the  
schedule download with the FLDS command in LD 32.  
Note: If the force option is used with the FDLS command, all telephones  
in the original schedule are downloaded.  
For M3900 telephones actively being flash downloaded when the Flash  
Download Cancel FDLC command is issued, the flash download to these  
telephones is completed before the flash download process cancels.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 267 of 504  
M3905 telephones acquired by the Symposium Call Center Server (SCCS) do  
not have to be de-acquired (pulled out of all queues) before the flash  
download is started. However, during the download, the agent using the  
M3905 telephone is placed in a maintenance-busy state for approximately 12  
minutes. As a result, the SCCS is not able to record any agent statistics for  
agents using the M3905 telephones during the download. The SCCS agent  
reports for the interval in which the download occurred will, therefore, be  
inaccurate.  
PSDL installation  
During a flash download, the system downloads the contents of a PSDL/  
PSWV file to an M3900 telephone. This PSDL Installation Procedure can be  
used to load a new PSDL/PSWV file on the system in place of totally  
reinstalling system software. If there are concerns about system downtime in  
regards to performing software upgrades in cases where only a new PSDL/  
PSWV file is needed, this process allows the replacement of the PSDL/  
PSWV file only. For detailed information on the PSDL installation  
procedure, refer to Communication Server 1000S: Upgrade Procedures  
(553-3031-258).  
Dynamic PSDL installation  
The system supports Dynamic PSDL installation. It is no longer necessary to  
update all PSDL files to obtain the latest firmware. A loadware patch with  
new PSWV can be installed. The patch installation replaces the existing  
PSVW file and rebuilds the PSDL file. The new M3900 firmware files are  
available through the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library (ESPL) website.  
Four new pdt commands support the Dynamic PSDL feature:  
•
•
-lwload <loadware patch filename(s)>  
— loads one or more loadware patches on the switch.  
-lwinst <loadware patch number(s)>  
— rebuilds psdl.rec to include new loadware  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 268 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
•
-lwout <loadware patch number(s)>  
— removes one or more loadware patches from the switch  
•
-lwstat <loadware patch number(s)>  
— displays status of loadware patches on switch  
— if no patch numbers given, displays all patches  
The loadware patches must be located in the /u/loadware directory. Below is  
the example of loadware patching.  
pdt> lwload ger1ba50.p  
Loading loadware patch from "c:/u/loadware/ger1ba50.p"  
Loadware patch number is 0.  
pdt> lwinst 0  
The existing c:/p/sl1/psdl.rec will be deleted  
Do you wish to back up this file (y/n)? [n]  
Loadware "GER1BA49" will be replaced by "GER1BA50"  
Do you wish to continue (y/n) [y]  
Building system loadware. This will take a few minutes.  
…
Done. Must reboot for changes to take effect.  
pdt> lwstat 0  
Base loadware version: 56  
Number of patches installed: 1  
Loadware patch number: 0  
Patch file: c:/u/loadware/ger1ba50.p  
Patchname: GER1 L/w  
Ref. number: mplr12345  
PRS number: mp12345  
Engineer: DE  
Created: Mon Feb 5 10:47:25 2001  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 269 of 504  
Patch is loaded & installed  
Install date: Mon Feb 5 11:15:20 2001  
pdt> lwout 0  
Loadware patch 0 has been removed successfully.  
System loadware must now be re-built.  
Detailed Flash Download procedure  
1
Identify telephones to be downloaded. If possible, organize by  
Telephone type, TN Range, or DN Range. To determine telephone  
quantity and type, use LDs 97 and 32 to print the ranges of telephones  
using the commands given below.  
2
3
Establish telephone quantity.  
Estimate the time required for download. Downloading telephones with  
the North America reduced language set file takes nine minutes per  
telephones (on the M3905 it takes 12 minutes). Language sets other that  
the North America reduced language set file take 12 minutes to  
download. On Small Systems, you can download four sets in parallel. On  
Large Systems, you can download one set per XPEC in parallel, up to a  
maximum of 8 on CP4 and 31 on CPP.  
The following formulas provide estimates of download times:  
— Small System — North American 6 Language file:  
((Quantity of M3902, 3, 4 x 9 minutes)+(quantity of M3905 x 12  
minutes))/4, where 4 details the number of sets that can be  
downloaded in parallel.  
—
Small System — Global 10 Language file:  
(Quantity of M3902, 3, 4, 5 x 12 minutes)/4, where 4 details the  
number of sets that can be downloaded in parallel  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 270 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
— Large System — North America 6 Language file:  
((Quantity of M3902,3,4 x 9 minutes)+(quantity of M3905 x 12  
minutes))/ number of XPECs (assuming even distribution of sets)  
— Large System — Global 10 Language file:  
((Quantity of M3902,3,4,5 x 12 minutes))/ number of XPECs  
(assuming even distribution of sets)  
4
Based on the quantity of telephones and the site situation, determine how  
the download will occur:  
a
b
c
Individual downloads (Use individual commands in LD 32)  
System download (Use system download command in LD 32)  
Scheduled download/range download (Use scheduled download  
commands in LD 32 and LD 97  
5
6
Issue the appropriate download command.  
As the download occurs, the telephone displays the following  
information:  
During a flash download, the M3902, M3903, and M3905 telephones  
display messages on the displays at the right. (See Figure 43 on  
page 271) Display 1 shows the “Erasing Flash Memory” message along  
with blocks written to the second line (each with decreasing contrast).  
This is followed by Display 2 that reads “Awaiting Download.”  
Display 3 flashes the text “Downloading Firmware” on the first line with  
progress bars on the second line.  
When all 24 segments of the progress bars are displayed as shown, the  
download is complete. The telephone then resets and returns to service.  
All user-controlled parameters, such as screen contrast, volume settings,  
and key labels are not affected by the firmware download. In the event  
that the firmware download was not successful, the text “Terminal Out  
of Service is displayed on the first line. In some cases, the telephone  
erases the flash memory, showing Display 1 followed by Display 2.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 271 of 504  
Figure 43  
Information displayed during a flash download  
Erasing Flash Memory  
Display 1  
Display 2  
Display 3  
Awaiting Download...  
Downloading Firmware  
For the M3904, an hourglass icon is displayed during the flash memory erase  
process (see Figure 44). The erase process can take up to 15 seconds.  
Figure 44  
Hourglass icon  
After a successful memory erase, an icon showing a stack of disks (left side  
of the display) and a phone icon (right side of the display) are displayed (see  
Figure 45). These icons remain on the display during the entire download.  
Figure 45  
Stack of disks and telephone icons  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 272 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Upon receiving the first flash data packet, a page status bar is displayed (see  
Figure 46). Depending on the language files being downloaded, there are  
three or four memory pages that are downloaded (three for North American,  
four for Global, Eastern/Western European versions). As additional flash data  
packets are received, the status bar advances to the right until the current page  
is completely programmed.  
Once the next page starts to download, a new page block is displayed and the  
status bar starts from the left again. This process is repeated for the remaining  
pages. If the download was unsuccessful, the telephone displays a telephone  
icon with an X through it. This indicates that the flash memory is not  
programmed (or is corrupt) and a new download must be initiated.  
Figure 46  
Status bar  
Upon completion of the flash download (all 3/4 pages have been  
received), the telephone verifies the flash memory contents before  
displaying the IDLE screen. The IDLE screen consists of the Date (Jan.  
1 12:00am) and the brandline (Nortel or customer programmed logo). Up  
to 25 seconds later, the switch downloads all the parameters to the  
telephone and the IDLE screen is updated according to the switch  
settings (for example, soft keys are shown, date is updated, and soft label  
keys are shown).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 273 of 504  
7
As the download occurs, various messages can appear on the system  
terminal. A complete list of these messages is in Software Input/Output:  
System Messages (553-3001-411).  
For each telephone that downloads successfully, the following will print:  
SDL000 hw a v m  
where hw = telephone type, a = Terminal Number (TN),  
v = version, m = Mode.  
For each telephone that fails to download, the following will print:  
SDL2110 e hw a v m  
where e = reason code, hw = telephone type, a = TN, v = version,  
m = Mode.  
For example:  
SDL2110 REASON 21, 3903(40 0 4 6), VERSION 84, BKGD  
MODE  
e (reason code, cause of the error) can be:  
1 = Time-out error  
2 = PSW checksum error  
3 = Record checksum error  
4 = Record format error  
5 = Firmware state error  
6 = Invalid page number received  
7 = Unrequired page delivered during download  
18 = Flash memory cannot be erased  
19 = Error detected while programming flash  
20 = An application is currently active, download cannot proceed  
21 = Verification byte incorrect  
hw (telephone type) can be:  
390x (M3900 telephone model: one of 3902, 3903, 3904, 3905)  
a (address — TN) can be:  
M390x telephone TN (LSCU: loop, shelf, card, unit)  
v is the PSW version  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 274 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
m (Mode) scan be:  
FAST MODE (from initialization)  
MAINT MODE (by ENLL command in LD 30)  
BKGD MODE (second attempt after initialization from background  
program)  
Procedure notes:  
•
For Symposium Call Center Server (SCCS) sites, you do not have to  
de-acquire telephones from the SCCS (pulled out of all queues);  
however, the statistics might not be valid.  
•
To downgrade an M3900 telephone from Release 2 firmware to  
Release 1 firmware, or to change the language file from North American  
to another language file (or vice versa) use PSWV File #5 from Table 40  
on page 281.  
•
For the downgrades procedure and language changes, refer to the  
appropriate upgrade procedures NTP:  
— Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Large System  
Upgrade Procedures (553-3021-258)  
— Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1: Small System  
Upgrade Procedures (553-3011-258)  
— Communication Server 1000S: Upgrade Procedures  
(553-3031-258)  
— Communication Server 1000E: Upgrade Procedures  
(553-3041-258)  
Configuration parameters in LD 32  
To use the Flash Download capability, load LD 32 and issue the following  
commands.  
Single-Set Flash Download  
Flash DownLoad Unit (FDLU) - Initiate flash download for this unit. For  
this command to work, the telephone must be in an idle state. That is, there  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 275 of 504  
can be no active call, no active application, and the telephone must be  
configured and in working condition (responding to a query command). Also,  
the firmware version on the telephone must not be current. That is, it must be  
different from the one on the system disk.  
. FDLU l s c u  
l = loop address  
s = shelf address  
c = card address  
u = unit address  
Flash DownLoad Idle (FDLI) - Initiate flash download as soon as the  
telephone is idle. For this command to work, the telephone must be in  
working condition. If the telephone is idle, the downloading occurs  
immediately. If the telephone is on an active call, downloading occurs  
immediately after the call is terminated. However, if after the active call is  
terminated, there is an active application on the telephone, downloading is  
aborted. Again, the downloading operation occurs only if the version on the  
telephone is not current.  
. FDLI l s c u  
Flash DownLoad Forced (FDLF) - Initiate flash download immediately.  
For this command to work, the telephone must be in working condition. If the  
telephone is idle, the downloading occurs immediately. If the telephone is on  
an active call, the call is force disconnected and then downloading occurs  
immediately after the disconnect. It also force downloads the system disk  
version even if the telephone firmware version is more current. However, if  
there is an application active on the telephone, the downloading operation is  
aborted.  
. FDLF l s c u  
System-wide Flash Download  
To prepare and trigger the flash download for the whole system manually,  
access LD 32 and issue the following commands.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 276 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Flash Download System (FDLS) - Initiate system-wide flash download  
based on the parameters specified in LD 97. This initiates the system-wide  
flash download to all, or the specified type of M3900 telephones, from the  
system disk if the flash firmware version on the telephone is different from  
the version found on the disk.  
During system-wide flash download, when flash download detects that an  
M3900 telephone is in an active call connection, the telephone is skipped.  
Download logic keeps track of skipped telephones, and comes back to  
attempt the download later.  
M3900 flash download attempts download to each telephone up to three  
times. If download does not succeed by the third attempt (whether due to an  
active call connection or some problem such as a transmission error), flash  
download to the telephone is considered to have failed. An appropriate  
message is displayed for each telephone that fails the firmware upgrade  
process. Upon completion of system-wide flash download, a completion  
message is displayed on the maintenance telephone. This operation can take  
up to several days to complete depending on the traffic load, the total number  
and distribution of the equipped M3900 telephones, and the scheduling of the  
download. See Table 39 on page 277 for estimations on download times.  
When M3900 telephones fail system-wide flash download, you can then  
determine the cause of the failure, perform corrective action, and repeat the  
flash download command – system-wide or for a specific telephone.  
.FDLS  
Flash Download Cancel (FDLC) - Cancel the system-wide flash download.  
From LD 32 or outside of the overlays, you can cancel or stop the  
system-wide flash download operation gracefully by issuing the FDLC  
command. A download in progress to the current telephone(s) completes  
before the download process terminates.  
.FDLC  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 277 of 504  
Table 39 shows the estimated Flash Download times.  
Table 39  
Estimated Flash Download times  
Download  
Time  
10 languages  
Faster  
Download  
6 languages  
Average  
Lines  
M3900  
Lines  
System  
Small System  
Single Group  
100  
400  
80 (100%)  
4 hours  
3 hours  
200 (~60%)  
20hrs.  
(2 XPECs)  
15 hours  
7.5 hours  
10hrs.  
(4 XPECs)  
Multi Group  
MSL-100  
1350  
8000  
650 (~60%)  
22 hrs.  
(6 XPECs)  
16.5  
4800 (~60%)  
30 hrs.  
(32 XPECs)  
22.5 hours  
15 hours  
20 hrs.  
(48 XPECs)  
The following assumptions apply to Table 39:  
•
•
•
•
20% trunking on all systems  
100% M3900 telephones on Small Systems  
60% M3900 telephones on Large Systems  
The Faster Download is based on using the North American language  
files for the M3902, M3903, and M3904 (PSWV File #4 is shown in  
Table 40 on page 281), which are 25% smaller than the Global language  
files. Therefore, they take 25% less time to download. The languages that  
are missing from the North American reduced language file are:  
Swedish, Italian, Norwegian, and Finnish. The languages contained in  
the North America reduced language file are: English, French, German,  
Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, and Japanese Katakana.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 278 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Commands for LD 32 are shown below.  
LD 32 – Flash Download commands (Part 1 of 2)  
Command  
Description  
FDLU l s c u  
Initiate conditional download to one telephone.  
Terminal number, where:  
l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit  
FDLI l s c u  
FDLF l s c u  
FWVU l s c u  
FDLS  
Initiate conditional download to an M3900 Series telephone when it  
becomes idle.  
Initiate a forced download to an M3900 Series telephone regardless  
of its version and state.  
Query and print the firmware versions currently on an M3900 Series  
telephone.  
Initiate system-wide Flash Download to all, or a specified type of  
M3900 Series telephones, based on parameters specified in LD 97.  
FDLC  
Cancel or gracefully stop the system-wide flash download for M3900  
Series telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 279 of 504  
LD 32 – Flash Download commands (Part 2 of 2)  
Command  
Description  
FSUM  
Display the summary report of current firmware versions on all M3900  
Series telephones.  
The format of the report is as follows:  
* * M390x SUMMARY REPORT * *  
dd - ON DISK  
ff (cc) - nnnn SETS FOUND  
ff (cc) - nnnn SETS FOUND  
Where:  
x = 2 to 5 for M3902 to M3905  
dd = the flash firmware version found on the system disk  
ff = the downloadable flash firmware version found on the telephones  
cc = the core firmware found on the telephones  
nnnn = the number of telephones found with firmware version ff (cc)  
FSUM ALL  
Display a complete report on all M3900 series telephones based on  
parameters specified in LD 97.  
The format of the report is as follows:  
TYPE: tttt CUST: cc PDN: ddddddd TN: l s c u FW: vv  
Where:  
tttt = 3902, 3903, 3904 or 3905  
cc = 0-99  
ddddddd = the Primary DN of the telephone  
vv = the flash firmware version  
Print Firmware Versions on M3900 Telephones  
To determine the firmware version information on M3900 telephones, use the  
following commands in LD 32:  
Firmware Version on Unit (FWVU) - Print current firmware versions on  
the unit. You can query and print the firmware versions (downloadable flash  
firmware, as well as core firmware) currently on the specified telephone using  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 280 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
this command. See Table 40 on page 281 for a list of current firmware  
versions.  
. FWVU l s c u  
Firmware version SUMmary (FSUM) - Print the firmware version  
summary report for all the M3900 telephones. This command prints the  
M3900 firmware versions found on the system disk and lists every version  
together with a count of M3900 telephones that are found to have this version.  
.FSUM  
The format of the report is as follows:  
**M390x SUMMARY REPORT**  
dd – ON DISK  
ff (cc) – nnnn SETS FOUND  
ff (cc) – nnnn SETS FOUND  
Where:  
x = 2 to 5 for M3902 to M3905  
dd = the flash firmware version found on the system disk  
ff = the downloadable flash firmware version found on the telephones  
cc = the core firmware found on the telephones  
nnnn = the number of telephones found with firmware version ff (cc)  
Firmware version SUMmary ALL (FSUM ALL) – Displays a complete  
report on all M3900 Series telephones based on the parameters in LD 97.  
.FSUM ALL  
The format of the report is as follows:  
TYPE: ttt CUST: cc PDN: ddddddd TN: l s c u FW: vv  
Where:  
tttt = 3902, 3903, 3904, 3905  
cc = 0-99  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
ddddddd = the Primary DN of the telephone  
Page 281 of 504  
vv = the flash firmware version  
Query Disk Firmware Versions  
To determine the firmware version residing on the system disk(s) available  
for download to the M3900 telephones, use the PSWV command in LD 22 to  
print the firmware versions for M3900 telephones. See Table 40 on page 281  
for a list of current firmware versions.  
Table 40  
Firmware and PSWV versions (Part 1 of 2)  
PEC  
codes  
PSWV codes  
F/W codes  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M3900  
telephone  
(## = 66,  
70)  
PSWV  
File  
PSWV  
Region  
M1 F/W file  
(PSWV)  
LD 22  
Response for  
PSWV  
Set F/W  
Diagnostic  
LD 32 FWVU  
Response  
See Note 2  
See Note 4  
for telephone  
F/W  
See Note 3  
XX = See  
Note 1  
See Note 5  
M3902  
NTMN32  
XX-##  
PSWV  
File #1  
Global  
(10 lang.)  
3902.loadaa  
84  
M3902: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 84  
Lang: L1.9  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
084  
F/W Ver: 8.4  
PSWV  
File #4  
N.  
America  
(6 lang.)  
3902.loadda  
84  
M3902: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 84  
Lang: L4.9  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
084  
F/W Ver: 8.4  
M3903  
NTMN33  
XX-##  
PSWV  
File #1  
Global  
R2: (10  
lang.)  
3903.loadaa  
87  
M3903: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 84  
Lang: L1.9  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
087  
F/W Ver 8.7  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 282 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Table 40  
Firmware and PSWV versions (Part 2 of 2)  
PEC  
codes  
PSWV codes  
F/W codes  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PSWV  
File #4  
N.  
America  
3903.loadda  
87  
M3903: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 87  
Lang: L4.9  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
087  
F/W Ver 8.7  
R2 (6  
lang.)  
NTMN33  
XX-##  
PSWV  
File #5  
Rel. 1 for  
X11 Rel  
24  
3903.loadaa  
36  
M3903: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 36  
Lang: P1.9  
F/W Ver 3.6  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
036  
M3904  
NTMN34  
XX-##  
PSWV  
File #1  
Global  
R2: (10  
lang.)  
3904.loadaa  
89  
M3904: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 89  
Flash: 8.9  
P0 L1.8  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
089  
PSWV  
File #4  
N.  
America  
3904.loadda  
89  
M3904: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 89  
Flash: 8.9  
P0 L4.8  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
089  
R2 (6  
lang.)  
NTMN34  
XX-##  
PSWV  
File #5  
Rel. 1 for  
X11 Rel  
24  
3904.loadaa  
34  
M3904: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 34  
Flash: 3.4  
P0 L1.8  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
034  
M3905  
NTMN35  
XX-##  
PSWV  
File #1  
Global  
3905.loadaa  
89  
M3905: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 89  
Lang: L1.9  
FLASH  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
089  
(10 lang.)  
F/W Ver 8.9  
PSWV  
File #4  
N.  
3905.loadaa  
89  
M3905: S/W  
VERSION  
NUMBERS: 89  
Lang: L1.9  
FLASH  
America  
(10 lang.)  
FIRMWARE  
VERSION =  
089  
F/W Ver 8.9  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
The following notes apply to Table 40.  
Page 283 of 504  
Note 1: For Column 1 labeled M3900 Telephone, XX is a two-letter  
alpha character that is part of the product code. For instance, a product  
code of NTMN32AB is a later issue than a code of NTMN32AA.  
Release 1 M3900 telephones all started with a “BA” designation for U.S.  
and Canada telephones, and “AA” for Canada only icon sets. Release 2  
M3900 telephones all started with a “FA” designation for U.S. and  
Canada telephones and “EA” for Canada only icon sets.  
Note 2: For Column 4 labeled M1 F/W File, the two-letter alpha  
character followed by two numbers (format: 390x.loadxx##) shows the  
release level of the PSWV file. For instance, M3902.loadaa40 is a later  
issue than M3902.loadaa36. The most up-to-date file names are shown.  
Note 3: For Column 5 labeled LD 22 Response for PSWV, the two  
number code is the firmware version release level. The larger the  
number, the newer the version. The last two digits correspond to the same  
version number as the M3900 firmware version. For instance, M3903: S/  
W VERSION NUMBERS: 51 is equivalent to M3900 F/W Version 5.1.  
The most current versions are shown.  
Note 4: Column 6, labeled Set F/W Diagnostic, shows the language file  
in use and the firmware level of the set, as seen on an M3900 display. The  
larger the number, the newer the version. The latest versions are shown.  
To view the firmware level of an M3900 telephone, press the Options  
key, scroll to the Display Diagnostics entry, and press Select. Use the  
Down Navigation key to get to the screen that shows the language file  
and firmware version.  
Note 5: For Column 7 labeled LD 32 FWVU Response for Telephone  
F/W, the three-digit number shows the firmware version of the telephone.  
The larger the number, the newer the version. For example, a number of  
040, refers to a firmware version of 4.0. The latest versions are shown.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 284 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
Commands for system-wide Flash Download of M3900  
telephones  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download. (Part 1 of 4)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
CHG  
PRT  
Change Flash Download parameters.  
Print Flash Download parameters.  
TYPE  
FDTP  
FDL  
Flash Download for M3900 telephones.  
Enter M3900 telephone type selected for Flash Download.  
3902  
3903  
3904  
3905  
ALL  
M3902 telephone  
M3903 telephone  
M3904 telephone  
M3905 telephone  
All of the above  
(NONE)  
None of the above (default)  
FDTM  
Time interval restriction for Flash Download.  
(NO)  
YES  
Do not change time intervals (default).  
Proceed to change time intervals.  
Note 1: Flash Download is automatically paused one hour  
before virtual midnight (see TODR in LD 17) to allow  
midnight routines to run.  
Note 2: This option is not applicable to reporting.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 285 of 504  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download. (Part 2 of 4)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FDAY  
Enter day and number of time intervals for Flash Download,  
where:  
d n  
d = day of the week (0-6 for Sunday to Saturday)  
n = number of time intervals (0-4)  
To disallow download for the day, enter 0.  
Day is re-prompted until you enter a Carriage Return,  
<CR>.  
Note 1: This prompt appears only if FDTM = YES.  
Note 2: If two or more intervals are specified, they must be  
overlapping, non-consecutive, and in order.  
FINT  
Enter starting hour and length for a time interval, where:  
s l  
s = starting hour (0-23)  
l = length of interval in hours (1-24)  
Note: FINT is prompted n time if n is greater than 0.  
FTNR  
FSTN  
TN range restriction option for Flash Download.  
(NO)  
YES  
No TN restriction (default)  
Specify TN range.  
Starting Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompt  
appears only if FTNR = YES.  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media  
Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T, where c =  
card and u = unit.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 286 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download. (Part 3 of 4)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FETN  
Ending Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompt  
appears only if FTNR = YES.  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, and  
Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card,  
u = unit.  
Format for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media  
Gateway 1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T, where c =  
card and u = unit.  
FDNR  
FDDN  
DN range restriction option for Flash Download.  
(NO)  
YES  
No DN restriction (default).  
Specify DN range.  
Flash Download Prime Directory Number range, where:  
c d1 d2  
c = Customer number (0-99)  
d1 = starting Prime DN  
d2 = ending Prime DN  
Note: Prompt appears only id FDNR = YES.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M3900 Flash Download  
Page 287 of 504  
LD 97 – Configure parameters for System-wide Flash Download. (Part 4 of 4)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FRCE  
System-wide Flash Download control option.  
Conditional (default).  
(NO)  
System-wide Flash Download (using the FDLS command in  
LD 32) applies only to an M3900 series telephone whose  
flash firmware version is different is different from the  
version currently found on the system disk.  
YES  
Forced.  
Force System-wide Flash Download to all of the specified  
M3900 series digital telephones regardless of their current  
flash firmware versions.  
Note 1: Use this option with caution. Once the download  
tree is built (that is, after executing FDLS in LD 32), this  
option automatically reverts to NO.  
Note 2: This option is not applicable to reporting.  
FVER  
0-99  
Flash firmware version specified for full report, where:  
If 0, report all versions (default).  
Note: This option is applicable to reporting only (through  
the FSUM ALL command in LD 32).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 288 of 504  
M3900 Flash Download  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
308  
Page 289 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Engineering a telephone line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290  
Selecting a Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299  
Calculating DC Loop Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299  
Performing Loop Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300  
Measuring Impulse Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302  
Measuring Background Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302  
Calculating Expected Pulse Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302  
Measuring DC Loop Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 290 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Engineering a telephone line  
Use Procedure 45 on page 290 to engineer a digital telephone line.  
Procedure 45  
Engineering a telephone line  
1
Be sure that cable pair selections meet the following requirements:  
•
•
•
AC signal loss is less than 12 dB at 256 kHz due to all sources.  
DC loop resistance is less than 175 ohm.  
Minimum loop length (mainframe bulkhead to telephone) is  
30 m (100 ft).  
•
Near-end crosstalk coupling loss is >38 dB at Nyquist frequency of  
256 kHz (not an issue for typical 22, 24, and 26 AWG twisted pair  
cable).  
•
•
•
No bridge taps are permitted.  
No loading coils are permitted.  
Protection devices of the carbon-block and gas-filled type are  
permitted if the off-state shunting impedance is better than 10 M¾  
resistive and less than 0.5 pF capacitive.  
2
Be sure that the following criteria are met where under-carpet cabling is  
used:  
•
•
•
Characteristic impedance is at 256 kHz, 100 10 ohm.  
Insertion loss is at 256 kHz, <4.6 dB/kft.  
The next pair-to-pair coupling loss is at 256 kHz, >40 dB.  
3
4
For a typical system with 22, 24, or 26 AWG standard twisted-pair cable,  
the requirements translate to the following allowable loops:  
•
•
up to 915 m (3000 ft) of 22 or 24 AWG cable  
up to 640 m (2100 ft) of 26 AWG cable  
If the selected cable pair does not work satisfactorily, select another cable  
pair as shown in Figure 47.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 291 of 504  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 1 of 8)  
[ 1 ]  
Select (another) loop  
that meets the criteria  
for cable length.  
(Procedure 2)  
[ 2 ]  
Is there  
a bridge  
tap?  
NO  
Go to  
Step 5  
YES  
[ 3 ]  
Is there  
another loop  
available?  
YES  
Go to  
Step 1  
NO  
[ 4 ]  
Remove the bridge tap.  
Go to  
Step 5  
553-AAA2053  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 292 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 2 of 8)  
[ 5 ]  
[ 6 ]  
Is the loop  
lenght less  
than 2.1 kft?  
Is there any  
26 AWG cable  
in the loop?  
NO  
Go to  
Step 9  
[ 7]  
YES  
YES  
Calculate the loop  
resistance.  
NO  
(Procedure 3)  
[ 8 ]  
Is the resistance  
less than  
NO  
175 ohm?  
Go to  
Step 1  
YES  
Step 9  
[ 11 ]  
[ 9 ]  
[ 10 ]  
Does the loop  
pass the loop  
diagnostic test?  
(Procedure 4)  
Is the PBX  
at the  
central  
NO  
YES  
Repair the probelm.  
office?  
YES  
Go to  
Go to  
Go to  
Step 15  
Step 12  
Step 12  
553-AAA2054  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 293 of 504  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 3 of 8)  
[ 12 ]  
Is the impulse  
noise within limits?  
(Procedure 5)  
Go to  
Step 16  
NO  
YES  
[ 13 ]  
Go to  
Step 16  
NO  
Is the background  
noise witin  
limits?  
[ 14 ]  
YES  
YES  
Install digital telephone  
and check performance.  
End of  
procedure.  
[ 15 ]  
Is  
performance  
OK?  
NO  
Go to  
Step 16  
553-AAA2055  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 294 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 4 of 8)  
[ 16 ]  
Is there  
another  
pair available?  
Go to  
Step 18  
NO  
YES  
[ 17 ]  
Is this the  
second time  
around?  
Go to  
Step 1  
NO  
[ 18 ]  
YES  
Collect more detailed  
loop data and calculate  
EPL(Procedure 7)  
[ 19 ]  
Is EPL  
NO  
less than  
12.0 dB?  
Go to  
Step 27  
YES  
Go to  
Step 20  
553-AAA2056  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 295 of 504  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 5 of 8)  
[ 20 ]  
Install digital telephone  
and check performance  
if not already done.  
[ 21 ]  
Is the  
performance  
OK?  
NO  
Go to  
Step 22  
End of  
procedure.  
[ 22 ]  
Are the loop  
diagnostics and  
noise measurements  
already done?  
YES  
Go to  
Step 27  
[ 23 ]  
NO  
Perform loop diagnostics  
and measurements.  
(Procedures 4,5 and 6)  
Go to  
Step 24  
553-AAA2057  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 296 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 6 of 8)  
[ 24 ]  
Are  
impulse  
noise and  
YES  
background noise  
within limits?  
Go to  
Step 27  
NO  
[ 25 ]  
Is the  
problem fixed?  
NO  
Go to  
Step 27  
YES  
[ 26 ]  
Is the  
performance  
OK?  
NO  
Go to  
Step 27  
YES  
End of  
procedure.  
553-AAA2058  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 297 of 504  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 7 of 8)  
[ 27 ]  
Measure the DC loop  
resistance.  
(Procedure 8)  
[ 29 ]  
[ 28 ]  
Is the loop  
resistance less  
than 175 chm?  
NO  
Install new cable.  
[ 30 ]  
YES  
Measure loop insertion  
loss at 256 kHz.  
[ 31 ]  
Is the insertion  
loss less  
NO  
than 12.0 dB?  
Go to  
Step 32  
YES  
Go to  
Step 32  
553-AAA2059  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 298 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Figure 47  
Engineer a telephone line (Part 8 of 8)  
[ 32 ]  
Replace any under-  
carpet cable if  
insertion loss can be  
reduced.  
[ 33 ]  
Install Meridian digital  
telephone and check  
performance.  
[ 34 ]  
Is the  
performance OK?  
Yes  
End of  
procedure  
No  
[ 35 ]  
If the performance is not  
OK, check for problems  
with:  
— electromagnetic  
interference (EMI)  
— unrecorded bridge taps  
— split cable pairs  
— impulse noise (not  
recorded due to speed  
limitations of the pulse  
counter)  
— faulty telephone  
553-AAA0657  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 299 of 504  
Selecting a Loop  
For a Meridian digital telephone, the loop must be without bridge taps, less  
than 175 ohm DC resistance, and less than 12.0 dB loss at 256 kHz. For  
single-gauge 22 and 24 AWG cable, and D inside wiring, the length limit is  
914.4 m (3000 ft). For single-gauge 26 AWG cable, the length limit is  
640.08 m (2100 ft).  
The allowable loop length assumes there is no under-carpet cable. If there is  
under-carpet cable that is a different type than Western Electric (WE) 4-pair  
cable, reduce the allowable loop length by using the following equation:  
LM = [12 – (UC x UL)] /LL  
where:  
LM = loop length limit in km (kft) (excluding the length of the  
under-carpet cable)  
LL = loop loss in dB/km (dB/kft) at 256 kHz  
UC = length of the under-carpet cable in km (kft)  
UL = loss of the under-carpet cable in dB/km (dB/kft) at 256 kHz  
(see Table 43 on page 306 for dB values)  
Calculating DC Loop Resistance  
Use Procedure 46 to calculate the DC loop resistance.  
Procedure 46  
Calculating DC loop resistance  
1
Calculate the DC loop resistance by adding the resistance of each cable  
section. Calculate the resistance of each cable section by using the  
following formula (cable resistances are given in Table 41 on page 300):  
LRi = CRi x SLi  
where:  
LRi = DC resistance for cable section i  
CRi = conductor resistance per unit length for the cable section i  
SLi = length of cable section i  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Page 300 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
2
Add the total of all cable sections. If the total of all sections exceeds  
175 ohm, select another loop.  
Note: The loop resistance limit of 175 ohm must be reduced by 1 ohm for  
each percent of the loop that is aerial cable (see Table 41 on page 300).  
Table 41  
Conductor resistance per unit  
Gauge  
Ohm per loop kft  
Ohm per loop km  
26  
24  
22  
19  
83  
52  
33  
16  
278  
173  
109  
54  
Performing Loop Diagnostic Tests  
The following equipment is required for the loop diagnostic tests in  
Procedure 47 on page 300:  
•
•
one volt-ohmmeter (VOM) for each test  
one 77 cable analyzer or equivalent for each test  
Procedure 47  
Testing foreign voltage  
1
2
Set the VOM range switch to a scale 60 V DC/V AC or greater.  
Connect the VOM test probes to the loop at the line card or distributing  
frame.  
3
Measure the DC and AC voltage between the following points under  
no-load conditions:  
•
•
•
tip (T) and ring (R)  
T and ground (GND)  
R and GND  
Requirement: Voltage readings should be less than 1 V DC/V AC.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 301 of 504  
Procedure 48  
Testing insulation resistance  
1
2
Set the VOM range switch to ohm x 10,000 and adjust the meter to zero.  
Connect the VOM test probes to the loop at the line card or distribution  
frame.  
3
Measure the resistance between the following points under no-load  
conditions:  
•
•
•
T and R  
T and GND  
R and GND  
Requirement: Resistance readings must be greater than 10 M ohm.  
Procedure 49  
Testing DC continuity  
1
2
Short circuit the T and R at the far end.  
Using the VOM, measure the resistance between the T and R.  
Requirement: Resistance measurement should be approximately  
equal to the calculated loop resistance as described in Procedure 46  
on page 299.  
Procedure 50  
Testing capacitance unbalance  
1
Using the cable analyzer, measure the capacitance between the following  
points:  
•
•
T and GND  
R and GND  
Requirement: The difference between the two readings must be  
<0.002 µF>.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page 302 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Measuring Impulse Noise  
Use Procedure 51 on page 302 to measure impulse noise.  
Procedure 51  
Measuring impulse noise  
1
2
Measure impulse noise on selected lines during busy hours. Use an NE–  
58B noise measurement set or the equivalent.  
Note: The termination and weighting filter required are 135 ohm and  
100 kHz, respectively, and the blanking interval is 25 µs.  
Using Figure 48, determine that for a given loop loss and noise threshold  
the impulse noise counts for each 15-minute interval are below the  
corresponding curve.  
Note 1: The values in Figure 48 were derived by assuming that the  
counter has a count rate or 512 pulses per second.  
Note 2: Because of the inaccuracy of the noise-measuring set, additional  
errors can occur during the blanking interval, and the reading  
consequently is lower than the actual measurement.  
Measuring Background Noise  
Use Procedure 52 on page 302 to measure background noise.  
Procedure 52  
Measuring background noise  
1
2
Measure background noise on the loop by using an NE-58B  
noise-measuring set.  
Note: The weighting and termination to be used are 100 kHz flat and 135  
ohm, respectively.  
Reject the loop being tested if the measured background noise is not less  
than 51 dBrn.  
Calculating Expected Pulse Loss  
Use Procedure 53 on page 304 to calculate expected pulse loss.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 303 of 504  
Figure 48  
Maximum allowable impulse noise counts versus loop loss  
10000  
1000  
100  
10  
0
5
10  
15  
Loss in dB  
Note: Impulse noise counter weighting is 100 kHz.  
Termination is 135 ohms.  
553-AAA0658  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 304 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Procedure 53  
Calculating expected pulse loss  
1
2
3
Collect loop makeup data between the line card and the terminal. For  
each cable section, the data required is:  
•
•
•
•
cable type (PIC or pulp)  
gauge  
length  
type of plant construction (underground, aerial, or in-building)  
Calculate individual cable section losses by using the figures in Table 42  
on page 305 through Table 44 on page 306, and the following equation:  
CSLi = SLi x Li  
•
•
•
CSLi = cable section loss for section i  
SLi = section length of section i  
Li = loss per unit length for section i  
Correct individual cable section losses for maximum cable temperature  
by using the following equation:  
TCLi = CSLi x TCFi  
•
•
TCLi = temperature corrected loss for section i  
TCFi = temperature correction factor for section i  
Correction factors:  
•
•
•
aerial cable TCF = 1.1  
underground cable TCF = 1.04  
in-building cable TCF = 1  
4
5
Determine junction loss (see Figure 49).  
Note: Junction loss due to gauge discontinuity of outside plant cables  
and D inside wire varies between 0.03 dB and 0.07 dB and can be  
ignored. However, AMP 25-pair under-carpet wiring has a characteristic  
impedance of 40 ohm at 256 kHz, and its junction loss is approximately  
2 dB. This must be included in the calculation.  
Calculate the expected pulse loss (EPL) by finding the sum of the items.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 305 of 504  
6
Reject loops whose expected pulse loss is greater than 12 dB.  
Example of applying Procedure 53  
Section 1:  
Mainframe bulkhead to DF1 - 500m, 26 AWG PIC, underground  
Section 2:  
DF1 to DF2 - 200m, 26 AWG PIC, inside  
Section 3:  
DF2 to terminal - 24 AWG NT D-inside  
Therefore:  
SL1 = 1.5 km, SL2 = 0.2 km, SL3 = 0.1 km  
From Table 42 on page 305 and Table 43 on page 306:  
L1 = 13.7 dB/km, L2 = 13.7 dB/km, L3 = 13.3 dB/km.  
Using the equation in Step 2, we arrive at the following:  
CSL1 = 6.85 dB, CSL2 = 2.74 dB, and CSL3 = 1.33 dB  
Temperature corrections:  
Using correction factors of TCF1 = 1.04, and TCF2 and TCF3 = 1,  
and using the equation in Step 3 results in TCL1 = 7.12 dB,  
TLC2 = 2.74 dB, and TCL3 = 1.33 dB.  
Expected pulse loss (EPL) value:  
Neglecting any junction loss (see the note in Step 4), Step 5  
results in an EPL value of TSL1 + TSL2 + TSL3 + 0 = 11.19 dB.  
This is under the 12 dB limit and meets the criteria.  
Table 42  
Cable attenuation at 256 kHz and 21.1 degrees C (70 degrees F)  
Cable  
type  
26 AWG  
24 AWG  
22 AWG  
19 AWG  
dB/kft  
dB/km  
13.7  
dB/kft  
dB/km  
10.2  
dB/kft  
dB/km  
8.1  
dB/kft  
dB/km  
5.6  
PIC  
Pulp  
4.2  
4.3  
3.1  
3.5  
2.5  
2.7  
1.7  
2.0  
14.3  
11.4  
9.0  
6.6  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 306 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
Table 43  
Attenuation at 256 kHz for U/C cable  
WE 4-pair  
AMP 25-pair  
dB/kft  
4.6  
dB/km  
15.3  
dB/kft  
19.0  
dB/km  
63.3  
Table 44  
Attenuation at 256 kHz for D inside wiring cable  
NT  
WE  
Superior  
General  
dB/kft  
4.0  
dB/km  
13.3  
dB/kft  
3.2  
dB/km  
10.7  
dB/kft  
3.7  
dB/km  
13.3  
dB/kft  
4.6  
dB/km  
15.3  
Measuring DC Loop Resistance  
Measure DC loop resistance by using standard procedures.  
Note: The DC loop resistance limit of 175 ohm should be reduced by  
1 ohm for each one percent of the total loop that is aerial cable.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Digital telephones line engineering  
Page 307 of 504  
Figure 49  
Junction loss versus cable characteristic impedance  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
120  
140  
160  
180  
Cable characteristic impedance in ohms  
553-AAA0659  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 308 of 504  
Digital telephones line engineering  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
322  
Page 309 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
Designate 500-type telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310  
Designate 2500-type telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312  
Connect the telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312  
Cross-connect the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313  
Cross-connect the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313  
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320  
Introduction  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones are regular telephones not normally  
associated with a business environment, but they are compatible with the  
system. They are configured using LD 10. The 500-type telephones have a  
rotary dial. The 2500-type telephones are the basic push-button models, such  
as the Link and Unity, which do not have feature buttons normally found on  
business telephones.  
Installation and removal  
Follow the steps in Procedure 54 to install an analog (500/2500-type)  
telephone.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 310 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Note: Do not remove the circuit card if any remaining units on the card  
are assigned.  
Procedure 54  
Installing an analog (500/2500-type) telephone  
1
2
Ensure that the wiring is installed at the telephone’s location.  
Unpack and inspect the telephone for damage. Assemble the handset  
and line cords if necessary.  
3
4
5
6
Install the required designations on the telephone.  
Connect the telephone to the TELADAPT connector.  
Cross-connect the telephone wiring at the cross-connect terminal.  
Configure the telephone in the system. Refer to the Software Input/  
Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
End of Procedure  
Follow the steps in Procedure 55 to remove an analog (500/2500-type)  
telephone.  
Procedure 55  
Removing an analog (500/2500-type) telephone  
1
Remove telephone data from the system. Refer to the Software Input/  
Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
2
3
4
Disconnect the telephone from the TELADAPT connector.  
Pack the telephone in a container.  
If necessary, remove the cross-connections for the telephone at the  
cross-connect terminal.  
5
Remove the line circuit card if required. Refer to Circuit Card: Description  
and Installation (553-3001-211).  
End of Procedure  
Designate 500-type telephones  
Follow the steps in Procedure 56 to designate analog 500-type telephones:  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Page 311 of 504  
Procedure 56  
Designating 500-type telephones  
1
2
3
Remove the finger wheel (refer to Procedure 57 on page 311).  
Remove the number card from its envelope.  
Designate the number card with the appropriate directory number and  
station designator.  
4
Insert the number card into the finger wheel (making sure the number  
card is properly oriented).  
5
6
Place the telephone on a flat surface.  
Place the finger wheel over the clamp on the dial, with the “0” hole directly  
over the digit “9,” making sure the finger wheel depressions are properly  
positioned on the prongs of the clamp plate.  
7
Rotate the finger wheel counterclockwise until the clamp spring snaps into  
the notch on the underside of the finger wheel.  
End of Procedure  
Follow the steps in Procedure 57 to remove the finger wheel from 500-type  
telephones.  
Procedure 57  
Removing the finger wheel from  
analog 500-type telephone  
1
2
3
Place the telephone on a flat surface.  
Rotate the finger wheel clockwise as far as possible.  
Insert a paper clip into the small hole between the digits “9” and “0”  
located on the edge of the grooved section of the finger wheel.  
4
5
6
Press down on the releaser to disengage the finger wheel clamp spring.  
Rotate the finger wheel further clockwise until the clamp spring releases.  
Remove the finger wheel when it becomes loose. The dial returns to  
normal position.  
End of Procedure  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 312 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Designate 2500-type telephones  
Follow the steps in Procedure 58 on page 312 to designate 2500-type  
telephones.  
Procedure 58  
Designating analog 2500-type telephone  
1
The designation window is located directly below the dial pad. Insert a  
paper clip into the hole at the left or right end of the designation window.  
2
3
Gently pry the window toward the center and remove.  
Insert number tag with the appropriate directory number and station  
designator, and replace the designation window.  
End of Procedure  
Connect the telephones  
Follow the steps in Procedure 59 to connect analog (500/2500-type)  
telephones.  
Table 45 on page 313 lists the NE-500/2500 telephone connections.  
Procedure 59  
Connecting analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
1
2
Ensure that the terminal connector is compatible with the telephone  
connector.  
Connect the telephone mounting cord.  
TELADAPT cords (NE-625F connector) do not require terminations.  
Insert the plastic connector on the end of the telephone mounting cord  
into the NE-625F-type receptacle.  
3
Connect the mounting cord to an NE-284-74-5001 Amphenol adapter if  
re-using a 16- or 25-pair cable. Plug the adapter into the cable connector.  
Fasten the connector together with the screws provided at the end of each  
connector.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Page 313 of 504  
Table 45  
NE-500/2500 telephone connections  
NE-47QA  
or  
Cable color  
pairs  
Mounting  
cord  
QBBIB block  
designation  
NE-284-74-5001  
designation  
(16 to 25 not  
used)  
Connect  
to TN  
TIP (green)  
RING (red)  
G
R
1T  
1R  
X2  
X1  
W-BL  
BL-W  
TIP  
RING  
GND (yellow)  
BK  
Y
Cross-connect the telephones  
Be sure to connect the telephones as shown in Figure 50 on page 315.  
Figure 50 on page 315 provides the diagram for cross-connecting analog  
(500/2500-type) telephones on an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)  
module.  
Table 46 on page 316, Table 47 on page 317, and Table 48 on page 318 show  
analog (500/2500-type) telephone cross-connections on an Intelligent  
Peripheral Equipment (IPE) module.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 60 to cross-connect analog (500/2500-type)  
telephones.  
Procedure 60  
Cross-connecting the telephones  
1
Locate the telephone terminations at the cross-connect terminal.  
Telephone terminations are located on the vertical side of the frame when  
frame-mounted blocks are used and in the blue field when wall-mounted  
blocks are used.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page 314 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
2
3
Connect Z-type cross-connecting wire to the leads of the telephone. See  
Table 49 on page 319 and Table 50 on page 319.  
Locate the line circuit card (TN) terminations.  
Line circuit card (TN) terminations are located on the horizontal side of the  
distributing frame when frame-mounted blocks are used and in the white  
field when wall-mounted blocks are used.  
4
Run and connect the other end of the cross-connecting wire to the  
assigned TN terminal block.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Page 315 of 504  
Figure 50  
NE-500/2500-type telephone cross-connections for IPE modules  
Cross connect  
terminal  
Color of pair in cable from PE shelf  
to cross connect terminal  
according to location of pack in PE shelf  
Lead  
Cable pairs  
Slots Slots  
1, 4, 2, 5,  
Slots  
3, 6,  
9
designation  
Line in PE  
Pack Shelf  
7, 10  
8
Unit  
0
Unit  
0/8  
T
R
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
Y-O R-BR  
O-Y BR-R  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
T
R
–48V  
GND  
Unit  
8
R-S  
S-R  
Y-G  
G-Y  
O-W  
Unit  
1/9  
Unit  
1
T
R
W-G  
G-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
BK-BL  
BL-BK  
BK-O  
O-BK  
T
R
–48V  
GND  
Unit  
9
S-Y  
Unit  
2/10  
Unit  
2
T
R
W-S  
S-W  
R-BL  
BL-R  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O BK-BR  
O-V BR-BK  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
BK-G  
G-BK  
–48V  
GND  
T
R
Unit  
10  
Unit  
3
Unit  
3/11  
T
R
BK-S  
V-G  
G-V  
V-BR Y-BL  
BR-V BL-Y  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
R-O  
O-R  
R-G  
G-R  
S-BK  
T
R
–48V  
GND  
Unit  
11  
Unit  
4
Unit  
4/12  
T
R
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
S-R  
W-BL Y-O  
BL-W O-Y  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
–48V  
GND  
T
R
Unit  
12  
W-O  
O-W  
Y-G  
G-Y  
Unit  
5/13  
Unit  
5
T
R
BK-BL  
BL-BK  
BK-O  
O-BK  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
S-Y  
W-G  
G-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
–48V  
GND  
T
R
Unit  
13  
T
R
Unit  
6
Unit  
6/14  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
O-V  
BK-G  
G-BK  
BK-BR  
BR-BK  
W-S  
S-W  
R-BL  
BL-R  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
T
R
–48V  
GND  
Unit  
14  
Unit  
7
T
R
Unit  
7/15  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
R-O  
O-R  
V-G  
G-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
To 500/2500 or  
digital telephone  
–48V  
GND  
T
R
Unit  
15  
R-G  
G-R  
see Note  
Quad density line card  
Note:  
This connection applies only to line cards equipped with the Parallel Message Waiting Lamp feature.  
This connects to a second message waiting indication, a lamp bank for example. The maximum  
loop resistance is 2000½.  
553-AAA0590  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 316 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Table 46  
500/2500 line card pair-terminations for IPE module connectors A, E, K, R  
I/O panel connectors  
Unit  
Pair  
Pins  
Pair color  
A
E
K
R
16/card  
1T/1R  
26/1  
W-BL/BL-W  
W-O/O-W  
slot 0  
slot 4  
slot 8  
slot 12  
0
1
2T/2R  
27/2  
3T/3R  
28/3  
W-G/G-W  
2
4T/4R  
29/4  
W-BR/BR-W  
W-S/S-W  
3
5T/5R  
30/5  
4
6T/6R  
31/6  
R-BL/BL-R  
R-O/O-R  
5
7T/7R  
32/7  
6
8T/8R  
33/8  
R-G/G-R  
7
9T/9R  
34/9  
R-BR/BR-R  
R-S/S-R  
8
10T/10R  
11T/11R  
12T/12R  
13T/13R  
14T/14R  
15T/15R  
16T/16R  
35/10  
36/11  
37/12  
38/13  
39/14  
40/15  
41/16  
9
BK-BL/BL-BK  
BK-O/O-BK  
BK-G/G-BK  
BK-BR/BR-BK  
BK-S/S-BK  
Y-BL/BL-Y  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Page 317 of 504  
Table 47  
500/2500 line card pair-terminations for IPE module connectors B, F, L, S  
I/O panel connectors  
Unit  
Pair  
1T/1R  
Pins  
26/1  
Pair color  
B
F
L
S
16/card  
W-BL/BL-W  
W-O/O-W  
W-G/G-W  
W-BR/BR-W  
W-S/S-W  
slot 1  
slot 5  
slot 9  
slot 13  
0
1
2T/2R  
27/2  
3T/3R  
28/3  
2
4T/4R  
29/4  
3
5T/5R  
30/5  
4
6T/6R  
31/6  
R-BL/BL-R  
R-O/O-R  
5
7T/7R  
32/7  
6
8T/8R  
33/8  
R-G/G-R  
7
9T/9R  
34/9  
R-BR/BR-R  
R-S/S-R  
8
10T/10R  
11T/11R  
12T/12R  
13T/13R  
14T/14R  
15T/15R  
16T/16R  
17T/17R  
18T/18R  
19T/19R  
20T/20R  
21T/21R  
22T/22R  
23T/23R  
24T/24R  
25T/25R  
35/10  
36/11  
37/12  
38/13  
39/14  
40/15  
41/16  
42/17  
43/18  
44/19  
45/20  
46/21  
47/22  
48/23  
49/24  
50/25  
9
BK-BL/BL-BK  
BK-O/O-BK  
BK-G/G-BK  
BK-BR/BR-BK  
BK-S/S-BK  
Y-BL/BL-Y  
Y-O/O-Y  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
0
slot 2  
slot 6  
slot 10  
slot 14  
Y-G/G-Y  
1
Y-BR/BR-Y  
Y-S/S-Y  
2
3
V-BL/BL-V  
V-O/O-V  
4
5
V-G/G-V  
6
V-BR/BR-V  
V-S/S-V  
7
Spare  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 318 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Table 48  
500/2500 line card pair-terminations for IPE module connectors C, G, M, T  
I/O panel connectors  
Unit  
Pair  
Pins  
Pair color  
C
G
M
T
16/card  
1T/1R  
26/1  
W-BL/BL-W  
W-O/O-W  
W-G/G-W  
W-BR/BR-W  
W-S/S-W  
slot 2  
slot 6  
slot 10  
slot 14  
8
9
2T/2R  
27/2  
3T/3R  
28/3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
0
4T/4R  
29/4  
5T/5R  
30/5  
6T/6R  
31/6  
R-BL/BL-R  
R-O/O-R  
7T/7R  
32/7  
8T/8R  
33/8  
R-G/G-R  
9T/9R  
34/9  
R-BR/BR-R  
R-S/S-R  
slot 2  
slot 6  
slot 11  
slot 15  
10T/10R  
11T/11R  
12T/12R  
13T/13R  
14T/14R  
15T/15R  
16T/16R  
17T/17R  
18T/18R  
19T/19R  
20T/20R  
21T/21R  
22T/22R  
23T/23R  
24T/24R  
25T/25R  
35/10  
36/11  
37/12  
38/13  
39/14  
40/15  
41/16  
42/17  
43/18  
44/19  
45/20  
46/21  
47/22  
48/23  
49/24  
50/25  
1
BK-BL/BL-BK  
BK-O/O-BK  
BK-G/G-BK  
BK-BR/BR-BK  
BK-S/S-BK  
Y-BL/BL-Y  
Y-O/O-Y  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y-G/G-Y  
9
Y-BR/BR-Y  
Y-S/S-Y  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Spare  
V-BL/BL-V  
V-O/O-V  
V-G/G-V  
V-BR/BR-V  
V-S/S-V  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Page 319 of 504  
Table 49  
Z-type cross-connecting wire  
Size  
Gauge  
Color  
Designation  
1 pr  
22  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
Tip  
Ring  
3 pr  
24  
Voice T  
Voice R  
Signal T  
Signal R  
Power  
Power  
Table 50  
Inside wiring colors  
Inside wiring colors  
Connect to  
Z station wire  
16/25-pair cable  
W-BL  
equipment TN  
G
R
First pair Tip  
BL-W  
First pair Ring  
BK  
W-O  
Second pair Tip  
Y
O-W  
Second pair Ring  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 320 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Operation  
Although analog (500/2500-type) telephones do not have feature keys, you  
can access various system features using Special Prefix (SPRE) codes. SPRE  
codes are also useful for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to access features  
without using feature keys. Dial the SPRE code (unique to each customer  
within the system) and then the feature code that applies to the operation you  
desire.  
Table 51 lists the feature codes available using SPRE.  
Table 51  
Feature codes used with SPRE (Part 1 of 2)  
Dial SPRE +  
Operation performed  
1
2
3
4
Ring Again  
Cancel Ring Again  
Ringing Number, Call Pickup  
TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any  
Station)  
5
6
Charge Account for CDR  
Authorization Code Access  
Trunk Verification From Station  
70 + ACOD + mmm (Trunk Route  
Access Code and Member)  
71 + DN  
72 + DN  
73  
Call Park, To Park  
Call Park, To Retrieve  
System Speed Call, To Use  
74  
Call Forward activate or cancel  
(500-type telephones)  
75 + Entry Access Code + DN  
(500-type telephones)  
Speed Call, Individual To Program  
Entry  
76 + Entry Access Code  
(500-type telephones)  
Speed Call, Individual To Use Entry  
77  
Permanent Hold  
(500-type telephones)  
78  
79  
Stored Number Redial, To Store  
Stored Number Redial, To Redial  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Page 321 of 504  
Table 51  
Feature codes used with SPRE (Part 2 of 2)  
Dial SPRE +  
Operation performed  
Automatic Set Relocation  
81  
83  
Malicious Call Trace  
Integrated Messaging System  
Room Status  
84  
86 + x (status)  
86 + 1  
86 + 2  
86 + 3  
86 + 4  
86 + 5  
86 + 6  
86 + 7  
87  
Cleaning Request  
Cleaning In Progress  
Room Cleaned  
Passed Inspection  
Failed Inspection  
Cleaning Skipped  
Not For Sale  
Disconnect Trunk,  
Conference 6 (analog (500/2500  
type) telephones)  
89  
91  
Last Number Redial  
Access to maintenance programs by  
Maintenance Telephone  
92  
Terminal Diagnostics, telephones  
and attendant consoles  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
Conference Circuit Testing  
Ringing Number, Group Pickup  
Ringing Number, DN Pickup  
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Unassigned Automatic Call  
Distribution (ACD) analog (500/2500  
type) telephone  
Log in/out  
98  
Unassigned ACD analog (500/2500  
type) telephone Activate/deactivate  
Not Ready  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 322 of 504  
Analog (500/2500-type) telephones  
Table 1  
2500-type telephone features (no SPRE code used)  
# + 1 + DN  
Call Forward  
# + 2 + Speed Call code + DN  
# + 2 + Speed Call code + *  
# + 3 + Speed Call code  
# + 4  
Speed Call, Individual, To Program Entry  
Speed Call, Individual, To Erase Entry  
Speed Call, Individual, To Use Entry  
Permanent Hold  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
354  
Page 323 of 504  
Appendix A: Meridian Modular  
Telephones  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324  
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325  
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325  
Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330  
Volume control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331  
Message Waiting lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331  
Handsfree/Mute key (M2008HF & M2616 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332  
Features and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334  
Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335  
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335  
Program key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336  
External Alerter Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336  
Key Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337  
Brandline Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338  
Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338  
Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342  
Environmental and safety considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342  
Line engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343  
Local alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 324 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345  
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352  
Handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353  
Note: This section is for reference only. The Meridian Modular  
Telephones are manufacture discontinued and no longer available.  
Introduction  
This chapter provides feature, add-on module, relocation, and specification  
information for the M2006, M2008, M2008HF, M2616, and M2216ACD  
Meridian Modular Telephones.  
The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost-effective  
integrated voice and data communication capability. They interface with the  
Digital Line Card (DLC). No additional hardware is required at the line  
circuit to provide data communication.  
Meridian Modular Telephones are connected to the system through a  
two-wire loop carrying two independent 64 Kb/s PCM Channels with  
associated signaling channels. One of the two PCM channels is dedicated to  
voice while the other is dedicated to data traffic. Line cords and handset cords  
on all Meridian Modular Telephones are equipped with snap-in TELADAPT  
connectors for easy and quick connecting procedures.  
Three distinct versions of Meridian Modular telephones, distinguished by the  
first four letters in the upper left-hand corner of the model identification label  
on the bottom of the telephone, are available. The three versions are the  
“NTZK” models, the “NT2K” models with date code prior to April 24, 1998,  
and both the “NT9K” models and the “NT2K” models with date code of April  
24, 1998 and later. The two jacks face in the same direction on “NT2K” and  
“NT9K” telephones, and in opposite directions on “NTZK” telephones.  
When appropriate, differences between the models are noted in this  
document.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 325 of 504  
Software requirements  
The option number for the Meridian Modular Telephones is 170. The  
mnemonic is ARIE. The DSET package (88) and the TSET package (89) are  
required.  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment requirements  
The telephones interface with the DLC. The DLC supports eight Integrated  
Voice and Data ports; each port supports one data and one voice channel. A  
voice TN and a data TN are assigned in the software.  
General description  
This section describes the various features and capabilities of the following  
Meridian Modular Telephones.  
M2006 — A single line telephone with 6 programmable function keys.  
See Figure 51 on page 326.  
M2008/M2008HF — A multi-line telephone with 8 programmable function  
keys. The M2008HF contains an integrated Handsfree unit. See Figure 52 on  
page 327.  
M2616 — A high performance multi-line telephone with 16 programmable  
function keys and integrated Handsfree unit. See Figure 53 on page 328.  
M2216ACD-1 — A multi-line telephone for ACD operations. It has 15  
programmable function keys, a special ACD Display Module and two RJ-32  
jacks for modular electret headsets. See Figure 56 on page 339.  
M2216ACD-2 — A multi-line telephone for ACD operations. It has 15  
programmable function keys, and a special ACD Display. It is similar to  
model 1, but with one PJ-327 jack for a carbon agent headset and one RJ-32  
jack for an electret supervisor headset. See Figure 56 on page 339.  
Note: If a headset is desired for the M2216ACD sets, the amplified type  
is strongly recommended.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Page 326 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Figure 51  
M2006 modular telephone  
Switchook  
Brandline insert  
Speaker  
•
•
•
Message Waiting  
lamp  
•
Rls key  
Hold key  
•
•
•
Function keys  
and LCDs  
DN  
•
•
Volume  
control  
553-AAA0726  
Dimensions:  
Length: 8.42 in. (216 mm)  
Width: 8.42 in. (216 mm)  
Height: 3.61 in. (92.6 mm)  
Weight: approximately 2.65 lbs (1.1 kg)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 327 of 504  
Figure 52  
M2008/M2008HF modular telephone  
Filler plate  
Brandline insert  
Speaker  
Switchook  
Message Waiting  
lamp  
Rls key  
Hold Key  
Function keys  
and LCDs  
Volume  
control  
Prime DN  
553-AAA0727  
Dimensions:  
Length: 8.42 in. (216 mm)  
Width: 8.42 in. (216 mm)  
Height: 3.61 in. (92.6 mm)  
Weight: approximately 2.65 lbs (1.1 kg)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 328 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Figure 53  
M2616 modular telephone  
Filler plate  
Brandline  
insert  
Speaker  
Switchook  
Message waiting  
lamp  
Rls key  
Hold key  
16 Function keys  
with 8 LCDs  
Volume control  
Prime DN  
553-AAA1647.EPS  
Dimensions:  
Length: 9.75 in. (251 mm)  
Width: 9.45 in. (237 mm)  
Height: 3.64 in. (92.6 mm)  
Weight: approximately 2.65 lbs (1.1 kg)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 329 of 504  
Figure 54  
M2216ACD-1 and -2 modular telephones  
553-AAA0742  
Dimensions:  
Length: 9.75 in. (251 mm)  
Width: 9.45 in. (237 mm)  
Height: 3.64 in. (92.6 mm)  
Weight: approximately 2.65 lbs (1.1 kg)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 330 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Physical description  
All of the Meridian Modular Telephones are equipped with:  
Hold key  
Release key  
•
•
•
•
•
Volume control  
Message Waiting lamp  
Speaker  
Each modular telephone also has a number of programmable keys with LCD  
indicators that can be assigned to any combination of directory numbers and  
features (only one DN for the M2006). The lower right-hand key (key 0) is  
reserved for the Primary DN.  
When equipped with a Display module or MCA, key 07 is automatically  
assigned as the Program key and cannot be changed. Key 05 becomes the  
Program key on the M2006, if equipped with MCA.  
The M2006 is a single line telephone and accepts only one DN. The  
remaining five key/lamp pairs can be assigned any feature that is not  
considered a DN, such as Transfer, Call Forward, or Conference. Features  
that cannot be assigned are those that are considered DNs: Voice Call and  
2-way Hotline, for example. Attempting to assign more than one DN to the  
M2006 causes the telephone to disables itself and all LCDs light steadily. It  
will return to its normal operating state when service change removes all  
secondary DNs.  
LCD indicators support 4 key/LCD states:  
Function  
idle  
LCD state  
off  
active  
ringing  
hold  
on (steady)  
flash (60 Hz)  
fast flash (120 Hz)  
* An indicator fast flashes when a feature key is pressed but the  
procedure necessary to activate the feature has not been completed.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 331 of 504  
Volume control  
One key with two toggle positions controls volume. Pressing the right  
“volume up” or left “volume down” side of the key incrementally increases  
or decreases the volume for the tone or sound which is currently active. The  
volume settings are retained for subsequent calls until new volume  
adjustments are made. If the telephone is equipped with a Display Module,  
volume can be adjusted at any time with the setting displayed on the screen  
(in Program mode).  
Note: All Meridian Modular Telephones manufactured after June 1996  
are compliant with the HAC volume-level requirements issued by the  
FCC for handset volume control for the hearing impaired. The highest  
volume-level setting provides 13.5 dB over nominal.  
Handset volumes can be configured to return to nominal on a per-call basis.  
You can adjust the volume of the following tones, while they are audible:  
•
•
•
•
•
ringing  
handsfree (M2616)  
handset/headset  
buzz  
on-hook dialing  
When the telephone is disconnected, all volume levels will return to default  
values upon reconnection.  
When the telephone is operating on loop power alone, the highest (eighth)  
step in volume cannot be reached (as seen when using Display in Program  
mode).  
Message Waiting lamp  
Each Meridian Modular Telephone has a red triangle in the upper right-hand  
corner that lights brightly to indicate a message is waiting. This LED is the  
primary message waiting indicator and lets you know a message is waiting  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 332 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
regardless of whether the telephone has a message waiting key/lamp pair.  
You must have Message Waiting CCOS configured.  
If you do assign a message waiting key/lamp pair, there will be two  
indications of a message waiting:  
•
•
the red Message Waiting triangle lights, and  
the LCD associated with the Message Waiting key flashes.  
You may assign an Autodial key that dials the message center (or voice mail  
system) to avoid the double indication, or have no key/lamp pair assigned to  
the message center.  
Handsfree/Mute key (M2008HF & M2616 only)  
Handsfree (if software assigned), allows the user to talk to another party  
without lifting the handset. Activate Handsfree by depressing the Handsfree/  
Mute key (key 15, top left) or by selecting a DN without lifting the handset.  
Once Handsfree is activated, it can be deactivated by picking up the handset  
or by ending the call using the Release (Rls) key. If Handsfree is not software  
assigned, you can assign any other feature to key 15.  
When the Handsfree/Mute key is pressed during a Handsfree call, the  
microphone is deactivated while the speaker remains active, preventing the  
other party from overhearing local conversations. The Handsfree LCD  
indicator flashes while the microphone is muted. Pressing the Handsfree/  
mute key again reactivates the microphone and the Handsfree LCD lights  
steadily.  
The Class of Service feature for M2616 Handsfree control enables system  
administrators to enable/disable the Handsfree option on the M2008HF  
(Handsfree) telephone through software. M2008HF telephones ship from the  
factory with a hardware jumper enabled to enable the Handsfree option for  
existing software releases.  
System software overrides the hardware setting and default to Handsfree  
Denied (HFD.) If the handsfree option is desired, the system administrator  
simply enables Handsfree through the Class of Service prompt HFA included  
in LD 11 for the M2008 telephones (consistent with M2616).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Service Change Parameters  
LD 11 – Allow/Deny Handsfree for M2008HF  
Page 333 of 504  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
CLS  
NEW CHG  
M2008  
M2008 telephone  
(HFD)  
HFA  
Digital Telephone Handsfree Denied  
Digital Telephone Handsfree Allowed  
Handsfree operates as if an off-hook operation had been performed. For  
example, when the telephone is idle, pressing the Handsfree/Mute key turns  
on the Handsfree and selects a DN (depending on line selection as assigned  
through COS), enabling the user to make a call. When a call comes in to an  
M2008HF/M2616 and the set is ringing, pressing the Handsfree/Mute key  
turns on the Handsfree and enables the user to answer the incoming call  
(depending on COS-assigned line selection) without picking up the handset.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 334 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Features and options  
Table 52 lists the distinctive characteristics of each Meridian Modular  
Telephone and shows the optional hardware you can add to each.  
Table 52  
Hardware features and options  
M2008/  
2008HF  
M2216  
ACD-1  
M2216  
ACD-2  
M2006  
M2616  
6
8
16  
16  
16  
Programmable keys  
Handsfree microphone  
Optional hardware:  
Display  
standard  
x
x
x
x
standard  
standard  
x
x
x
x
Key Expansion Module  
x
x
x
x
Meridian Communications  
Adapter (MCA)  
x
x
x
Meridian Programmable Data  
Adapter (MPDA)  
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
External alerter interface  
Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA)  
Brandline insert  
Note 1: In this table, x indicates available features for the set type listed along the top row.  
Note 2: If the set is equipped with a Display, Meridian Programmable Data Adapter, or Meridian  
Communications Adapter, the number of programmable keys is reduced by one, as key 07 (key  
05 on M2006) automatically becomes the Program key.  
The optional hardware for Meridian Modular Telephones is described below.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 335 of 504  
Display Module  
A 2-line by 24-character Display Module provides system prompts, feedback  
on active features and valuable calling party information. In addition, you can  
modify various set features such as volume and screen contrast using the  
Program key (top right function key). You can enable a Call Timer which  
times calls made or received on the prime DN.  
Note: The Display Module is not supported on M2006.  
Note: The Display Module requires a Power Supply Board on M2008.  
Two types of Display Module are available:  
•
North American Display — Supports normal business features in two  
languages, English and Quebec French.  
•
Special Applications Display — Supports the following features:  
— Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
— Hospitality  
— 6 languages (English, Quebec French, Parisian French, German,  
Spanish, Dutch)  
A Special Applications Display Module comes as standard equipment on the  
M2216ACD telephones. M2008 or M2616 telephones used as ACD  
telephones require the Special Applications Display.  
Note: It is possible to adjust the Display screen contrast so that it is too  
light or too dark to read. If you cannot read the Display, disconnect and  
then reconnect the line cord to return to the default settings.  
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter  
The Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) mounts within the  
telephone (see Figure 57 on page 340) and allows asynchronous ASCII  
terminals, personal computers and printers to be connected to the telephone  
using an RS-232-D (subminiature) interface. The MPDA has multilingual  
capability.  
It requires additional power. See “Power requirements” on page 345.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 336 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
For more information, see “Meridian Programmable Data Adapter” on  
page 352.  
Program key  
The Program key is automatically assigned to Meridian Modular Telephones  
with Display or MPDA added. It allows you to change a variety of display  
features such as screen format, contrast and language. It also lets you change  
data parameters such as transmission speed and parity.  
The upper right-hand key (key 05 on M2006, key 07 on all others)  
automatically becomes the Program key when Display, MCA, or MPDA is  
configured with the telephone. The Program key is local to the set and shows  
blank when you print key assignments in LD 20.  
See Appendix C: “Meridian Modular Telephones  
add-on modules installation” on page 371 for descriptions of MCA, MPDA,  
and ATA and their requirements.  
External Alerter Interface  
The External Alerter Board provides an interface to standard remote ringing  
devices, such as a ringing unit installed in a location separate from the  
telephone. The Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface (MEARI)  
is not the remote ringer itself, but provides access to standard, off-the-shelf  
remote ringing devices. The Alerter Board requires additional power (see  
“Power requirements” on page 345).  
You can program the MEARI to activate a ringer (or light) when the  
telephone rings or when the telephone is in use (off-hook). A call to any DN  
configured on the telephone triggers the alerter. The MEARI alerts to one  
active call at a time; if the telephone is already active on a call, a second call  
will not activate MEARI.  
For more information on installing and setting up MEARI, see “External  
Alerter Board” on page 416.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 337 of 504  
Key Expansion Module  
A modular 22-key unit can be attached to any 16-key Meridian Modular  
Telephone except 2016S. See Figure 55. The extra keys can be assigned to  
any combination of lines and features. You can add up to two expansion  
modules to a single telephone, providing a total of 60 line/feature keys. You  
will need a separate footstand for the module(s), one for a single module, one  
for a double. The expansion module requires additional power. See “Power  
requirements” on page 345.  
The Key Expansion Module connects to the telephone through a ribbon cable  
running from the base of the telephone. It is physically connected to the  
telephone by the footstand. NT2K22VH or later vintage key lamp modules  
are required for CISPR22, Class B compliance.  
Figure 55  
M2616 with Display Module and Key Expansion Module  
553-AAA0730  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 338 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Brandline Insert  
The filler plate on the telephone or Display Module contains a removable  
insert designed to accommodate custom labeling. You can order blank  
Brandline Inserts and have a printer silk screen your company logo on them.  
Brandline Inserts snap easily into and out of the filler plate.  
Headset  
The M2216ACD-1 is compatible with most headsets. Amplified headsets are  
strongly recommended. The headset/handset interface of the M2216ACD-1  
can be adjusted for optimum performance using the Program key. Three  
settings are available:  
•
•
•
Plantronics Polaris  
GN Netcom Profile  
NT Liberation  
Try using the headset with each of the three settings to determine which  
works best. Trial with both internal and external calls is also recommended to  
determine optimum performance.  
When the amplified headset is used, two choices for volume control are  
available:  
•
•
the rocker control on the telephone  
the switch on the headset  
The settings which provide the clearest communication with the least amount  
of distortion are the amplifier setting higher than the telephone volume  
control.  
The supervisor and agent jacks are not interchangeable. A headset must be  
plugged into the agent jack if the telephone is to receive ACD calls.  
The M2216ACD-2 agent jack is compatible with any standard carbon  
headset. The headset interface of the M2216ACD-2 is not adjustable.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 339 of 504  
Any recording device connected to the receive path of a Meridian Modular  
Telephone must meet these requirements:  
•
•
•
load impedance at least 8K ohms across the audio band  
connect in parallel across pins 3 and 4 of the handset/headset jack  
isolate power source from the headset/handset jack  
Figure 56  
M2216ACD-1 and -2 left side showing headset jacks  
electret supervisor  
headset jack  
electret supervisor  
headset jack  
carbon agent  
headset jack  
electret agent  
headset jack  
M2216ACD-1 (left side)  
M2216ACD-2 (left side)  
553-AAA07  
M2006/M2008/M2008HF/M2616/M2216ACD telephones  
You can use an electret headset in the handset port of the M2006, M2008,  
M2008HF, M2616, and M2216ACD telephones. Choose an amplified  
headset that draws power from a battery or AC transformer (power is not  
provided by the telephone). The amplifier must draw less than 400 micro  
amps from the telephone jack.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 340 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
The headset should be designed to work with a telephone jack with these  
characteristics:  
•
Transmit interface: +5 V through 10K DC bias resistance with maximum  
current of 500 micro amps. The differential input impedance is 10K  
ohms. Connects to pins 2 and 5 of the handset jack.  
•
Receive interface: single ended output with output impedance of 180  
ohms. Connects to pins 3 and 4 of the handset jack.  
Figure 57  
Back of telephone showing Meridian Programmable Data Adapter  
Flashing  
LED  
RS-232  
interface  
553-1897  
Relocation  
This section describes how to relocate a Meridian Modular Telephone and its  
associated dataport Terminal Number (TN) without the intervention of a  
technician.  
Modular Telephone Relocation is designed specifically for the Meridian  
Modular Telephones and is an enhancement to Automatic Set Relocation. If  
dataport TN information exists for the terminal, it is automatically relocated  
when the telephone is relocated.  
When a telephone is relocated-out, a relocation block is built to store the  
relocation information in the protected data area. The relocation block  
includes the old TN, the terminal ID information, the serial number of the  
telephone, and other information.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 341 of 504  
This feature uses the unique serial number and terminal ID of the Meridian  
Modular Telephone to identify the terminal being relocated and to reduce the  
number of manual steps needed for relocation.  
See Automatic Set Relocation in Features and Services (553-3001-306) for  
complete details.  
How to relocate a Meridian Modular Telephone  
1
2
3
Go off-hook, receive dial tone, and enter Relocation Code (either SPRE  
+81 or Flexible Feature Code).  
Enter optional security code as defined in LD 15 (a burst of tone confirms  
that the telephone is relocated-out).  
Take the telephone to the new location and plug it in (a confirmation buzz  
from the speaker indicates the telephone is in service).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 342 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Specifications  
The following specifications govern the performance of the Meridian  
Modular Telephones under the environmental conditions described.  
Environmental and safety considerations  
All digital telephones and their associated options meet the requirements of  
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) specification PN-1361.  
Temperature and humidity  
Operating state:  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
0° to 50° C (32° to 104° F)  
5% to 95% (non-condensing). At  
temperatures above 34°C (93°F) relative  
humidity is limited to 53 mbar of water vapor  
pressure.  
Storage:  
Temperature range  
-50° to 70° C (-58° to 158° F)  
Relative humidity  
5% to 95% (non-condensing). At  
temperatures above 34°C (93°F) relative  
humidity is limited to 53 mbar of water vapor  
pressure.  
Electromagnetic interference  
The radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference meets the  
requirements of Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules for class A computing  
devices.  
NT2K model sets with all options meet CISPR22, Class B requirements.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 343 of 504  
Line engineering  
Meridian Modular Telephones use twisted-pair wiring on transmission lines  
selected by the rules given in “Digital telephones line engineering” on  
page 289 &c. The maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft. (915 m),  
assuming 24 AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge taps. A  
15.5 dB loss at 256 KHz defines the loop length limit (longer lengths are  
possible, depending on the wire's gauge and insulation). The Meridian  
Modular Telephones use a 6-conductor line cord (A0346862).  
Table 53 gives detailed information on loop lengths.  
Table 53  
Loop lengths for digital telephones  
NT8D02  
PVC insulated cable (polyvinyl chloride)  
22 or 24 AWG  
0–3500 ft.  
(0–1067 m)  
26 AWG  
0–2600 ft.  
(0–793 m)  
Note 1: No bridge taps or loading coils are allowed.  
Note 2: Effect of line protector at MDF reduces loop length by 500 ft.  
CAUTION  
Damage to Equipment  
Service Interruption  
Use only the line cord provided with Meridian  
Modular Telephones. Using a cord designed for other  
digital telephones could result in damage to the cord  
or a loss of set functionality.  
Figure 58 on page 344 shows a simplified block diagram of the Meridian  
Modular Telephone, MPDA and DLC.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 344 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Figure 58  
Block diagram of MPDA and Meridian Modular Telephone  
Communications adapter  
Telephone  
CS 1000  
/ Meridian 1  
EIA  
drivers  
MDAD  
MTAC  
I
RS-232-C  
DTE I/F  
S
D
L
D
uP  
or  
L
C
Receivers  
A64  
+5V  
A44  
C
+12V  
Power Supply  
-12V  
+5V  
uP  
Power supply  
option card  
553-AAA2135  
Local alerting tones  
Each telephone provides four alerting tones and a buzz sound. The system  
controls the ringing cadence by sending tone-ON and tone-OFF messages to  
the telephone. The alerting tone cadences cannot be changed from the  
telephone, but can be altered for individual Meridian Modular Telephones by  
software controlled adjustments in the system. See Software Input/Output:  
Administration (553-3001-311).  
All other telephony tones, such as dial tone or overflow, are provided by the  
system from a Tone and Digit Switch.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 345 of 504  
Alerting tone characteristics  
The tone frequency combinations are as follows:  
Tone  
Frequencies  
Warble Rate (Hz)  
1
2
667 Hz, 500 Hz  
667 Hz, 500 Hz  
10.4  
2.6  
M2006/M2008/M2008HF:  
3
4
1600 Hz, 2000 Hz  
1600 Hz, 2000 Hz  
10.4  
2.6  
M2616/M2216ACD:  
3
4
333 Hz, 250 Hz  
333 Hz, 250 Hz  
10.4  
2.6  
A 500 Hz buzz signal is provided for incoming call notification while the  
receiver is off-hook.  
Power requirements  
The M2006, M2008, M2616 (basic configuration and with Display Module)  
and M2216ACD-1 are loop powered. Loop power consists of a -30 V AC  
power source and assumes a 3500 ft. (915 m) maximum loop length of 24  
AWG wire and a minimum 15.5 V AC at the telephone terminals.  
Note: The loop length limit is defined by a 15.5 dB loss at 256 KHz.  
Longer lengths can be determined using the wire's gauge and insulation.  
The Handsfree feature, which is integrated into the M2616, requires no  
additional power.  
Some configurations of telephones and options need more than basic loop  
power to operate. Table 54 lists the Meridian Modular Telephones and shows  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 346 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
when additional power is needed to operate the telephone or its optional  
hardware. Power Supply Boards come installed in factory-assembled  
configurations which require additional power.  
Note 1: If a power failure occurs, configurations that require loop power  
will only continue to work if the system has battery backup. Only those  
options which require additional power will cease to function.  
Note 2: During a power failure, the carbon agent headset on the  
M2216ACD-2 will fail and the electret supervisor's jack can be used as  
an agent jack. If no headset was plugged in to the electret jack at this  
time, the call is dropped, the agent logged off and must log in again once  
the electret headset is plugged in. When power is restored, the carbon  
jack returns automatically.  
Table 54  
Power requirements  
Additional power  
Telephone type  
Loop power  
(Power Supply Board)  
M2006  
Basic configuration  
Basic configuration  
Any option(s)*  
M2008/2008HF  
M2616  
Any option(s)  
Basic configuration (with  
Handsfree) and Display  
Programmable Data Adapter  
Key Expansion Module  
External alerter interface  
Any option(s)  
M2216ACD-1  
M2216ACD-2  
Basic configuration (with Display)  
No  
All configurations  
*No display can be added to the M2006 set.  
Power Supply Board  
The power supply option consists of a Power Supply Board which mounts  
inside the telephone, coupled with an external wall-mount transformer or  
closet power supply which provides power to the Power Supply Board. The  
Power Supply Board receives its power through pins 1 and 6 of the line cord.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 347 of 504  
When installing an MCA or MPDA to NTZK or NT2K phone sets with a date  
code prior to January 1998, a Power Option board is required, along with an  
additional power source. When installing an MCA in an NT9K phone set or  
an NT2K with date code of January 1998, install only the MCA (an additional  
Power Option board and Jumper board are not required).  
The Power Supply Board connects to the telephone through a 14 pin bottom  
entry connector.  
The Power Supply Board comes factory installed with any configuration of  
the M2216ACD-2. The M2006 and M2008 require the Power Supply Board  
with the addition of any option. The M2616 requires the Power Supply Board  
with any option except the Display Module.  
Refer to Figure 55 on page 347 and Figure 56 on page 348 for power supply  
board requirements.  
Table 55  
NT2K model Power requirements, Meridian Modular Telephone sets  
Additional power  
(Power Supply Board and  
Transformer)  
Telephone type  
Loop power  
M2006  
Basic configuration  
Any option(s)* (MPDA, External  
Alerter Interface, MCA)  
M2008/M2008HF  
M2616  
Basic and Display configurations  
MPDA, External Alerter Interface  
Basic, Display, and Handsfree  
configurations and Key Expansion  
Module(s)  
MCA, MPDA, External Alerter  
Interface, MCA  
M2216ACD  
Basic configurations (with Display)  
Key Expansion Module(s).  
MPDA, Key Expansion Module,  
External Alerter Interface, MCA  
*No display can be added to the M2006 set.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 348 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Table 56  
NTZK model Power requirements, Meridian Modular Telephone sets  
Additional power  
Telephone type  
Loop power  
(Power Supply Board)  
M2006  
Basic configuration  
MPDA, External Alerter Interface,  
MCA (optional),  
M2008  
M2616  
Basic configuration  
Any option(s)  
Basic configuration (with Handsfree)  
and Display.  
MPDA, Key Expansion Module,  
External Alerter Interface, MCA  
(optional)  
M2216ACD-1  
M2216ACD-2  
Basic configuration (with Display)  
MPDA, Key Expansion Module,  
External Alerter Interface, MCA  
(optional)  
N/A  
Any configuration  
Local plug-in transformer  
A single winding transformer equipped with a 10 ft. (3 m) cord of 22 AWG  
two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular RJ-11 duplex  
adapter (refer to Figure 59 on page 349) can provide the additional power  
needed to operate the telephone and its options.  
WARNING  
Do not plug any equipment (computer, modem, LAN  
card) other than the Meridian Modular Telephone into  
the RJ-11 transformer adapter, as damage to equipment  
may result.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 349 of 504  
Figure 59  
Configuration of local plug-in transformer  
553-AAA0725  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 350 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
120 V transformer (AO367335 or equivalent)  
The following minimum specifications must be met by this transformer:  
Input voltage  
120 V AC/60 Hz  
No load output voltage  
Voltage at rated current  
29 V AC maximum  
26.7 V AC  
minimum  
Rated load current  
700 mA  
240 V transformer (AO367914 or equivalent)  
The following minimum specifications must be met by this transformer:  
Input voltage  
240 V AC/50 Hz  
No load output voltage  
Voltage at rated current  
29 V AC maximum  
26.7 V AC  
minimum  
Rated load current  
700 mA  
Note 1: The telephone cannot be wall-mounted over the wall jack when  
using a transformer, because of the size of the RJ-11 adapter. Hang the  
telephone above or to the side of the jack and run the line and power  
cords to it.  
Note 2: The above-mentioned transformers can also be used with outlets  
identified as 110V or 220V.  
Closet power supply  
Closet power can be obtained from an AC transformer for loops of 100 ft.  
(30 m) or less, or a DC transformer for loop lengths of 650 ft. (197 m) or less.  
An equivalent power source can be used but must maintain isolation of  
outputs to the terminal. Refer to Figure 60 on page 351.  
WARNING  
When using closet power, do not plug the TELADAPT  
connector into any equipment (computer, modem, LAN  
card) other than the Meridian Modular Telephone, as  
damage to equipment may result.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 351 of 504  
Note 1: All terminals must be isolated from the input winding and each  
terminal must be isolated from all other terminal windings. A separate  
winding is required for each terminal, and grounds should not be  
connected.  
Note 2: The QUT1 closet power supply source is not compatible with  
Meridian Modular Telephones.  
The AC source should be rated at 29 V AC, 700 mA isolated. The DC source  
should be rated at 42 V DC, 300 mA isolated, with current limiting output of  
1 amp.  
Figure 60  
Closet power supply configuration  
3
Tip (r)  
2
To IDF  
1
Ring (g)  
4
5
6
6-conductor  
line cord  
from telephone  
W
BL  
Connects to an  
isolated output  
Closet Power Supply  
(Shumway SBI 221-25 or equivalent)  
553-AAA0724  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 352 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter  
When a Meridian Modular Telephone is equipped with the Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA), you can make a data call using  
keyboard dialing from your attached terminal. You can carry on voice and  
data communication simultaneously without causing any mutual interference.  
The MPDA communicates with Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) having  
characteristics as shown in Table 57:  
Table 57  
MPDA data characteristics  
Data type  
ASCII  
Synchronization  
Number of Bits  
Parity  
Asynchronous, Start-Stop  
8 bits  
none (unchecked)  
Data rate  
110, 150, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,  
9600, 19200 bits per second (autobaud)  
Stop bits  
2 bits for 110 bits per second;  
1 bit for all other speeds  
Transmission  
Full duplex  
Note: The MPDA configuration of data parameters is stored locally  
(although you can set the configuration in the Cabinet system system).  
You cannot set the data parameters in the system before installing the  
MPDA in the telephone (the configuration information will be lost).  
The keyboard dialing routine may vary with the data equipment being used  
and reference to the user's data terminal manual may be necessary. For more  
detailed information, see Meridian Communications Unit User Guide and  
Meridian Communications Adapter Reference Guide.  
The MPDA can establish either data calls or voice calls. You can make data  
calls using keyboard dialing, keypad dialing or the AT command dialing  
feature. The AT dialing features lets you originate data calls to local and  
remote Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) directly from a data terminal  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Page 353 of 504  
keyboard or personal computer. You can make voice calls using AT dialing  
from your terminal.  
Users of personal computers already equipped with a Hayes Smartmodem or  
users who have a stand-alone Hayes Smartmodem can substitute the MPDA  
for data integration. The Hayes dialing feature, when used with third party  
communication software and the digital telephone, will support most of the  
Hayes Smartmodem features. Third party terminal emulation packages can  
also be used with Hayes dialing.  
Features supported by the MPDA include:  
•
enhanced Hayes commands, including upper- and lower case dialing,  
voice call origination through AT dialing, hang up data call, and on-line  
disconnect of voice call  
•
•
script file capabilities allow you to program multiple data resources for  
automatic resource access  
Voice Call Origination (VCO)  
Handsets  
This section provides information on Meridian Modular Telephone handsets.  
Table 58  
Codes for handsets for Meridian Modular Telephone sets, model NTZK  
Description  
Order Code  
Legacy handset, Black  
Legacy handset, Ash  
Legacy handset, Gray  
NT0C09EA03  
NT0C09EA35  
NT0C09EA93  
Note: Handsets designed for NT2K sets (Global handset) do not meet  
product transmission/reception specifications if used with NTZK sets.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 354 of 504 Appendix A: Meridian Modular Telephones  
Table 59  
Codes for handsets for Meridian Modular Telephone sets, model NT2K  
Description  
Order Code  
Global handset, Black  
Global handset, Ash  
Global handset, Gray  
NT0C09EK03 / A0400786  
NT0C09EK35 / A0400787  
NT0C09EK93 / A0400790  
Note 1: Handsets designed for NTZK sets (Legacy handset) do not meet  
product transmission/reception specifications if used with NT2K sets.  
Note 2: Noisy Location, Push-to-Talk, Push-to-Mute, and Mercury Switch  
handsets do not meet product transmission/reception specifications if  
used with NT2K sets.  
Note 3: Global handsets are not compatible with M2250 (AE or current  
AF versions) telephones.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
370  
Page 355 of 504  
Appendix B: Meridian Modular  
Telephones installation  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Packing and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355  
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356  
Install the Meridian Modular Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356  
Meridian Modular Telephones self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358  
Install an M2317 telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361  
M2317 telephone self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363  
Designate telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367  
Cross-connect the telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368  
Note: This section is for reference only. The Meridian Modular  
Telephones are manufacture discontinued and no longer available.  
Packing and unpacking  
Use proper care when unpacking any digital telephone. Check for damaged  
containers so that appropriate claims can be made to the transport company  
for items damaged in transit.  
If a telephone must be returned to the factory, pack it in the appropriate  
container to avoid damage during transit. Remember to include all loose parts  
(cords, handset, power unit, labels, and lenses) in the shipment.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Page 356 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Installation and removal  
Install the Meridian Modular Telephones  
Follow the steps in Procedure 61 to install the Meridian Modular Telephones  
(M2006/2008/2008HF/2616/2216ACD).  
Procedure 61  
Installing Meridian Modular Telephones  
(M2006/M2008/M2008HF/M2616/M2216ACD)  
1
2
Complete the wiring and cross-connections (loop power) before  
connecting the telephone to the TELADAPT connector. See Figure 61 on  
page 357 and Figure 62 on page 358.  
Place the telephone upside down on a number of sheets of soft, clean  
paper on a solid, level work surface to prevent damage to movable keys  
and the telephone’s face.  
3
4
Connect the handset cord (5-conductor TELADAPT connectors) to the  
handset and snap it into place (not applicable to M2216ACD).  
Connect the other end of the handset cord to the connector in the bottom  
cover of the telephone. Turn the smooth side of the handset cord up  
(away from the telephone bottom cover) before tucking it under the  
restraining tab to ensure that the telephone will sit level on the desk after  
installation is complete (not applicable to M2216ACD).  
5
6
7
Connect the line cord to the telephone bottom cover. Route the cord  
through the channels.  
Turn the telephone right side up and place it in the normal operating  
position.  
Print the directory number on the designation card. Using a paper clip,  
remove the number lens from the telephone. Insert the designation card  
and snap the lens back into place.  
8
9
Designate the feature keys.  
Insert the line cord TELADAPT connector into the connecting block (jack)  
and snap it into place.  
10 Perform the self-test (see Procedure 62 on page 358) and acceptance  
test procedures. See LD 31 in the Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 357 of 504  
11 Supply the user with a Quick Reference Card and all user documentation.  
Make sure the SPRE number is printed on the Quick Reference Card.  
End of Procedure  
Figure 61  
Meridian Modular Telephone connections  
White  
Black  
Meridian  
Digital  
Telephone  
CS 1000  
/ Meridian 1  
(R)  
Red  
(T) Green  
Yellow  
Blue  
Alternate power  
To closet  
Power Supply  
Wall mount  
transformer  
553-AAA2030  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 358 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Figure 62  
Meridian Modular Telephone cross-connections.  
Telephone  
connecting  
block, or connector  
Pack  
connector  
PE shelf  
Cross connect  
block  
Line  
Pack  
T0  
R0  
G
R
Line cord  
to telephone  
26  
1
W-BL  
BL-W  
T0  
R0  
Unit 0  
W
B
For Power  
Supply leads  
T1  
R1  
28  
3
T1  
R1  
W-G  
G-W  
Unit 1  
to telephone  
T6  
R6  
BK-G  
G-BK  
Unit 6  
Unit 7  
38  
13  
T6  
R6  
to telephone  
to telephone  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
BK-S  
S-BK  
T7  
R7  
Part of  
25 pair cable  
Shelf  
connector  
Part of 25  
pair cable  
553-AAA0587  
Meridian Modular Telephones self-test  
Meridian Modular Telephones have a self-testing capability. Follow the steps  
in Procedure 62 to perform the self-test after installing a Meridian Modular  
Telephone or any of the hardware options to ensure proper operation.  
Procedure 62  
Meridian Modular Telephones self-test  
1
2
Unplug the line cord from the telephone.  
While holding down the RLS key, plug in the line cord to the telephone.  
Let go of the RLS key.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 359 of 504  
3
Follow the steps in Table 60 to perform the necessary steps and check  
results.  
Table 60  
Meridian Modular Telephones self-test steps and results (Part 1 of 2)  
Step  
1
Action  
Result  
Begin test (plug in line cord while  
holding down the RLS key).  
Speaker beeps once, all LCDs flash.  
Message Waiting lamps light steadily.  
Display reads:LOCAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
PRESS RLS KEY TO EXIT  
The handset is on hook.  
2
Press each Function key, from zero  
to fifteen (if there are Key Expansion  
Modules, continue pressing the  
Function keys, in any order).  
Adjacent LCD goes off when a key is  
pressed.  
3
Press the Hold key.  
Speaker beeps.  
4
Press each dial pad key.  
Lift the handset (if applicable).  
Press the dial pad keys.  
Replace the handset.  
Speaker beeps each time a key is pressed.  
Speaker beeps.  
5a  
Handset beeps.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 360 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Table 60  
Meridian Modular Telephones self-test steps and results (Part 2 of 2)  
Step  
5b  
Action  
Result  
Plug in the headset (if applicable).  
Press the dial pad keys.  
Unplug the headset.  
Speaker beeps.  
Headset beeps.  
6
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display is filled with dark squares.  
Speaker beeps.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Display is blank.  
Press the right side of volume control  
key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display shows symbols including digits 0–9  
and uppercase alphabet  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display shows symbols including upper- and  
lowercase alphabet.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display shows various symbols.  
Speaker beeps.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Display shows symbols.  
Press the right side of the volume  
control key.  
Speaker beeps.  
Display is filled with dark squares.  
Message Waiting lamp goes off.  
Display shows idle screen within 10 seconds.  
7
Press the RLS key (end of test).  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 361 of 504  
Install an M2317 telephone  
Follow the steps in Procedure 63 to install an M2317 telephone.  
Procedure 63  
Installing the M2317 telephone  
1
Complete the wiring and cross-connection as shown in Figure 63 on  
page 363 before connecting the telephone to the TELADAPT connector  
block.  
2
Place the telephone upside down on a number of sheets of soft, clean  
paper and on a solid, level work surface to prevent damage to movable  
keys and the telephone’s face.  
3
4
Connect the handset cord 4-conductor TELADAPT connectors to the  
handset and to the telephone and snap into place.  
Turn the smooth side of the cord away from the telephone base and  
secure it under the restraining tab. This ensures that the telephone sits  
level after the installation is complete.  
5
Connect the 6-conductor line cord to the telephone base, and place it  
under the restraining tabs.  
6
7
Turn the telephone face up, and place it in the normal operating position.  
Print the Directory Number (DN) on the designation card and place it in  
the designation card holder.  
8
9
Designate button labels for programmable keys, and place them under  
the button cover.  
Insert the line cord TELADAPT connector block and snap it into place.  
Place the line cord under the restraining tabs.  
10 Plug the 5 V power supply connector into the back of the telephone.  
11 Plug the power supply into an AC utility outlet.  
12 After the M2317 digital telephone is connected to a line that is both  
enabled and designated as an M2317 digital line, the startup screen  
displays INITIALIZATION V6.4. Within 5 seconds, the Idle state screen is  
displayed, and the M2317 is operational. The term V6.4 represents the  
firmware issue number, and can differ with some installations.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 362 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
13 If the M2317 has been connected to a line that is designated as a digital  
line, but is not enabled, the display prompts CONTACT SYSTEM  
ADMINISTRATOR. The line must be enabled using LD 32 from the  
maintenance terminal, and by enabling the features outlined in the work  
order. Refer to Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for  
the required routines, prompts, and responses.  
If the M2317 has been connected to a line that is neither defined as a  
digital line nor enabled, refer to Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311) for required routines, prompts, and responses.  
14 Verify that all the requested features are enabled by accessing them with  
the soft keys, or programmable keys, from the M2317 telephone and  
observing the display screen.  
15 Perform the self-test (see Procedure 64 on page 364) and acceptance  
test procedures. See LD 31 in the Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311).  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 363 of 504  
Figure 63  
M2317 digital telephone cross-connections  
Pack  
connector  
Telephone connecting  
block, or connector  
PE shelf  
Cross connect  
block  
Line  
pack  
T0  
G
R
Line cord  
to telephone  
26  
1
W-BL  
BL-W  
T0  
R0  
R0  
Unit 0  
T1  
R1  
28  
3
T1  
R1  
W-G  
G-W  
Unit 1  
to telephone  
T6  
R6  
Unit 6  
Unit 7  
38  
13  
BK-G  
G-BK  
T6  
R6  
to telephone  
to telephone  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
T7  
R7  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Part of  
25 pair cable  
Shelf  
connector  
553-AAA0588  
Part of multi-pair cable  
M2317 telephone self-test  
The M2317 telephone has a self-testing capability. This test can be performed  
whether or not the telephone is connected to the system. The test checks the  
proper functioning of the keys and LCD indicators on the telephone.  
Follow the steps listed in Procedure 64 on page 364 and Table 61 to perform  
the M2317 self-test.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 364 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Procedure 64  
Performing the M2317 telephone self-test  
1
Connect the telephone to the AC power supply.  
The LCD screen displays “Initialization … vX.X” (note that there is only a  
3 to 5 second window to begin Step 2).  
2
3
Press Softkey 5 twice, then press Softkey 4 twice.  
Follow the steps in Table 61 to perform the necessary self-test steps and  
check results.  
4
Unplug the power supply to end the test.  
Table 61  
M2317 telephone key/LCD indicator self-tests  
Step  
1
Key operated  
Required response  
Any programmable  
key  
Toggles the corresponding indicator on/off  
2
3
4
Any dial pad key  
Volume control  
Softkey 1  
Displays the corresponding character in the top line of the  
display screen  
Displays characters “>” for volume up and “<” for volume down  
in the top line of the display screen  
Both display lines are filled with characters as follows:  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZABCDEFGHIJKLMN  
OPQRSTUVWXYZABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB  
5
Softkey 2  
Both display lines are filled with characters as follows:  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzabcdefghijklmn  
opqrstuvwxyzabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzab  
6
7
8
Softkey 3  
Softkey 4  
Softkey 5  
All LCD pixels are turned on  
Display is blank  
Both display lines are filled with characters as follows:  
8888888888888888888888888888888888888888  
8888888888888888888888888888888888888888  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 365 of 504  
When the M2317 digital telephone or the data option fails to function properly,  
follow the steps listed in Table 62 in sequence to isolate the problem area.  
Table 62  
M2317 trouble-locating procedures (Part 1 of 3)  
Step  
Action  
Loop power failure  
1
2
Plug in the telephone.  
The LCDs flash once to indicate the power is OK.  
Data communication failure  
1
If voice communication is normal but data communication fails, check for DC output  
voltage at the power supply connector pins or replace the power supply plug-in  
transformer.  
Attempt to make a data call from the terminal keyboard. Refer to “Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter” on page 352. If not successful, proceed with Step 2.  
2
3
Make a call to the DN (voice or data) to verify that the port is enabled.  
Use an EIA or RS-232 breakout box in conjunction with the terminal cable to verify  
lead states and replace or repair cable if pinouts are incorrect.  
Attempt to make a data call from the terminal keyboard. Refer to “Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter” on page 352. If unsuccessful, proceed with Step 4.  
4
5
Remove the transformer from the AC receptacle, unplug the 5-pin power supply  
connector at the back of the telephone, and replace the data option circuit board. See  
Procedure 78 on page 427. Reconnect the data option power supply.  
Make a new attempt to start a data call. If trouble persists, continue with the ISDLC  
failure procedure.  
Use the self-test procedure to verify that the telephone electronics are operating  
correctly.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 366 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Table 62  
M2317 trouble-locating procedures (Part 2 of 3)  
Step  
1
Action  
ISDLC failure  
Go to the system maintenance terminal (TTY or CRT) and check for displayed error  
and location codes. An “NWS 401 L S C” or an “NWS 501 L S C U” code indicates that  
the automatic (routine) diagnostic test has detected a fault.  
Check for the following indications:  
L = faulty circuit card (ISDLC card) loop number  
S = circuit card location (shelf number)  
C = number of the faulty circuit card  
U = unit number of a faulty telephone (appears only in conjunction with the NWS 501  
code)  
2
Replace the faulty components.  
Try to establish a call. If unsuccessful, check the telephone.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 367 of 504  
Table 62  
M2317 trouble-locating procedures (Part 3 of 3)  
Step  
Action  
Telephone (voice or dialing) failure  
1
Check the line cord and handset cord to determine if all TELADAPT connectors are  
firmly in place and reconnect the loose ones. Ensure that the polarity of the Tip and  
Ring leads is correct.  
Lift the handset and listen for the dial tone and/or dial a directory number. If  
unsuccessful, proceed with Step 2.  
2
Wiggle the line cord and/or handset cord while listening for sounds from the handset. If  
crackling or ticking sounds are heard, replace the cords.  
Try to establish a call. If unsuccessful, proceed with Step 3.  
Replace the telephone.  
3
4
Try to establish a call. If unsuccessful, proceed with Step 4.  
Check the wiring between the line card, distribution panel, and telephone for breaks or  
loose connections. If necessary, rerun the wiring.  
Operate the telephone.  
Note: If no error codes are shown at the maintenance terminal, the Network and Signaling  
Diagnostic (LD 30) can be loaded and run manually from the system TTY. Refer to Software  
Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
Designate telephones  
Before designating telephones, check the work order for the features enabled  
and key designations. Designate each key by placing its feature name (from  
the designation sheet) in the key cap that fits on the key.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 65 on page 368 to designate Meridian Modular  
Telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 368 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Procedure 65  
Designating Meridian Modular Telephones  
1
2
Remove the cap from each key requiring a designation.  
Place the designation in the cap, place the cap over the corresponding  
key, and gently press down. Repeat for all keys requiring designations.  
3
4
5
Insert a paper clip into the hole at the left or right end of the designation  
window.  
Gently pry the window toward the center and remove, and insert the  
number tag.  
Replace the designation window.  
End of Procedure  
Cross-connect the telephones  
Follow the steps in Procedure 66 to cross-connect the telephones. Refer to  
Figure 64 on page 370 for an illustration of cross-connections.  
Procedure 66  
Cross-connecting the telephones  
1
Locate the telephone terminations at the cross-connect terminal.  
Telephone terminations are located on the vertical side of the frame when  
frame-mounted blocks are used and in the blue field when wall-mounted  
blocks are used.  
2
3
Connect Z-type cross-connecting wire to the leads of the telephone. See  
Table 63 on page 369 and Table 64 on page 369.  
Locate the line circuit card (TN) terminations.  
Line circuit card (TN) terminations are located on the horizontal side of the  
distributing frame when frame-mounted blocks are used and in the white  
field when wall-mounted blocks are used.  
4
Run and connect the other end of the cross-connecting wire to the  
assigned TN terminal block.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Page 369 of 504  
Table 63  
Z-type cross-connecting wire  
Size  
Gauge  
Color  
Designation  
1 pr  
22  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
Tip  
Ring  
3 pr  
24  
Voice T  
Voice R  
Signal T  
Signal R  
Power  
Power  
Table 64  
Inside wiring colors  
Inside wiring colors  
Connect to  
Z station wire  
16/25-pair cable  
W-BL  
equipment TN  
G
R
First pair Tip  
BL-W  
First pair Ring  
BK  
W-O  
Second pair Tip  
Y
O-W  
Second pair Ring  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 370 of 504 Appendix B: Meridian Modular Telephones installation  
Figure 64  
Meridian Modular Telephone cross-connections  
Telephone  
connecting  
block, or connector  
Pack  
connector  
PE shelf  
Cross connect  
block  
Line  
Pack  
T0  
R0  
G
R
Line cord  
to telephone  
26  
1
W-BL  
BL-W  
T0  
R0  
Unit 0  
W
B
For Power  
Supply leads  
T1  
R1  
28  
3
T1  
R1  
W-G  
G-W  
Unit 1  
to telephone  
T6  
R6  
BK-G  
G-BK  
Unit 6  
Unit 7  
38  
13  
T6  
R6  
to telephone  
to telephone  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
BK-S  
S-BK  
T7  
R7  
Part of  
25 pair cable  
Shelf  
connector  
Part of 25  
pair cable  
553-AAA0587  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
438  
Page 371 of 504  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular  
Telephones add-on modules installation  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Packing and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372  
Meridian Modular Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373  
Analog Terminal Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375  
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375  
Meridian Communications Adapter and Meridian Programmable Data  
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381  
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381  
Power Supply Board (NTZK models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392  
Power Supply Board (NT2K models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401  
Installing displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404  
External Alerter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416  
Key Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420  
Asynchronous Data Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423  
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423  
ADO operating parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424  
ADO external power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424  
M2317 Data Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426  
Meridian Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430  
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 372 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433  
Note: This section is for reference only. The telephone and options  
described in this chapter are manufacture discontinued and no longer  
available.  
Packing and unpacking  
Use proper care when unpacking any add-on module. Check for damaged  
containers so that appropriate claims can be made to the transport company  
for items damaged in transit.  
If a module must be returned to the factory, pack it in the appropriate  
container to avoid damage during transit. Remember to include all loose parts  
in the shipment.  
There are three distinct versions of Meridian Modular Telephones – all three  
are supported. The versions can be clearly distinguished by the first four  
letters in the upper left-hand corner of the model identification label on the  
bottom of the telephone.  
The three versions are as follows:  
•
•
•
the “NTZK” models  
the “NT2K” models with date code prior to April 24, 1998  
the third version includes both the “NT9K” models and the “NT2K”  
models with date code of April 24, 1998 and later  
In addition, the two jacks face in the same direction on “NT2K” and  
“NT9K” telephones, and in opposite directions on “NTZK” telephones.  
When appropriate, differences between the models are noted in this  
document.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 373 of 504  
Meridian Modular Telephones  
Use the procedures in this section for adding hardware options to the M2006,  
M2008/M2008HF, M2016S, M2616, and M2216ACD telephones only.  
CAUTION  
Damage to Equipment  
Use only the line cord provided with the Meridian  
Modular Telephone when installing and removing  
options. The acceptable line cord is A0346862.  
Figure 65 on page 374 shows an exploded view for reference when  
dismantling the telephone to get to its internal components. Some telephone  
types are slightly smaller than the M2616 and do not have the center screw in  
the base, but otherwise they are the same. The center screw may not be  
required.  
Refer to Figure 71 on page 395 to locate the various components of the  
M2006 and M2008/M2008HF telephones. Refer to Figure 72 on page 396 to  
locate components on the M2616, M2016S, and M2216ACD telephones.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Page 374 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 65  
Exploded view of the M2616/M2016S/M2216ACD telephone  
Stand  
Base  
Fillerplate  
Set  
553-AAA0636  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 375 of 504  
Analog Terminal Adapter  
The Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA) enables the use of an off-the-shelf  
analog device (FAX, Modem, Telephone) to operate simultaneously with the  
Meridian Digital Telephones. The Analog Terminal Adapter board fits into  
the footstand space of the Meridian Digital Telephone.  
Functional description  
The Analog Terminal Adapter is mounted in the footstand of the Meridian  
Digital Telephone set. The ATA requires a separate AC adapter that provides  
a 24 V AC external power source. The ATA does not draw power from the  
Meridian Digital Telephone set.  
The Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA) provides a RJ11 connection for analog  
equipment to operate on the same line as the Meridian Digital Telephone set.  
The Analog Terminal Adapter enables data to be transmitted and received  
using the public switched telephone network (PSTN). The ATA supports an  
analog device link to a desktop or laptop computer (with modems) in the  
digital telephone environment. Currently, it is necessary to install a separate  
analog phone line to be able to interface with the PSTN.  
The ATA can be used for the following analog devices:  
•
•
•
FAX Machine  
Modem  
Analog Telephone  
ATA operating parameters  
The ATA data parameters are stored locally, although the configuration is set  
in the CS 1000 and Meridian 1 system. Do not set data parameters in the  
system before installing the ATA in the telephone. If the parameters are set  
before the telephone is installed, the configuration information is lost.  
Simultaneous voice and data capabilities are available. When the ATA is  
installed, the System Administrator must activate the Flexible Voice and Data  
feature by configuring LD 11. See Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311) for prompt and response details.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 376 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
The ATA is capable of receiving dial pulse or DTMF address signaling from  
the analog equipment.  
The ATA uses the 2nd channel of the TCM loop to add an analog port to the  
digital terminal. It has an RJ11 type jack accessible from the back of the  
telset.  
The analog interface of the ATA is a 2-wire source, providing A and B leads  
(tip and ring) across which analog equipment (modem/fax) is connected. The  
loop length is >100 feet. The analog interface of the ATA is compatible with  
the port types listed in Table 65.  
Table 65  
Port types compatible with ATA  
Defining  
Country  
Port Type(s)  
Standard(s)  
United  
States  
ONS Station Interface  
EIA/Tia-464A  
FCC Rules Part 68  
CAN3-T512.1  
CS-03 Part I  
Class A OPS Station Interface  
ONS Station Interface  
Canada  
Class 1300 OPS Station Interface  
Refer to Analog Terminal Adapter Quick Reference Card for detailed  
information on this feature.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 67 on page 377 to add the Analog Terminal  
Adapter (ATA) to the telephone and to connect it to a FAX or modem. The  
ATA is supported on Meridian Digital Telephones only.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 377 of 504  
Procedure 67  
Installing and removing the  
Analog Terminal Adapter  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal telephone components,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
2
When the ATA is installed, the System Administrator must activate the  
Flexible Voice and Data Feature by configuring LD 11.  
To Activate the Flexible Voice and Data Feature, use the following chart  
to configure LD 11 (for more detailed information, refer to Software Input/  
Output: Administration (553-3001-311)).  
Table 66:  
Flexible Voice and Data feature configuration (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
NEW/CHG  
aaaa  
New or change  
Telephone type, where aaaa = 2006, 2008, 2016, or 2616  
Terminal Number, where u = 16-31  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, and Media  
Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System, CS 1000S system, Media Gateway  
1000B, and Media Gateway 1000T, where c = card and u = unit.  
CLS  
FLXA  
Flexible voice/data allowed. This Class of Service can only be  
assigned to 2006, 2008, 2016, 2216 or 2617 sets. When  
configured to CLS=FLXA  
VCE  
(FLXD) = Flexible voice/data denied. Voice Class of Service  
(VCE) can be assigned to the upper TN unit (16-31) and Data  
class of Service (DTA) can be assigned to the lower TN (0-15). A  
Single Call Ringing (SCR) key can be designated a Data Mode  
(DTNK) key.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 378 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Table 66:  
Flexible Voice and Data feature configuration (Part 2 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
KEY  
-Key  
Prime Directory Number Key, SCR, SCN, MCR or MCN and xxx.  
Single Call Ringing  
xx SCR yyyy  
xx SCN yyyy  
Single Call Non Ringing Data Mode Key, where xx = key number  
and yyy = Data Directory Number.  
3
Disconnect and remove all cords (including the handset cord) from the  
telephone.  
4
5
Place the telephone, face-down, on a padded level surface.  
Using a #1 Phillips screw driver, remove both screws and separate the  
footstand from the phone base.  
6
If using the NT9K ATA ready set or the NT2K with date code of April 24,  
1998 or later:  
•
Remove and retain the footstand (this footstand will be reattached  
back onto the set base after ATA installation is complete.  
•
Skip to the ATA Installation Procedure 13 on page 381.  
7
If using the NT2K or the NTZK phone set, remove and discard the  
footstand. Use the redesigned footstand required for the installation of the  
ATA.  
8
9
If an MCA or MPDA installed is installed, unplug it from the data line jack  
in the phone base.  
Remove the back covering of the phone base by removing the four  
screws.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 379 of 504  
Figure 66  
Telephone base and footstand  
Footstand  
10 If the phone is equipped with a Power Option board and/or cable, you  
must remove it before installing the ATA. The Power Option board is  
located on the left side of the telephone:  
•
Remove the two small screws from the Power Option board (near the  
top) and set them aside.  
•
To disconnect the Power Option board from the NTZK telephone,  
grasp the board firmly on each side and slowly rock the Power Option  
board while applying upward pressure until it is released form the  
2X7 pin connector.  
•
•
To disconnect the NT2K Power Option board from the set simply  
remove the screws from the Power Option board and base and lift the  
board out of the set.  
If the Power Option board has a ribbon cable, disconnect the cable  
from the 2X7pin connector on the main board and remove the cable  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 380 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 67  
Connector view  
Inside Phone Base  
2x7 pin connector  
2x3 pin connector  
Display board  
11 If the phone is equipped with the External Alerter Option, remove it before  
installing the ATA. The External Alerter Option board is located at the right  
center of the telephone:  
•
•
Remove the screws from the External Alerter Option board.  
Grasp the board firmly on each end and pull upward to remove from  
the 2X3 pin connector  
12 Install the Jumper board on the 2X7 pin connector inside the phone set  
base.  
•
There are 2 Jumper boards provided. Use the brown Jumper board  
for the NTZKxxxx phone set and the black Jumper board for the  
NT2Kxxxx phone set with a date code prior to April 24, 1998.  
•
If a Power Option board was not installed on the NT2Kxxxx and the  
NTZKxxxx there will be 2 Jumper plugs on the 2X7 pin connector that  
must be removed before installing the Jumper board.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 381 of 504  
13 Remove the knockout located on the back panel of the footstand in order  
to install the ATA. It is the smaller knockout, located inside the large  
knockout. The small ATA knockout can be remove by pressing it in with  
thumb presser.  
14 Install the ATA Printed Circuit board into the footstand.  
15 Plug the ATA 8-conductor line cord, included in the package, into the data  
jack in the base of the telephone. Plug the other end of this cord into the  
data jack of the ATA located in the footstand.  
16 Reassemble the footstand on the base and screw it into position using a  
#1 Phillips screwdriver.  
17 Plug the 24v AC Power Transformer into the circular mini DIN connector  
on the backpanel of the footstand.  
18 Plug the transformer end of the AC Power Transformer into the AC  
commercial electrical outlet.  
19 The analog device can now be connected to the RJ11 connector on the  
back of the footstand. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for  
installation instructions for the FAX, modem, or telephone to be used.  
End of Procedure  
Meridian Communications Adapter and Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter  
The Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA) replaces the Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA), and offers enhanced capability over  
the MPDA.  
Functional description  
The MCA mounts within the telephone. It enables synchronous and  
asynchronous ASCII terminals and personal computers to be connected to the  
telephone using an RS-232-C or V.35 interface on a DB-25 connector. See  
Figure 68 on page 385.  
The MCA enables synchronous applications (DTEs such as video  
conferencing equipment and Group IV fax units) to be connected to the  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 382 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
telephone. System software enables access to data functions through both the  
keypad and service change in LD 11.  
Asynchronous mode features supported by the MCA include the following:  
•
•
Asynchronous transmission at up to 19.2 kbps (autobaud)  
Enhanced Hayes commands, including upper- and lower-case dialing,  
voice call origination through AT dialing, hang-up data call, and on-line  
disconnect of voice call  
•
Script file capability that enables the MCA to learn a dial-up and log-on  
sequence that can be played back to automatically access a host or  
service  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice Call Origination (VCO)  
DCE mode  
Autodial  
Ring Again  
Speed Call  
Autobaud and Autoparity Detect  
Modem Pool Calling  
Host/Terminal Mode  
Forced Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
Dynamic Carrier Detect (DCD)  
Inactivity Time-out  
Remote Loopback  
RTS/CTS hardware flow control capability (when calling another MCA)  
Synchronous mode features supported by the MCA include the following:  
•
•
•
•
Half Duplex/Full Duplex  
Internal and external clocking  
Modem and network capability  
Synchronous transmission up to 64 kbps  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 383 of 504  
•
•
•
Public Switched Data Service (PSDS) compatibility. MCA extends  
PSDS and 64K restricted and 64K clear capabilities to Modular  
telephones.  
V.25 bit dialing protocol support at all synchronous speeds up to 64 kbps.  
High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) and Bisynch (character oriented)  
framing of the V.25 commands are supported.  
Programmable echo canceller disabling for 56 and 64 kbps network calls  
Synchronous and asynchronous mode features supported by the MCA  
include the following:  
•
•
T-Link and DM-DM support  
T-Link and DM-DM are Nortel proprietary protocols. The SL-100 and  
DMS data devices use T-Link. DM-DM is used by CS 1000 and  
Meridian 1 data devices such as ASIM, AIM, ADM, SADM,  
Asynchronous Data Option (ADO), and MPDA. MCA can use both  
DM-DM and T-Link.  
•
•
•
•
Hotline  
Virtual Leased Line  
V.35 interface capability selectable with jumper plugs on the MCA  
Data tandem calls across TIE trunks, provided all switches involved are  
Nortel machines  
•
PSDS tandem data calls across TIE trunks are supported with release 18  
or later when each tandem node uses an ISDN Primary Rate Interface  
(PRI) or Basic Rate Interface (BRI) connection. See Transparent Data  
Networking (553-2731-110) for more information.  
Note: Internal PSDS calls are not supported.  
MCA operating parameters  
The MCA data parameters are stored locally, although the configuration is set  
in the system. Data parameters cannot be set in the system before installing  
the MCA in the telephone. If the parameters are set before the telephone is  
installed, the configuration information is lost.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 384 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Operating parameters are downloaded after the MCA is enabled in LD 11.  
System parameters are downloaded when the MCA is configured in LD 11,  
and power is reset. See Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311) for prompt and response details.  
Data parameters can also be set through LD 11, as well as by the keypad.  
The MCA communicates with Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) using the  
operating parameters shown below.  
Synchronization  
Number of bits  
Parity  
Asynchronous, Start-Stop  
8 bits  
none (unchecked)  
Data rate  
110, 150, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,19200  
bits per second (autobaud) asynchronous  
up to 64000 bits per second synchronous  
Stop bits  
2 bits for 110 bits per second;  
1 bit for all other speeds (asynchronous only)  
Transmission  
Half duplex; full duplex  
When using the MCA for synchronous data connections, configure the  
telephone with a display option to view the data parameters. The MPDA and  
MCA are supported on Meridian Modular Telephones only.  
When installing an MCA or MPDA into NTZK or NT2K phone sets with a  
date code prior to January 1998, a Power Option board is required, along with  
an additional power source.  
When installing an MCA in an NT9K or NT2K phone set with date code of  
January 1998 or later, install only the MCA. An additional Power Option  
board and Jumper board is not required. See Table 55: “NT2K model Power  
requirements, Meridian Modular Telephone sets” on page 347 for power  
requirements information.  
•
See Procedure 70 on page 393 for M2006/M2008 NTZK sets.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 385 of 504  
•
•
•
See Procedure 71 on page 397 for M2616/M2216ACD NTZK sets.  
See Procedure 72 on page 401 for M2006/M2008/M2008HF NT2K sets.  
See Procedure 67 on page 377 for installing an MCA onto an NT9K or  
NT2K with date code of April 24, 1998 and later.  
Figure 68 on page 385 shows the back of a Modular telephone with an MCA  
mounted; Figure 69 on page 386 shows a block diagram of the Modular  
telephone and MCA.  
Figure 68  
Back of telephone showing MCA  
Flashing  
LED  
RS-232  
interface  
553-AAA0739  
The MCA can be placed as far from its associated data terminal or computer  
port as is consistent with EIA RS-232 or V.35.  
When the MCA is used as a V.35 interface, an additional cable is required to  
convert the DB-25 into a 34-pin rectangular connector. This does not apply  
to asynchronous configurations. If the pins are left in V.35 mode,  
asynchronous operation is not supported, and the MCA looks as though it is  
locked up.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 386 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 69  
Block diagram of MCA and Modular telephone  
CS 1000  
/ Meridian 1  
Communications adapter  
Telephone  
I
EIA  
Drivers  
MDAD  
A64  
MTDC  
A44  
S
D
L
D
L
C
RS-232-C  
DTE I/F  
∝
P
or  
Receivers  
C
+5V  
+12V  
-12V  
+5V  
Power Supply  
∝
P
Power supply  
option card  
553-AAA2136  
Remove the two 14-pin jumper plugs or one 20-pin jumper plug inside the  
MCA from the RS-232 socket(s) and install the V.35 socket.  
Note: The female cable ordering code is A0408927. The male cable  
ordering code is A0408928. The A0300752 and A0300753 cables are  
still supported, unless used with applications similar to IBM front-end.  
Modem pooling is not supported on the MCA.  
When a call is connected between two MCAs, and power is removed from  
one, the MCA does not release until the power is restored.  
The MCA always remembers the most recent data parameters. In the case of  
power failure, data settings do not have to be reset.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 387 of 504  
See Table 67 for a listing of the V.35 CCITT signals supported by the MCA.  
Table 67  
V.35 CCITT signals supported by the MCA (Part 1 of 2)  
Signal  
Adaptor cable  
MCA  
Source  
V.35  
DB-25  
DB-25  
V.35  
CCITT  
pin no.  
Abbr.  
Pin No. Pin No. DTE  
MCA  
Description  
101  
1
DG  
1
A
Protective ground*  
Transmit data A  
Receive data A  
Request to send  
Clear to send  
103A  
104A  
105  
2
SDA  
RDA  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
S
2
P
X
X
3
3
R
X
4
4
C
106  
5
5
D
X
X
107  
6
6
E
Data set ready  
Signal ground  
102  
7
7
B
109  
8
CD  
8
F
X
X
Carrier detect  
—
9/10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18/19  
—
9/10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
CC/L  
K
No connection  
—
—
X
X
**  
115B  
103B  
114B  
114A  
104B  
115A  
—
SCRB  
SDB  
SCTB  
SCTA  
RDB  
SCRA  
—
X
Serial clock receive B  
Transmit data B  
Serial clock transmit B  
Serial clock transmit A  
Receive data B  
Serial clock receive A  
No connection  
S
AA  
Y
X
X
X
X
15  
16  
17  
T
V
18/19  
M/HH  
Note: * Pin 1 is connected to the MCDS shelf frame.  
** These leads are ignored by the MCA controller.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 388 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Table 67  
V.35 CCITT signals supported by the MCA (Part 2 of 2)  
Signal  
Adaptor cable  
Source  
MCA  
V.35  
CCITT  
DB-25  
pin no.  
DB-25  
V.35  
Abbr.  
Pin No. Pin No. DTE  
MCA  
Description  
108.2  
—
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
DTR  
—
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
H
EE  
J
X
Data terminal ready  
No connection  
Ring indicator  
125  
113B  
113A  
—
RI  
X
SCTEB  
SCTEA  
—
W
X
X
X
Tran sign elemt time B  
Tran sign elemt time A  
**  
U
MM  
Note: * Pin 1 is connected to the MCDS shelf frame.  
** These leads are ignored by the MCA controller.  
Use the following procedures to add the Meridian Communications Adapter  
(MCA) or Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) to the telephone  
and to connect it to a terminal or personal computer.  
See the Meridian Communications Adapter User Guide for more information  
on MCA operation.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 389 of 504  
Procedure 68  
Installing and removing the Meridian  
Communications Adapter or the Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal telephone components,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
If using a NT9K phone or the NT2K with date code of April 24, 1998 and later,  
it is not necessary to install a Power Option board to operate the MCA.  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface (a desktop, for example) covered with soft  
material or paper to prevent damage to movable keys and the telephone  
face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the footstand.  
•
For NT2K and NTZK with date code prior to April 24, 1998 remove  
the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand by pressing inward at the back of the footstand where it  
meets the base and pull upward. Discard the footstand. The  
redesigned footstand ordered with the ATA is used instead.  
•
For NT9K and NT2K with a date code of April 24, 1998 and later,  
retain the footstand and skip to Procedure 10 on page 390.  
4
5
6
If the telephone is not equipped with the Meridian Programmable Data  
Adapter (MPDA) or Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA), go to  
Procedure 6 on page 389. If replacing an existing MPDA or MCA,  
carefully disconnect the end of the 8-pin TELADAPT jack plugged into the  
telephone by pressing firmly on the latch-tab and slowly lifting up.  
Turn the telephone footstand assembly over and put it in the normal use  
position. Remove the two self-tapping screws that fasten the MPDA or  
MCA to the telephone footstand assembly and remove the MPDA or MCA  
by pulling outward and up. Go to Procedure 11 on page 390 to replace the  
MPDA or MCA.  
Remove the back covering of the phone base by removing the four  
screws.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 390 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
7
If the NTZK or the NT2K (with date code prior to April 24, 1998) phone set  
is equipped with a Power Option board and/or cable, the Power Option  
board and/or cable must be removed before installing the MCA.  
•
Remove the two small screws from the Power board (near the top)  
and set them aside.  
•
To disconnect the Power Option board from the NTZK telephone,  
grasp the board firmly on each side and slowly rock the board while  
applying upward pressure, until it is released from the 2X7 pin  
connector.  
•
•
To disconnect the NT2K Power Option board from the set, simply  
remove the screws from the base and lift the board out of the set.  
If the Power Option board has a ribbon cable disconnect the cable  
from the 2X7 pin connector on the main board and remove the cable.  
8
9
If the phone is equipped with the External Alerter board, it must be  
removed before installing the MCA with redesigned footstand.  
•
The External Alerter board is located at the right center of the  
telephone.  
•
Remove the screws form the board, grasp the board firmly on each  
end and pull upward to remove it from the 2X3 pin connector.  
Install the Jumper board onto the 2X7 pin connector inside the phone  
base.  
•
If the phone set did not have a Power Option board installed on the  
NT2K or the NTZK then there will be 2 Jumper plugs on the 2X7  
connector. Remove them before installing the Jumper board.  
•
The redesigned footstand will have 2 jumpers. Use the black one for  
the NT2K phone and the brown one for the NTZK phone.  
10 Remove the large MCA knockout section in the rear of the telephone  
footstand assembly, and remove the small tabs. See Figure 70. It is best  
to remove this knockout with a screwdriver.  
11 For MCA, set option plugs to the required configuration, RS-232 or V.35.  
The factory default is RS-232.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 391 of 504  
Figure 70  
Installing the MCA  
2
1
MCA  
Board  
553-AAA0637  
12 Tilt the MPDA or MCA circuit board up and insert the DB-25 connector  
socket into the breakout section. Then slide the board connector end-first  
under the tabs in the footstand assembly and position it over the locating  
pins. Position and lower it completely onto the telephone footstand  
assembly. Insert the two self-tapping Phillips-head screws supplied with  
the MPDA or MCA into the mounting holes and tighten them with a #1  
Phillips screwdriver.  
13 Plug one end of an 8-conductor line cord supplied with a TELADAPT  
adapter in the jack J1 of the MPDA or MCA (latch tab facing down) and  
plug the other end of the line cord into the data jack in the base of the  
telephone. Make certain the latch tab of each cable end is firmly snapped  
into place.  
14 Carefully route the excess cable so that it will not become pinched  
between the footstand and base.  
15 Reassemble the base and footstand assembly sections, ensuring that the  
footstand is firmly seated on the base.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 392 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
16 Tighten the screws  
•
•
Reconnect all cords, connect the new 24v AC transformer to the set.  
Plug in the new transformer into the 110v AC commercial electrical  
outlet.  
•
Place the telephone in the normal operating position.  
Note 1: Place the label supplied with the MPDA or MCA on the outside  
of the bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper identification and  
tracking of the option level of the set.  
Note 2: If an ADM3, ADM5, or ADM11 terminal is used in conjunction  
with the DB-25 connector-C interface connector in the Asynchronous  
Programmable Data Adapter, pin 22 in the DB-25 connector cable must  
be disconnected. These ADM terminals will go into test mode if this pin is  
not disconnected.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 69  
Connecting the data terminal  
1
Connect the DB-25 connector-C interface connector from the data  
terminal to the matching header connector in the back of the telephone.  
2
Insert the two captive screws in the connector body into the threaded  
holes in the header connector and secure tightly to prevent accidental  
disconnection during data terminal operation.  
End of Procedure  
Power Supply Board (NTZK models)  
Use the following procedures to add a Power Supply Board to the telephone  
for connection to a transformer or closet power supply. Use Procedure 70 on  
page 393 for the M2006 and M2008. Use Procedure 71 on page 397 for the  
M2616 and M2216ACD.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 393 of 504  
Procedure 70  
Installing and removing the M2006/M2008  
Power Supply Board on NTZK sets  
CAUTION  
Damage to Equipment  
Connect the optional Power Supply to the Meridian  
Modular Telephones only. Equipment damage may  
result from incorrect connections. Both the closet  
power supply and the transformer are for use with the  
Meridian Modular Telephones only.  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal telephone components,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface (such as a desktop) covered with soft material or  
paper to prevent damage to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly by pressing inward at the back of the footstand where  
it meets the base and pulling upward.  
4
If the telephone is equipped with a Meridian Programmable Data Adapter  
(MPDA) or Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA), unplug the data  
cable from telephone’s base jack.  
5
6
7
Remove the four screws securing the base of the telephone to the top  
cover. Remove the base and set it aside.  
If the telephone is equipped with a display, disconnect the display ribbon  
cable from the display board and move it out of the way.  
If the telephone is not equipped with the power supply board, remove the  
jumpers from P1 connector pins on the main board. Go to step 9.  
If the telephone is equipped with a power supply board, go to step 8.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 394 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
8
The power supply board is located on the left side of the telephone.  
Remove two small screws from the power supply board (near the top) and  
set them aside. Grasp the board firmly on each side. Work the board  
loose from the connector by slowly applying upward pressure to alternate  
sides until released.  
If the power supply board is not being replaced, place the jumpers  
(A0288529) connecting the bottom two sets of pins on the P1 connector.  
9
Place the power supply board so that the alignment pin on the telephone  
fits into Slot A on the board. See Figure 71 on page 395 and Figure 72 on  
page 396. Align the mounting holes in the board (near the top) over the  
mounting holes in the telephone and carefully press down so that the H1  
connector on the board slides onto the P1 pins.  
10 Take the self-tapping Phillips-head screws supplied with the power supply  
board and install them into the mounting holes. Tighten firmly with a #1  
Phillips screwdriver.  
11 If the telephone has a display, reconnect the display ribbon cable, routing  
the cable as described in Procedure 73 on page 405.  
Note: Do not allow R5 on the power supply board to become bent during  
this procedure.  
12 Replace the base. If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA,  
reconnect the data cable to the base telephone jack and replace the  
footstand (ensuring that the MPDA or MCA cable does not get pinched  
between the base and footstand). Make sure the footstand is firmly seated  
to the base.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the power supply board on the  
outside of the bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper  
identification and tracking of the option level of the set.  
13 Tighten all screws, reconnect the line cord, and place the telephone in the  
normal operating position.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 71  
Page 395 of 504  
M2006/M2008 telephone and option boards  
H1  
connector  
P1  
connector  
P3  
connector  
P2  
connector  
R
5
Slot  
B
Slot  
A
Power  
board  
H1  
connector  
J1  
connector  
J2  
Alerter  
board  
connector  
553-AAA0638  
Display  
board  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 396 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 72  
M2616/M2216ACD telephone and option boards  
H1  
connector  
P1  
connector  
P2  
connector  
P4  
connector  
R
5
Slot  
B
Slot  
A
H1  
connector  
J1  
connector  
J2  
connector  
553-AAA0639  
Display  
Board  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 397 of 504  
Procedure 71  
Installing and removing the M2616/M2216ACD  
Power Supply Board on NTZK sets  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal telephone components,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface (such as a desktop) covered with soft material or  
paper to prevent damage to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly by pressing inward at the back of the footstand where  
it meets the base and pulling upward.  
4
5
6
7
If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA, unplug the data cable  
from the base telephone jack.  
Remove the four or five screws securing the base to the top cover.  
Remove the base and set it aside.  
If the telephone is equipped with display, disconnect the Display ribbon  
cable from the display board and move it out of the way.  
If the telephone is not equipped with a power supply board, remove  
jumpers from the P1 connector pins on the main board. Go to step 9.  
If the telephone is equipped with a power supply board, go to step 8.  
8
9
The power supply board is located on the left side of the telephone.  
Remove two small screws from the power supply board (near the top) and  
set them aside. Grasp the board firmly on each side. Work the board  
loose slowly until it is released.  
If not replacing the power supply board, place the jumpers (A0288529)  
connecting the bottom two sets of the pins on the P1 connector.  
Place the power supply board so that Slot B fits into the alignment pin on  
the telephone. See Figure 70 on page 391. Align the mounting holes in  
the board (near the top) over mounting holes in the telephone and  
carefully press down so that the H1 connector on the board slides onto  
the pins of the header (P1 on the M2616 or J2 on the M2006/M2008).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 398 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
10 Take the self-tapping Phillips-head screws supplied with the power supply  
board and install them into the mounting holes. Tighten firmly with a #1  
Phillips screwdriver.  
11 If the telephone has a display, reconnect the display ribbon cable, routing  
the cable as described in Procedure 73 on page 405.  
Note: Do not allow R5 on the power supply board to become bent during  
this procedure.  
12 Replace the base. If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA,  
reconnect the data cable to the base telephone jack and replace the  
footstand (ensuring the MPDA or MCA cable does not get pinched  
between the base and footstand). Make sure the footstand is firmly seated  
to the base.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the power supply board on the  
outside of the bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper  
identification and tracking of the option level of the set.  
13 Connect the telephone to a local transformer (see Figure 73 on page 399)  
or closet power supply (see Figure 74 on page 400). Refer to “Power  
requirements” on page 345 for requirements.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 73  
Page 399 of 504  
Configuration of a local plug-in transformer  
To IDF  
Adapter jack  
Adapter  
plug  
6-conductor  
line cord  
from telephone  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Plug  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Jack  
Wall  
transformer  
(110 V or 220 V)  
Adapter  
553-AAA0640  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 400 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 74  
Closet power supply configuration  
Amphenol connector  
32  
32  
32  
Connecting Block  
32  
32  
Cable  
Marker  
Service Fitting  
Utility  
Column  
553-AAA0641  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 401 of 504  
Power Supply Board (NT2K models)  
Follow the steps in Procedure 72 to add a Power Supply Board to the  
telephone for connection to a transformer or closet power supply. This  
procedure applies to the M2006, M2008/M2008HF, M2216ACD and M2616  
Meridian Modular telephones, NT2K models.  
CAUTION  
Damage to Equipment  
Connect the optional Power Supply to the Meridian  
Modular Telephones only. Equipment damage may  
result from incorrect connections. Both the closet  
power supply and the transformer are for use with the  
Meridian Modular Telephones2000 Series Meridian  
Digital Telephone only.  
Procedure 72  
Installing and removing the M2006 or M2008  
Power Supply Board on NT2K sets  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal components of telephones,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
Opening the Telephone  
1
Disconnect and remove all cords (including the handset) from the  
telephone.  
2
3
4
5
Place the telephone, upside-down, on a padded, level surface.  
If the telephone does not have an MCA or MPDA adapter, go to step 7.  
Using a #1 Phillips screwdriver, remove both screws from the footstand.  
Remove the footstand from the base by pressing in the back of the  
footstand as it is lifted from the base.  
6
7
Unplug the MCA or MPDA from the data line jack on the base, and set the  
footstand aside.  
Remove all screws on the base of the telephone.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 402 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Remove the base from the telephone.  
Attaching the Power Module  
8
9
Lay the Power Module assembly into position on the left side of the  
telephone. Be careful not to bend R5 (the big disk) on the Power Module  
during installation.  
10 If you are adding a Power Module to the set for the first time (not replacing  
an existing Power Module), the connector (J2 on the M2006 and M2008/  
M2008HF, P1 on the M2616) on the main board should have jumpers  
which must be removed at this point.  
11 Connect the Power Module to the main board with the ribbon cable,  
keeping the red edge of the ribbon cable from the front of the telephone  
as show in Figure 75.  
CAUTION  
Damage to Equipment  
This is a polarity-sensitive connection. The cable and  
the connector on the main board (J2 on the M2006  
and M2008/M2008HF, and P1 on the M2616) are  
keyed.  
12 Screw the Power Module into position on the left side of the telephone.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 403 of 504  
Figure 75  
Ribbon cable placement  
Cable routed  
underneath  
Power Module  
2
1
M2008HF/M2616  
Microphone  
553-AAA0642  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 404 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Reattaching the Base  
13 Make sure that all ribbon cables are lying flat and not caught on any posts  
on the telephone cover or base.  
CAUTION  
For the M2616 and M2008HF, make sure that the  
microphone has not been moved from its black  
rubber holder. The holder should be seated in the  
main board near the ribbon cable that was just  
attached.  
14 Replace the base.  
15 Insert all screws and tighten them.  
16 If the telephone has an MCA or MPDA, plug its cable into the jack on the  
telephone base.  
17 Install the footstand, and secure it with two screws.  
18 Reconnect all cords, including the handset.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the power supply board on the  
outside of the bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper  
identification and tracking of the option level of the set.  
End of Procedure  
Installing displays  
The following procedures cover installation of the various displays on the  
various sets.  
•
•
•
Procedure 73: “Installing and removing the M2616/M2216ACD Display  
on NTZK sets” on page 405  
Procedure 74: “Installing and removing the M2616 Display on NT2K  
sets” on page 408  
Procedure 75: “Installing NT2K28AA displays on NTZK or NT2K sets”  
on page 411  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 405 of 504  
Procedure 73  
Installing and removing the M2616/M2216ACD  
Display on NTZK sets  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal components of telephones,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly by pressing inward at the back of the footstand where  
it meets the base and pulling upward.  
4
5
If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA, unplug the data cable  
from the base telephone jack. Remove the five screws securing the base  
to the telephone. Remove the base and set it aside.  
If the telephone is not equipped with a display, go to step 9. If the  
telephone is equipped with a display, go to step 6.  
Removing the display board  
6
The display board is located at the left center of the telephone. Disconnect  
the display ribbon cable from the display board. Remove the small  
mounting screw from the board. Grasp the board firmly on each end and  
pull upward to remove it. To replace it, go to step 9.  
Removing the display  
7
The power supply board is located on the left side of the telephone.  
Remove the two small screws from the power supply board (near the top)  
and set them aside. Grasp the board firmly on each side. Carefully work  
the board loose until released.  
8
Remove the two or three screws from the display Module. Remove the  
display from the telephone. To install the display, go to step 11.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 406 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Installing the display board  
9
Place the J1 connector of the display board over the P2 pins of the  
telephone (see Figure 76 on page 407). Press down slowly until J1 slides  
onto the P2 pins and is firmly seated.  
Note: If the center screw is included, do not perform step 10.  
10 Insert the self-tapping Phillips-head screw supplied with the display into  
the mounting hole (near the top). Tighten firmly with a #1 Phillips  
screwdriver.  
Installing the display  
11 Place the display face-down near the top of the telephone and align the  
two mounting holes of the display with the mounting holes in the  
telephone.  
12 Insert two self-tapping Phillips-head screws from the faceplate into the  
mounting holes; tighten them firmly with a #1 Phillips screwdriver.  
13 Install the power supply board (see Procedure 71 on page 397). This step  
is not necessary on M2616 unless there are other hardware options.  
14 Fold the ribbon cable near the connector to align it with the J2 pins on the  
display board, ensuring that the notch on the ribbon cable is facing toward  
the display board. Carefully work the ribbon cable connector onto the J2  
pins until firmly seated. Route the cable flat beside the power supply  
board, gathering excess cable under the display. Be careful not to press  
the cable beneath the alignment posts or studs of the base. See Figure 76  
on page 407.  
Note: Do not allow R5 on the power supply board to become bent during  
this procedure.  
15 Replace the base. If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA,  
reconnect the data cable to the base telephone jack and replace the  
footstand (ensuring that the MPDA or MCA cable does not get pinched  
between the base and the footstand). Make sure the footstand is firmly  
seated in the base.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the display on the outside of the  
bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper identification and  
tracking of the option level of the set.  
16 Tighten all screws, reconnect all cords, and place the telephone in the  
normal operating position.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 407 of 504  
Figure 76  
Display cable routing  
Display  
Module  
excess  
cable  
P4 pin  
connector  
mounting  
hole  
J1  
Set  
connector ribbon  
cable (fold)  
J2 pin  
connector  
Display  
Board  
553-AAA0643  
17 Perform the self-test (see Procedure 62 on page 358) and acceptance  
test procedures. See LD 31 in the Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311).  
End of Procedure  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 408 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Procedure 74  
Installing and removing the M2616 Display  
on NT2K sets  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal components of telephones,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly by pressing inward at the back of the footstand where  
it meets the base and pulling upward.  
4
5
If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA, unplug the data cable  
from the base telephone jack. Remove the five screws securing the base  
to the telephone. Remove the base and set it aside.  
If the telephone is not equipped with a display, go to step 9. If the  
telephone is equipped with a display, go to step 6.  
Removing the display board  
6
The display board is located at the left center of the telephone. Disconnect  
the display ribbon cable from the display board. Remove the small  
mounting screw from the board. Grasp the board firmly on each end and  
pull upward to remove it. To replace it, go to step 9.  
Removing the display  
7
The power supply board is located on the left side of the telephone.  
Remove the two small screws from the power supply board (near the top)  
and set them aside. Grasp the board firmly on each side. Carefully work  
the board loose until released.  
8
Remove the two or three screws from the display Module. Remove the  
display from the telephone. To install the display, go to step 11.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 409 of 504  
Installing the display board  
9
Place the J1 connector of the display board over the P4 pins of the  
telephone (see Figure 77 on page 409). Press down slowly until J1 slides  
onto the P4 pins and is firmly seated.  
Figure 77  
Connecting the cable to the display board  
553-AAA0647  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 410 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
10 Insert the self-tapping Phillips-head screw supplied with the display into  
the mounting hole (near the top). Tighten firmly with a #1 Phillips  
screwdriver.  
Installing the display  
11 Place the display face-down near the top of the telephone and align the  
two mounting holes of the display with the mounting holes in the  
telephone.  
12 Insert two self-tapping Phillips-head screws from the faceplate into the  
mounting holes; tighten them firmly with a #1 Phillips screwdriver.  
13 Install the power supply board (see Procedure 71 on page 397). This step  
is not necessary on the M2616 unless there are other hardware options.  
14 Fold the ribbon cable near the connector to align it with the J2 pins on the  
display board, ensuring that the notch on the ribbon cable is facing toward  
the display board. Carefully work the ribbon cable connector onto the J2  
pins until firmly seated. Route the cable flat beside the power supply  
board, gathering excess cable under the display. Be careful not to press  
the cable beneath the alignment posts or studs of the base. See Figure 77  
on page 409.  
Note: Do not allow R5 on the power supply board to become bent during  
this procedure.  
15 Replace the base. If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA,  
reconnect the data cable to the base telephone jack and replace the  
footstand (ensuring that the MPDA or MCA cable does not get pinched  
between the base and the footstand). Make sure the footstand is firmly  
seated in the base.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the display on the outside of the  
bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper identification and  
tracking of the option level of the set.  
16 Tighten all screws, reconnect all cords, and place the telephone in the  
normal operating position.  
17 Perform the self-test (see) and acceptance test procedures. See LD 31 in  
the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 411 of 504  
Procedure 75  
Installing NT2K28AA displays on  
NTZK or NT2K sets  
Follow this procedure to add an NT2K28xx display to M2008 and M2616  
telephones.  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal components of telephones,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
Opening the Telephone  
1
Disconnect and remove all cords (including the handset) from the  
telephone.  
2
3
Place the telephone, upside-down, on a padded, level surface.  
Using a #1 Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws from the  
footstand.  
4
5
Carefully remove the footstand from the base. Press inward at the back  
of the footstand where it meets the base and pull upward.  
If the telephone has a Meridian Communications Adapter, unplug its cable  
from the base telephone jack.  
6
7
Loosen all screws on the base of the telephone.  
Remove the base from the telephone.  
Removing the Fillerplate  
8
9
Loosen the screws that hold the fillerplate.  
Remove the fillerplate, being careful not to touch the foam in the speaker  
housing.  
Attaching the Display Module  
10 Position the Display Module as shown in Figure 78 on page 412.  
11 Lower the Display Module into place.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 412 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 78  
Positioning the display module  
553-AAA0644  
12 Insert the fillerplate screws in the Display Module screw holes  
13 Tighten the fillerplate screws.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the display on the outside of the  
bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper identification and  
tracking of the option level of the set.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 413 of 504  
Connecting the Display Module Ribbon Cable  
14 If installed, remove and discard the NT2K0013 daughterboard.  
15 NTZK models: Make sure that the ribbon cable is folded as shown in  
Figure 79.  
Figure 79  
Connecting the Display Module Ribbon Cable, NTZK model  
Colored strip = Pin 1  
Screwpost  
. . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
P2 or P4  
Pin 1  
553-AAA0645  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 414 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
16 NT2K models: Make sure that the ribbon cable is folded as shown in  
Figure 80 on page 414.  
Figure 80  
Connecting the Display Module Ribbon Cable, NT2K model  
Colored strip = Pin 1  
Screwpost  
. . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
P4 M2616 only  
Pin 1  
P2 M2008 only  
553-AAA0646  
17 Make sure the red line on the ribbon cable lines up with the white dot  
beside the connector pins (P2 on an NTZK M2008, J3 on an NT2K  
M2008, and P4 on an M2616) on the motherboard.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 415 of 504  
18 Slide the ribbon cable connector onto the connector pins (P2 on an NTZK  
M2008, J3 on an NT2K M2008, and P4 on an M2616) on the mother  
board.  
CAUTION  
This connection is polarity sensitive.  
19 Ensure that the pins line up with the connector correctly and carefully  
work the connector on until it is firmly seated.  
Reattaching the Base  
20 Make sure the ribbon cable is lying flat and not caught over or under any  
alignment posts or studs on the telephone base. (For the M2616, allow it  
to cover the screw post and do not replace the screw on re-assembly.)  
21 Replace the base.  
22 Insert all screws (except the center screw on the M2616) and tighten  
them.  
Reattaching the Footstand  
23 If the telephone has a Meridian Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) or  
Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA), plug its cable into the jack on  
the telephone base.  
24 Replace the footstand, positioning it firmly on the base.  
25 Insert and tighten all screws.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the display on the outside of the  
bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper identification and  
tracking of the option level of the set.  
Reconnecting the Telephone  
26 Reconnect all cords.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 416 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
27 Turn the telephone right-side-up and place it in a normal operating  
position.  
28 Reconnect the handset.  
End of Procedure  
External Alerter Board  
Use Procedure 76 on page 416 to add an External Alerter Board to the  
M2006, M2008, M2216ACD, or M2616 telephone. See Figure 81 on  
page 418 for information on hooking up the third-party External Alerter  
device.  
Procedure 76  
Installing and removing the  
External Alerter Board  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
Before handling internal components of telephones,  
discharge static electricity from hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on a level,  
solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent damage  
to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly by pressing inward at the back of the footstand where  
it meets the base and pulling upward.  
4
5
6
If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA, unplug the data cable  
from the base telephone jack.  
Remove the four screws securing the base of the telephone to the top  
cover. Remove the base and set aside.  
If the telephone is not equipped with an External Alerter Board, go to step  
8. If replacing an existing External Alerter Board, go to step 7.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 417 of 504  
Removing the External Alerter Board  
7
The External Alerter Board is located at the right center of the telephone.  
Remove the screws from the board. Grasp the board firmly on each end  
and pull upward to remove.  
Installing the External Alerter Board  
8
Place the H1 connector of the External Alerter Board over the P3 pins of  
the telephone (see Figure 71 on page 395 for M2006/M2008; see  
Figure 72 on page 396 for M2616/M2216ACD). Align the mounting hole  
over the mounting post. Carefully work H1 onto the P3 pins until firmly  
seated. Place the self-tapping Phillips-head screw supplied with the  
External Alerter Board into the mounting hole and tighten it with a #1  
Phillips screwdriver.  
9
To signal the External Alerter when the telephone’s handset or speaker is  
active, place the jumpers (AO288529) connecting the two right-most pins  
on the alerter board.  
To signal the External Alerter when the telephone is ringing or buzzing,  
place the jumpers connecting the two left-most pins on the External  
Alerter Board.  
10 If the telephone is not yet equipped with the power supply board, install it  
(see Procedure 70 on page 393 for M2006/M2008; see Procedure 71 on  
page 397 for M2616/M2016S/M2216ACD).  
Note: Do not allow R5 on the power supply board to become bent during  
this procedure.  
11 Replace the base. If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA,  
reconnect the data cable to the base telephone jack and replace the  
footstand (ensuring that the MPDA or MCA cable does not get pinched  
between the base and the footstand). Make sure the footstand is firmly  
seated in the base.  
12 Tighten all screws, reconnect the line cord, and place the telephone in the  
normal operating position.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the External Alerter on the outside of  
the bottom cover of the telephone. This allows proper identification and  
tracking of the option level of the set.  
13 For the connecting block configuration, see Figure 81.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 418 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
14 Perform the self-test (see Procedure 62 on page 358) and acceptance  
test procedures. See LD 31 in the Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311).  
Figure 81  
External Alerter connecting block configuration  
553-AAA0647  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 419 of 504  
End of Procedure  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 420 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Key Expansion Modules  
Follow the steps in Procedure 77 to add one (single) or two (double) Key  
Expansion Modules to the M2616 or M2216ACD telephones.  
Note 1: Have the associated footstand on hand before installing the Key  
Expansion Modules.  
Note 2: Adding a Key Expansion Module to a telephone requires a  
power supply board along with an additional power source (see  
Procedure 70 on page 393 for the M2006/M2008; see Procedure 71 on  
page 397 for the M2616/M2216ACD).  
Procedure 77  
Installing and removing Key Expansion Module(s)  
on the M2616 and M2216ACD telephones  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly from the telephone by pressing inward at the back of  
the footstand where it meets the base and pulling upward.  
Note: If the M2616/M2216ACD is equipped with a Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter (MPDA) or Meridian Communications  
Adapter (MCA), it must be removed and installed into the Key Expansion  
Module footstand. Use Procedure 68 on page 389.  
4
If the telephone is not equipped with a Key Expansion Module(s), go to  
step 7. If replacing the Key Expansion Module(s), go to step 5.  
Removing the Key Expansion Module(s)  
5
Remove the screws from the footstand assembly (where it meets the Key  
Expansion Module), and unsnap the footstand assembly from the Key  
Expansion Module and telephone by pressing inward at the back of the  
footstand where it meets the base and pulling upward.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 421 of 504  
6
Remove the interface cable from the telephone by pressing down on the  
locking tab. If equipped, remove the interface cable from the first Key  
Expansion Module (closest to the telephone).  
Installing the Key Expansion Module(s)  
7
8
9
If the telephone is not yet equipped with the power supply board, install  
the Power Board (see Procedure 71 on page 397).  
Align the bottom of the Key Expansion Module(s) to the bottom of the  
telephone (see Figure 82 on page 422).  
Snap the ribbon cable connector into the bottom interface jack on the Key  
Expansion Module.  
Note: Use the cable supplied with the module. This is a special cable  
required for EMI compliance.  
Snap the other end of the ribbon cable into the interface jack in the  
telephone (left side). Gather the excess cable in the base of the Key  
Expansion Module.  
10 To add a second Key Expansion Module, snap a second ribbon cable  
connector into the bottom interface jack on the second Key Expansion  
Module. Snap the other end of the ribbon cable into the top interface jack  
on the first Key Expansion Module (see Figure 82 on page 422). Gather  
the excess cable in the base of the second Key Expansion Module.  
11 If the telephone is equipped with an MPDA or MCA, reconnect the data  
cable to the base telephone jack. Make sure the MPDA or MCA cable  
(and interface cable) do not get pinched between the base and footstand.  
12 Secure the footstand to the Key Expansion Module(s) and telephone by  
placing the tabs of the footstand into the slots provided on the base of the  
Key Expansion Module and telephone and pressing down. Make sure the  
footstand is firmly seated on the base.  
Note: Use the cable supplied with the module. This is a special cable  
required for EMI compliance. Newer versions of the Key Expansion  
Module use a longer modified cable than was used on earlier versions.  
Ensure that the ribbon cable(s) are not pinched between the footstand  
and mounting posts.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 422 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
13 Insert the three (four if there are two modules) self-tapping, Phillips-head  
screws supplied with the Key Expansion Module into the mounting holes  
in the bottom of the footstand. Tighten firmly with a #1 Phillips  
screwdriver.  
Note: Place the label supplied with the Key Expansion Module(s) on the  
outside of the bottom cover or footstand of the telephone. This allows  
proper identification and tracking of the option level of the set.  
14 Perform the self-test (see Procedure 62 on page 358) and acceptance  
test procedures. See LD 31 in the Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311).  
Figure 82  
Key Expansion Module connections (bottom view)  
Second Key  
First Key  
Set  
Expansion Module  
Expansion Module  
553-AAA0648  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 423 of 504  
Asynchronous Data Option  
The Meridian Modular Telephones can be equipped with an Asynchronous  
Data Option (ADO) to enable a data call to be made using keyboard dialing  
from an attached terminal or personal computer. Voice and data  
communications can be conducted simultaneously without causing any  
mutual interference.  
Functional description  
The ADO is mounted in the telephone and works in conjunction with the  
Digital Interface Chip to provide asynchronous communication up to  
19.2 kbps from an ASCII data terminal or a personal computer to the private  
Integrated Services Network. The ADO appears as Data Communications  
Equipment (DCE) in the terminal and connects to the Data Terminal  
Equipment (DTE) through an RS-232-C connector mounted on the ADO  
printed circuit board.  
The Asynchronous Data Option supports the following:  
•
•
•
Hayes dialing  
Automatic data rate detection at all rates up to 19.2 kbps  
ASCII keyboard dialing (originating data calls to local and remote hosts  
or DTE by using the terminal keyboard)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call origination to local and remote hosts  
Call termination  
Ring Again Capability  
Auto Dial  
Speed Call  
Automatic or Manual answering of incoming data calls  
Manual Modem pooling  
Remote loopback  
Break detection and generation  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 424 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
ADO operating parameters  
Table 68 shows the operating parameters for the ADO.  
Table 68  
ADO operating parameters  
Data type  
ASCII  
Synchronization  
Number of bits  
Parity  
Asynchronous, Start-Stop  
8 bits  
none (unchecked)  
Data rate  
300, 1200, 2400, 4800,  
9600, 19200 bits per second (autobaud)  
Stop bits  
2 bits for 110 bits per second;  
1 bit for all other speeds  
Transmission  
Full duplex  
The ADO supports asynchronous ASCII operation. A data byte is received  
from the terminal or PC, a control byte is added, and the two bytes are  
transferred to the associated line card. In the other direction, two data bytes  
are received from the line card, the control byte is deleted, and the data byte  
is delivered to the terminal in a bit serial format, at the terminal’s bit rate.  
ADO external power supply  
The ADO requires an external power supply in addition to the power from the  
line. See Table 69 on page 425. A 110 V AC 60 Hz, 100 V AC 50/60 Hz, or  
a 220 V AC 50 Hz multi-output power supply unit provides nominal voltages  
of +5 V, +12 V, and –12 V DC. The power supply connects to the back of the  
telephone through a 5-pin Molex power connector.  
If the AC power supply fails, data calls cannot be processed. All external  
power supplies are equipped with short circuit and thermal shutdown  
protection.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 425 of 504  
Table 69 lists the input and output requirements for the ADO external power  
supply.  
Table 69  
I/O requirements for ADO external power supply  
North American version  
NPS50220-03L5  
Multi-output external power supply  
(A0336823), UL listed and CSA approved  
57–63 Hz 115–132 V AC  
Input:  
Output:  
+5 V DC, 1.0 A (pin 3 for supply, pin 2 for return)  
+12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 6 for supply, pin 1 for return)  
–12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 4 for supply, pin 1 for return)  
Japanese version  
NPS50220-03L8  
Multi-output external power supply  
(A0336891), Japan Standard (“T” Mark)  
47–63 Hz 85–115 V AC  
Input:  
Output:  
+5 V DC, 1.0 A (pin 3 for supply, pin 2 for return)  
+12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 6 for supply, pin 1 for return)  
–12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 4 for supply, pin 1 for return)  
European version  
NPS50220-03L5  
Multi-output external power supply  
(A0336166), conforming to NPS50561 general  
requirements and UL1012  
Input:  
57–63 Hz 200–240 V AC  
Output:  
+5 V DC, 1.0 A (pin 3 for supply, pin 2 for return)  
+12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 6 for supply, pin 1 for return)  
–12 V DC, 200 mA (pin 4 for supply, pin 1 for return)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 426 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 83 shows a block diagram of the ADO and an M2317 telephone.  
Figure 83  
Block diagram of ADO and M2317 telephone  
Data Communications Option  
CS 1000  
/ Meridian 1  
M2000  
Telephone  
EIA  
Micro  
Processor  
Isolation  
DSIC  
ISDLC  
RS-232  
Drivers  
Receivers  
QPC578  
CODEC  
External  
Power  
Supply  
+12 V  
12 V  
+5 V  
Commercial A.C. Power Supply Available  
for 110V ac 60 Hz, 100V ac 50/60 Hz, or  
220 V ac 50 Hz.  
553-AAA2031  
See the Asynchronous Data User Guide and the M2317 Quick Reference  
Card, for more information on ADO operation.  
M2317 Data Option  
If an existing digital telephone was not originally equipped with the Data  
Option, or if the existing Data Option has become defective, that option can  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 427 of 504  
be added or replaced. Procedure 78 explains how to install the Data Option  
for the M2317 telephone.  
CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES  
CMOS devices inside the telephone can be damaged  
by electrostatic discharge. Before opening any  
M2317 telephone, discharge your hands and tools by  
touching any grounded metal surface or conductor.  
Procedure 78  
Installing the M2317 data option  
1
Remove the handset, and place the telephone upside down on a level  
workplace (a desktop, for example).  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Loosen and remove five screws in the base of the telephone, lifting the  
base upward.  
4
If the telephone is not equipped with the ADO, proceed with step 5.  
If the telephone is equipped with a defective ADO, carefully disconnect  
the ribbon cable connector from the header connector in the digital printed  
circuit board. Loosen and remove the two self-tapping screws that fasten  
the ADO to the telephone base and remove the defective ADO. Proceed  
with step 6. See Figure 84 on page 429.  
5
6
Remove the breakout section in the rear of the telephone base by tapping  
it with the handle of a small screwdriver.  
Place the black plastic connector shroud over the RS-232-C interface  
connector.  
Note: It is not possible to install the shroud after the board has been  
inserted in the telephone base.  
7
8
Tip the circuit board up and insert it, connector end first, under the tabs in  
the base. Position it over the molded locating pins; then lower the board  
completely into position in the telephone base. Use the three slotted,  
self-tapping screws supplied with the board and install them through the  
mounting holes. Tighten the screws.  
Plug the ribbon cable connector into the header connector, located on the  
existing circuit board of the telephone (mounted on the faceplate  
assembly). Only one such connector is located on the telephone’s circuit  
board. Make sure the connector is snug.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 428 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
9
Reassemble the telephone by placing the base section on the faceplate  
section. Reinstall the five screws.  
10 Tighten the screws, reconnect all cords, and place the telephone in its  
former position.  
11 Refer to Procedure 79 to connect the power supply and data terminal to  
the ADO.  
End of Procedure  
Procedure 79  
Installing the M2317 data terminal  
1
Connect the RS-232-C interface connector from the data terminal to the  
matching header connector in the back of the telephone. See Figure 84  
on page 429.  
2
Insert the two captive screws in the connector body into the threaded  
holes in the header connector. Secure them tightly to prevent accidental  
disconnection during data terminal operation.  
3
4
Insert the keyed power supply plug securely into the 5-pin power  
connector located to the right of the RS-232-C connector.  
Plug the wall transformer into the nearest AC outlet. The data terminal is  
now operational.  
Note 1: If an ADM3, ADM5, or ADM11 terminal is used in conjunction  
with the RS-232-C connector in the Asynchronous Data Option, pin 22 in  
the RS-232-C cable must be disconnected. These ADM terminals will go  
into test mode if this pin is not disconnected.  
Note 2: A special 9-pin connector is required to connect the Apple  
Macintosh to the RS-232-C connector in the Meridian Modular Telephone  
Asynchronous Data Option. The connections are shown in Table 70 on  
page 429.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 429 of 504  
Figure 84  
M2317 data terminal and Data Option power supply connection  
GND (+12 V Return)  
+5 V Supply  
+12 V  
+5 V Common  
–12 V  
6
4 3 2 1  
RS-232-C interface  
connector (25 pins)  
5-pin power connector  
for data communications  
option Power Supply  
Exit port for telephone line  
and handset free unit cords  
553-AAA635  
Table 70  
Connections for the Apple Macintosh to the M2317  
Asynchronous Data Option (ADO)  
9-pin connector  
(from terminal)  
25-pin (RS-232-C) connector  
(at ADO port)  
Pin 3  
Pin 5  
Pin 9  
to  
to  
to  
Pin 7  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Note: Strap pins 4 and 5 and pins 6, 8, and 20 together.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 430 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Table 71  
RS-232-C signals and associated pin numbers for M2317 telephones  
Circuit designation  
Signal source  
Pin  
number  
EIA  
AA  
BA  
BB  
CA  
CB  
CC  
AB  
CD  
CE  
Common  
CCITT  
DTE  
X
DCE  
Name  
101  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
102  
108.2  
125  
1
2
X
Frame ground  
Transmit data  
Receive data  
Request to send  
Clear to send  
Data set ready  
Signal ground  
Data terminal ready  
Ring indicator  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
GND  
DTR  
RI  
3
X
4
X
5
X
X
6
7
X
X
20  
22  
X
Meridian Communications Unit  
The Meridian Communications Unit (MCU) provides a stand-alone version  
of the Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA).  
Functional description  
The Meridian Communications Unit (MCU) enables data to be transmitted  
and received using PSDS, over either the public network or a private network.  
The MCU, which replaced the QMT21C, is designed for domestic and  
international use, with transmission speeds up to 19.2 kbps asynch and  
64 kbps synch, integrated display, and self diagnostics.  
The MCU supports autodialing, ring again, and speed calling, as well as  
autobauding and automatic parity detection. The MCU can be used for the  
following:  
•
Video conferencing  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 431 of 504  
•
•
•
•
LAN bridging  
Bulk data/PC file transfer  
Dial back-up  
Host connectivity  
The MCU fully complies with RS-232C and can be configured as DCE or  
DTE to connect to a terminal, printer, or fax machine.  
Unlike the MCA, the MCU provides a dedicated call key and call progress  
tones. The MCU also enables smart modem pooling.  
The MCU supports the DM-DM, T-Link, V.25 bis, and PSDS interfaces as  
well as the RS-232C, CCITT V.35, CCITT V.24, and RS570/RS3449 (with  
different cables) interfaces. It complies with V.28 for European approval.  
Refer to Meridian Communications Unit and Meridian Communications  
Adapter: Description, Installation, Administration, Operation  
(553-2731-109) or Meridian Communications Unit User Guide and Meridian  
Communications Adapter Reference Guide for detailed information on this  
feature.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 432 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Wall mounting  
The M2006, M2008, M2616, and M2016S telephones are equipped with a  
reversible footstand that allows for wall mounting. The wall-mount clip  
should be purchased and inserted in the handset well to hold the handset  
securely in place on wall-mounted telephones. Meridian Modular Telephones  
can be hung on the wall with an installed display or Key Expansion Module.  
Note: The footstand cannot be reversed when the Meridian  
Programmable Data Adapter or Meridian Communications Adapter is  
equipped, so telephones with data cannot be wall mounted. Additionally,  
some wall plates are too deep to allow for wall mounting on top of the  
plate. In these cases, mount the telephone on the wall next to the plate.  
An additional clip is provided for wall mounting the telephone. This clip is  
attached to the switchhook rest to prevent the handset from slipping when  
mounted on the wall.  
Procedure 80  
Wall mounting instructions for Meridian Modular Telephones  
1
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to movable keys and the telephone face.  
2
3
Disconnect all cords from the telephone.  
Remove the two screws from the footstand assembly and unsnap the  
footstand assembly by pressing inward at the back of footstand where it  
meets the base, and pulling upward.  
4
Rotate the footstand 180° and snap the footstand back into place on the  
telephone bottom cover. Make sure the footstand is firmly seated on the  
base of the telephone.  
5
6
7
Tighten all screws and replace all cords.  
Insert the wall-mounting clip in the switchhook rest.  
Mount the telephone on the wall using the wall-mount holes provided on  
the bottom of the footstand.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 433 of 504  
Troubleshooting  
Use Table 72 to check problems encountered when installing Meridian  
Modular Telephones and their options.  
Table 72  
Troubleshooting Meridian Modular Telephones (Part 1 of 5)  
Symptom  
Solution  
Telephone does not work.  
1
2
Unplug the line cord from the telephone and plug it  
back in.  
If the telephone uses external power, make sure the  
transformer or closet power supply is properly  
connected and that the power supply board is  
properly installed.  
If the telephone does not use external power, make  
sure that jumpers are placed connecting the bottom  
two sets of pins on the P1 connector on the main  
circuit board.  
All LCDs flash and telephone  
does not function.  
1
2
1
2
Press the Release (Rls) key.  
Unplug the line cord from the telephone and plug it  
back in.  
Telephone wobbles.  
Ensure that all cords are properly routed through  
channels in the footstand.  
Check that the footstand is firmly seated on the  
telephone.  
3
1
Ensure that all feet are firmly seated in the footstand.  
Display does not work.  
Unplug the line cord from the telephone and plug it in  
again.  
2
Ensure that the transformer is plugged in or the closet  
power is connected (M2008 only).  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Page 434 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Table 72  
Troubleshooting Meridian Modular Telephones (Part 2 of 5)  
Symptom  
Solution  
3
4
Ensure that the power supply board is installed  
properly (M2008 only).  
Display does not work. (cont.)  
Check that the display ribbon cable is properly  
connected to the display board and has not been  
pinched.  
5
6
Ensure that the display board is installed correctly  
and held securely with a mounting screw.  
M2006, M2008, M2616 – ensure that ADD Class of  
Service is configured in LD 11. See the Software  
Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).  
There is no response when you  
type <CR> or AT at the terminal.  
1
2
3
Press the P key and dial 28 to make sure you are in  
terminal mode.  
Make sure the PC or terminal’s has power and is  
online.  
If the equipment connected to the MCA is not  
configured as Data Terminal Equipment, it is  
necessary to connect using a null modem cable.  
4
5
Make sure the MCA is receiving external power.  
Check to see that the power cables are connected  
properly and the external power supply is running.  
If there is a display on the telephone, press the P key  
and dial 63 to get into EIA Monitor mode. Be sure the  
MCA is receiving signals from the terminal by  
watching the display while entering carriage returns  
on the keyboard. If the indicator flashes, the  
connection is correct. If not, check the cable to make  
sure it is the standard RS-232 and is properly  
connected.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 435 of 504  
Table 72  
Troubleshooting Meridian Modular Telephones (Part 3 of 5)  
Symptom  
Solution  
6
Press the P key and dial 62 to ensure that the MCA is  
in the asynchronous mode. Press the P key and dial  
20 to change to the asynchronous mode.  
7
Press the P key and dial * to ensure that the MCA is  
in the idle mode.  
The prompt CALL  
CONNECTED. SESSION  
STARTS is followed by  
RELEASE.  
Check the configuration parameters of the far end data  
device. If they do not match those of the MCA, the call will  
be dropped. Change the parameters of your MCA to match.  
Garbled prompts are sent to  
your terminal when you type  
<CR>.  
Enter a period ( . ) followed by <CR> to perform an  
autoparity.  
You are connected to a host  
computer, but get no response  
when you try to log on.  
First, release the call. Turn on Remote Loopback and make  
the call again. Type some characters at the terminal. If the  
characters echo back and appear on the terminal, the  
problem is with the far end data device. If the characters do  
not appear on the terminal, the problem is with the MCA.  
Contact the telephone system administrator.  
You try to make a data call from  
the initial prompt (or Main menu)  
in keyboard dialing. You see the  
prompt CALLING.  
First, hold down the break key(s) for two seconds, enter  
<CR>, and try again to make the data call. If the problem  
persists, the MCA is probably disabled. Contact the  
telephone system administrator.  
MCA does not operate at all.  
1
Check the LED in the back of the telephone to see if it  
is flashing. If the LED is steadily lit, the MCA needs to  
be configured in the system, or it may be bad. If the  
LED is not lit, the MCA requires external power.  
2
3
Make sure the cable from the terminal or PC is  
connected to the MCA.  
Check the data parameters for the display.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 436 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Table 72  
Troubleshooting Meridian Modular Telephones (Part 4 of 5)  
Symptom  
Solution  
4
5
6
Be sure the transformer is plugged in, or the closet  
power is connected.  
Be sure the cable between the MCA and the  
telephone is connected and has not been pinched.  
Be sure the power card is installed correctly. Verify  
that the jumper settings are correct for either RS-232  
or V.35 (whichever you are using).  
Key Expansion Module does  
not work.  
1
2
3
4
Unplug and plug in the line cord.  
Ensure that the transformer is plugged in or that the  
closet power supply is connected.  
Ensure that the power supply board is installed  
properly.  
Make sure that the ribbon cable connecting the  
telephone and the Key Expansion Module is routed  
properly and is not pinched.  
External Alerter does not work.  
1
2
3
Ensure that the External Alerter Board is installed  
properly.  
Check that connections between the alerting device  
and the telephone connecting block are correct.  
Make sure that the jumpers are placed on the pins on  
the External Alerter Board as described in  
Procedure 76 on page 416.  
4
Ensure that the transformer is plugged in or the closet  
power is connected.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Page 437 of 504  
Table 72  
Troubleshooting Meridian Modular Telephones (Part 5 of 5)  
Symptom  
Solution  
5
Ensure that the power supply board is installed  
properly.  
Note 1: If the pseudorandom pattern 511 data is idle, the telephone keypad dialing is  
inoperative. Use the release key to clear this condition.  
Note 2: If using an RS-232 cable to connect the MCA to an ADM3/5 terminal, be sure that pin  
22 is disconnected.  
Note 3: Change the baud rate before changing the mode from synchronous to asynchronous.  
Note 4: Some terminals may drop DTR with the break. If this happens, RELEASE is not  
displayed.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 438 of 504 Appendix C: Meridian Modular Telephones add-on modules installation  
Figure 85  
Flowchart for troubleshooting MCA  
Power up  
Attach  
RS-232 cable  
to DTE  
Distinctive flash  
LED lit  
LED lit  
LED check  
MCA bad  
Telephone bad  
(A44-A64 interface check)  
AT  
<cr>  
No AT  
echo  
No menu  
<cr>  
P66  
KBD  
<cr>  
MCA  
bad  
No menu  
Enter number or  
H for help  
P28 (Note)  
<cr>  
Set to remote loopback mode  
M <cr>  
R <cr>  
Note: If equipped with display,  
check with P62 whether it is  
Terminal mode or Host mode.  
Remote loopback: Y <cr>  
Q <cr>  
or program P38 (when  
equipped with display)  
<cr>, dial data DN  
Call connected  
Type few characters  
Echoes characters  
MCA bad  
No echo  
553AAA0649  
MCA good  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
458  
Page 439 of 504  
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439  
Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441  
Firmware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441  
Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441  
Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442  
Housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443  
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453  
Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453  
Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453  
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454  
Line engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454  
Data communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458  
Data characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458  
Note: This section is for reference only. The M2317 telephone is  
manufacture discontinued and no longer available.  
Introduction  
The M2317 Telephone can provide simultaneous voice and data  
communications. It connects to the system using digital transmission. The  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Page 440 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
M2317 Telephone is intended for professionals and managers, and secretaries  
in group answer positions. It interfaces with the system through the Digital  
Line Card (DLC). It is connected to the switching equipment through a  
two-wire loop carrying two independent 64 kb/s Time Compressed Multiplex  
(TCM) channels with associated signaling channels. One of the two TCM  
channels is dedicated to voice, and the other to data traffic.  
The M2317 telephone has the following features:  
•
A built-in, two-line (40 characters per line) Liquid Crystal Display  
(LCD) screen and integrated Handsfree.  
•
A telephone line cord and the handset cord equipped with standard  
modular connectors at each end, that enables quick replacement when  
required.  
The M2317 Telephone is equipped with a microphone and speaker to permit  
Handsfree operation. Figure 86 shows the M2317 Telephone.  
Figure 86  
M2317 Telephone  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 441 of 504  
Feature description  
Firmware features  
Firmware is chip-dependent and cannot be changed or altered on site. As a  
general rule, all firmware is on ROM microchips. Firmware is built into the  
M2317 telephone and the CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems.  
Firmware functions  
The following functions are performed by firmware in the M2317 Telephone:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Predial  
Last Number Redial  
Saved Number  
Redial Saved Number  
Timer  
Time and Date  
Call Processing  
Software features  
Downloading  
All information related to the programmable keys must be downloaded into  
the M2317 RAM memory through the DLC.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 442 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Soft keys are automatically defined for the telephone based on COS, data base  
or package restrictions. Soft keys work only in conjunction with the LCD  
display screen.  
Table 73  
M2317 data features  
Data features  
M2317  
DTE Keyboard  
Ring Again  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Speed Call  
System Speed Call  
Display  
Call Forward  
X
Call Transfer (Note)  
Autodial  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Last Number Redial  
Save Number  
Redial Saved Number  
Manual modem pooling using keyboard dialing requires only call transfer  
to be defined.  
The Data DN must always be assigned to feature key 10.  
Physical description  
The M2317 Telephone is fully modular. The telephone line cord and the  
handset cord are both equipped with TELADAPT connectors at each end,  
which permits quick replacement when required.  
Housing  
The housing of the M2317 digital telephone consists of a molded plastic base  
and faceplate. The display module and the main circuit board are fastened to  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 443 of 504  
the underside of the faceplate. The Asynchronous Data Option (ADO) circuit  
board, if equipped, is mounted inside the base.  
Keys  
The M2317 Telephone is equipped with 32 keys that are arranged as follows:  
Fixed keys  
These are 16 keys to which a fixed function is assigned. They consist of:  
•
•
•
•
•
12 dial pad keys  
1 Release key  
1 Hold key  
1 Volume control key (with 2 toggle positions)  
1 Handsfree/Mute key (with associated LCD indicator)  
Feature keys  
There are 11 programmable line/feature keys on the telephone faceplate. Each  
has an associated LCD indicator. Lines and features are assigned to these keys  
by service changes in the system software. A maximum of ten voice Directory  
Numbers and specific features such as, Auto Answerback, Call Waiting, Dial  
Intercom, and Display can be assigned.  
Soft keys  
The M2317 telephone has five LCD-labeled soft keys located immediately  
beneath the display screen. Each softkey has a seven-character-wide label on  
the display screen immediately above the key. The labels change as the  
available features change. For example, a softkey could access one feature in  
the idle state and a different feature in the active state.  
The fifth softkey “more…” is used to scroll to a second layer feature menu  
when there are more softkey-assigned features available for the active  
telephone state. Pressing the “more…” key brings up the labels for the  
remaining functions. Softkey label positions on the display screen are fixed  
by the M2317 telephone firmware and cannot be changed by the user.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 444 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Alphanumeric display screen  
The M2317 telephone is equipped with a two-line (40 characters per line  
capacity) LCD screen. The 155 x 15 mm (6 x 0.6 in) LCD screen has a  
capacity of 80 characters (two lines of 40 characters each). The first line  
displays date and time during the idle state, incoming call identification,  
feature icons, user prompts, and messages. The second line displays the labels  
for the soft keys (seven characters per key).  
Handsfree key  
When Handsfree is on, a user can talk to another party without lifting the  
handset. Handsfree can be activated by pressing the Handsfree/Mute key, or  
by pressing a DN key without lifting the handset. The Handsfree/Mute LCD  
indicator shows the status of the Handsfree. Once Handsfree is activated, it  
can be deactivated by picking up the handset or by pressing the Release (RLS)  
key.  
Handsfree operates as if an off-hook operation had been performed. For  
example, when the telephone is idle, pressing the Handsfree/Mute key turns  
on the Handsfree and selects a DN (depending on line selection as assigned  
through COS), enabling the user to make a call. When a call comes into an  
M2317 and the set is ringing, pressing the Handsfree/Mute key turns on the  
Handsfree and enables the user to answer the incoming (ringing) call  
(depending on COS-assigned line selection) without picking up the handset.  
The M2317 provides independent volume adjustments for Handsfree,  
handset, and alerting tone volumes (on-hook dialing and buzz). For detailed  
information on adjusting the volume, refer to the M2317 Quick Reference  
Card.  
LCD indicators  
LCD indicators support the following four key/LCD states:  
Function  
LCD state  
idle  
off  
active  
on (steady)  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 445 of 504  
Function  
LCD state  
ringing (or “feature pending”)  
hold  
flash (60 Hz)  
fast flash (120 Hz)  
The following figures show the M2317 key layout and the different telephone  
states that can be displayed on the M2317 screen.  
Figure 87  
M2317 telephone – key identification  
First line of LCD Display  
Second line of LCD Display  
Soft Key (1)  
Soft Key (2)  
Soft Key (3)  
Soft Key (4)  
Soft Key (5)  
Handsfree  
Mute  
(11)  
Feature Key (5)  
Feature Key (4)  
Feature Key (3)  
Hold  
Rls  
Feature Key (10)  
Feature Key (9)  
1
4
2
5
3
6
9
#
Directory  
Number lens  
7
*
8
0
Feature Key (8)  
Feature Key (7)  
Feature Key (6)  
Feature Key (2)  
Feature Key (1)  
Feature Key (0)  
Note: Numbers in brackets in this illustration are shown for testing and  
identification purposes only. These numbers are not marked on the keys.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 446 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Figure 88  
M2317 screen display – available idle state features  
Displays Month, Day, Hour, Minutes  
MMM DD HH : MM  
more...  
SAVED #  
HELD #  
LAST #  
CANCL  
CHECK  
more...  
TIMER  
FORWARD  
more...  
RLSDATA  
DATA  
FRENCH  
SPEED  
Only one row of softkey labels is displayed at a time. Additional rows are  
accessed by operating the "more..." softkey. The five softkeys are located  
beneath the screen display in line with each displayed label.  
Note 1:  
The HELD # softkey label is displayed on the screen only when there is a  
held conference/transfer call.  
Note 2:  
Note 3:  
The CANCL  
softkey label is displayed on the screen only when the "Ring  
Again" feature has been activated.  
The FORWARD and CHECK  
exclusive; the FORWARD key label changes to CHECK  
forwarded.  
(Check Call Forward) labels are mutually  
Note 4:  
when calls are  
The RLSDATA label is displayed only when there is an active data call.  
Note 5:  
Note 6:  
553-AAA0731  
The - - ->> key is only offered when CPND is used.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 447 of 504  
Figure 89  
M2317 screen display – dialing state  
Displays Month, Day, Hour, Minutes  
MMM DD HH : MM  
3
553-AAA0733  
Figure 90  
M2317 screen display – ringback state  
Displays Day, Month, Hour, Minutes  
DD MMM HH : MM  
Calling  
Party  
3021  
(Ringback  
screen)  
SAVE #  
Note:  
The softkey label display on the called party's screen is the "Idle State" screen.  
553-AAA0734  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 448 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Figure 91  
M2317 screen display – available established state features  
Elapsed Timer (Hours: Minutes : Seconds)  
3021  
H : MM : SS  
CONFER  
TRANSFR  
PARK  
TIMER  
SAVE #  
more...  
more...  
more...  
PRIVREL  
CHARGE  
VMSG  
Note:  
Only one row of softkey labels is displayed at a time. Additional rows  
are accessed by operating the "more... " softkey. The five softkeys  
are located beneath the screen display in line with each designation.  
553-AAA0735  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 449 of 504  
Not all the features listed in Table 74 are provided for each customer. Check  
only those features that are enabled in accordance with the work order.  
The - - ->> symbol display is associated with the Call Party Name Display  
(CPND) feature. CPND must be enabled before it can be accessed.  
Table 74  
M2317 states and associated soft keys (Part 1 of 3)  
Screen state  
State  
Softkey display  
Idle  
On-hook, voice or data  
Saved#, LAST#, CANCL  
--->, more..., HELD#,  
FORWARD, CHECK  
,
,
TIMER, more..., RLSDATA,  
DATA, SPEED  
Dialtone  
Ready to transmit dialed digits  
(voice)  
Saved#, LAST#, CALL  
SPEED#, more..., MESSAGE,  
PICKUP, ACCOUNT, more...  
,
Intercom dialtone  
Ready to transmit dialed digits for  
an intercom call (voice)  
PICKUP  
Dialing  
Transmitting dialed digits  
no soft keys shown  
SAVED#, LAST#  
Private Line dialing  
Transmitting dialed digits on a  
private line (voice)  
Busy  
Called party off-hook (voice)  
Called party is unavailable (voice)  
Called party is ringing (voice)  
RINGAGN, SAVE#  
no soft keys shown  
SAVE#  
Reorder  
Ringback  
ERWT call back  
Initial set of ESN routes not  
available. Set gets Expensive  
Route Warning Tone (voice).  
RINGAGN, SAVE#  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 450 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Table 74  
M2317 states and associated soft keys (Part 2 of 3)  
Screen state  
State  
Softkey display  
Established  
Voice connection made  
CONFER, TRANSFR, TIMER,  
SAVE#, more…, –––>>,  
PARK, PRIVREL, CHARGE,  
more…, MESSAGE, more…  
Intercom established  
Connection made with an  
intercom group (voice)  
CONFER, TRANSFR, TIMER  
CONFER, TRANSFR, TIMER  
no soft keys shown  
Private Line  
established  
Connection made with a private  
line (voice)  
Voice Call/Group Call  
established  
Connection made using a voice  
key or group call key (voice)  
Conference/Transfer  
dialtone  
Special dialtone (voice)  
SAVED#, LAST#, CALL  
SPEED, ACCOUNT  
,
Conference/Transfer  
dialing  
After special dialtone is heard,  
dialing the call (voice)  
no soft keys shown  
RINGAGN, SAVE#  
no soft keys shown  
CONNECT, SAVE#  
SAVE#  
Conference/Transfer  
busy  
After special dialtone is received,  
called party is off-hook (voice)  
Conference/Transfer  
reorder  
After special dialtone is received,  
called party is unavailable (voice)  
Transfer ringback  
Conference ringback  
Consultation  
Used xfer feature, and the called  
party is ringing (voice)  
Used conf feature, and the called  
party is ringing (voice)  
The third party (consulting party  
called by xfer/conf feature) has  
answered the call (voice)  
CONNECT, SWAP  
Consultation Hold  
The user is talking to the original  
party and the consulting party is  
on hold (voice)  
CONNECT, SWAP  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 451 of 504  
Table 74  
M2317 states and associated soft keys (Part 3 of 3)  
Screen state  
State  
Softkey display  
Established Hold  
User status  
Call held by other party (voice)  
no soft keys shown  
no soft keys shown  
Leave telset msg for set’s status  
(voice)  
Display  
The user has operated the feature  
key “DSP” to display the speed/  
system speed call numbers (voice  
or data)  
SPEED#, EXIT  
Program  
The user has operated a feature  
key that requires user-input such  
as Auto Dial or Controlled Class of  
Service (COS)  
no soft keys shown  
Data call initiation  
The user pressed data DN key to  
make a data call (data)  
CALL  
SAVED#, LAST#  
, SPEED#,  
Data call dialing  
Data call busy  
Transmitting dialed digits (data)  
Called party off-hook (data)  
Called party is unavailable (data)  
Called party is ringing (data)  
no soft keys shown  
RINGAGN, SAVE#  
no soft keys shown  
SAVE#  
Data call reorder  
Data call ringback  
Data call ERWT call  
back  
Initial set of routes not available.  
Set gets Expensive Route  
Warning Tone (ERWT).  
RINGAGN, SAVE#  
Data call established  
Connection made (data)  
SAVE#  
Asynchronous Data Option  
See “Asynchronous Data Option” on page 423 for more information on ADO  
requirements.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 452 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Software requirements  
All information related to the programmable keys must be downloaded into  
the M2317 RAM memory through the DLC or ISDLC. Downloading to the  
telephone is performed when the system is loaded or when a telephone is  
enabled.  
Soft keys are automatically defined for the telephone based on Class of  
Service (CLS), database, or package restrictions. Soft keys work only in  
conjunction with the LCD display screen.  
Table 75 lists the data features supported by the M2317 firmware.  
Table 75  
M2317 data features  
Data features  
M2317  
DTE Keyboard  
Ring Again  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Speed Call  
System Speed Call  
Display  
Call Forward  
X
Call Transfer (Note 1)  
Autodial  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Last Number Redial  
Save Number  
Redial Saved Number  
Note 1: Manual modem pooling using keyboard dialing requires only call  
transfer to be defined.  
Note 2: The Data DN must always be assigned to feature key 10.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 453 of 504  
Specifications  
The following specifications govern the safety and performance of the  
Meridian M2317 Telephone, and outline the environmental conditions under  
which this performance is achieved.  
Safety considerations  
Shock and fire hazards  
For protection against electrical shock, energy hazards, or fire hazards, the  
telephone meets the following specifications:  
CSA, C22.2 No. 0.7 – M1985  
UL 1459, relevant sections  
Overvoltage protection  
The M2317 telephone meets the specifications detailed by CSA, C22.2 No.7,  
paragraph 6.9.3.  
Environmental considerations  
Temperature and humidity  
Operating state:  
Temperature range  
0° to 50° C (32° to 122°F)  
0° to 40° C (32° to 104°F) with Data Option  
Relative humidity  
5% to 95% from 4° to 29°C (39° to 84° F)  
noncondensing  
5% to 34% from 29.5° to 49°C (85° to 120°F)  
noncondensing  
Storage:  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
–20° to 70° C (–4° to 158° F)  
5% to 95% from –20° to 29°C (–4° to 84°F)  
noncondensing  
5% to 15% from 29.5°C to 66°C (85° to 150°F)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page 454 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Dimensions and weight  
The M2317 digital telephone has the following dimensions:  
depth  
226.5 mm (9 in)  
272.0 mm (10.1 in)  
27.5 mm (1.1 in)  
73.5 mm (2.9 in)  
width  
height (front)  
height (rear)  
Excluding the power supply and the NT1F09AC Asynchronous Data Option  
board, the M2317 weighs approximately 1.4 Kg (3 lb). With the Data Option  
installed, the telephone, excluding power supply and data cable, weighs  
approximately 1.56 Kg (3.5 lb).  
Line engineering  
The M2317 digital telephones operate to their full potential through twisted  
pair wiring on transmission lines selected by the rules given in “Digital  
telephones line engineering” on page 289 &c. The maximum permissible  
loop length is 1067 m (3500 ft.) of 22 or 24 AWG or 760 m (2500 ft.) of 26  
AWG standard twisted wire with no bridge taps or load coils.  
The 1067 m (3500 ft.) loop length requires the use of a Digital Line Card  
(DLC) or an Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) NT8D02, or  
later.  
Power requirements  
The M2317 digital telephone uses loop power for all circuits requiring +10 V.  
To satisfy the power requirements for those circuits on a maximum loop, as  
defined in “Digital telephones line engineering” on page 289, 60mA of  
13.5 V DC must be available at the telephone. The line card must have  
compatible voltage and source resistance to meet these requirements.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 455 of 504  
Logic and other circuitry requiring +5 V is powered from an external,  
regulated +5 V DC supply when the data option is not installed. The external  
power supply must meet the following specifications:  
Input:  
95–129 V AC, 60 Hz  
Output:  
+5 V DC, + or –5%, 300 mA  
10 mV maximum RMS ripple  
Cord:  
Case:  
2.5 m (8 ft.) of 20 AWG wire mating to a Switchcraft 722A  
connector  
Wall-mounted, CSA and UL approved.  
Operational within 0°C (32°F) and 50°C (122°F)  
temperature limits  
Impedance: Greater than 10 M¾ to ground  
The external power supply, in all cases where no Asynchronous Data Option  
is installed, is connected to the mating connector mounted in the rear of the  
M2317 telephone. It covers the area where the RS-232-C interface connector  
would be located.  
Note: If the Asynchronous Data Option is installed, an external,  
multi-output data power supply is required. Refer to NPS50220-03L5.  
See “Asynchronous Data Option” on page 423 for more information on  
ADO requirements.  
The data option power supply connector plugs into the back of the telephone  
next to the RS-232-C interface connector. Data option installation requires  
the removal of the telephone power supply connector.  
The NPS50220-03L5 power supply meets the following specifications:  
•
•
•
•
•
AC input voltage: 105 - 132 V AC  
Input line frequency: 57 - 63 Hz  
Operating temperature: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)  
Operating humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing  
Storage temperature: -40° to 70°C(-40° to 158°F)  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 456 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Figure 92  
M2317 telephone cross-connections  
Cross-connect Block  
PE Shelf  
Line Pack  
Pack Connector  
TELADAPT  
Connecting Block  
G
R
T0  
Tip  
26  
T0  
R0  
(W-BL)  
Line Cord  
to Telephone  
Ring  
R0  
1
(BL-W)  
Unit 0  
T1  
R1  
28  
3
T1  
R1  
(W-G)  
(G-W)  
To Telephone  
Unit 1  
Unit 6  
T6  
R6  
T6  
R6  
38  
13  
(BK-G)  
(G-BK)  
To Telephone  
To Telephone  
T7  
R7  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
(BK-S)  
(S-BK)  
Unit 7  
Part of Shelf  
Wiring Harness  
Shelf Connector  
Part of multi-pair Cable  
553-1291  
•
•
Output voltages:  
+5 V DC at 1.0 A  
-12 V DC at 200 mA  
+12 V DC at 200 mA  
Case dimensions: 178 x 102 x 76 mm (7 x 4 x 3 in.)  
The NPS50220-03L5 is equipped with an internal thermal and short circuit  
protection.  
Whenever the external power supply fails (due to failure of the power utility),  
the M2317 Telephone assumes Plain Ordinary Telephone Service (POTS)  
status. At this time the telephone is capable of receiving and originating calls  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Page 457 of 504  
on the prime DN, and of giving the usual alerting tones (ringing). It will not  
support the Display screen, soft keys, feature keys, Handsfree, or data  
facilities while in POTS status.  
Figure 93  
Block diagram of M2317  
Cross-connect Block  
PE Shelf  
Line Pack  
Pack Connector  
TELADAPT  
Connecting Block  
G
R
T0  
R0  
Tip  
26  
1
T0  
R0  
(W-BL)  
(BL-W)  
Line Cord  
to Telephone  
Ring  
Unit 0  
T1  
28  
3
T1  
R1  
(W-G)  
(G-W)  
To Telephone  
R1  
Unit 1  
T6  
T6  
R6  
38  
13  
(BK-G)  
(G-BK)  
To Telephone  
To Telephone  
R6  
Unit 6  
T7  
T7  
R7  
40  
16  
(BK-S)  
(S-BK)  
R7  
Unit 7  
Part of Shelf  
Wiring Harness  
Shelf Connector  
Part of multi-pair Cable  
553-1291  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 458 of 504 Appendix D: M2317 telephone  
Data communication  
The M2317 can be equipped with an Asynchronous Data Option which will  
permit the use of either the telephone's dial pad or the feature keys to place  
and terminate data calls in the asynchronous mode. The Data Option also  
supports keyboard dialing from the data terminal when that terminal operates  
in the asynchronous mode.  
The Asynchronous Data Option is equipped with a dialing feature which  
enables the user to originate data calls to local and remote Data Terminal  
Equipment (DTE) directly from a data terminal keyboard or personal  
computer. The dialing feature, in conjunction with the communications  
firmware provided with the Data Option, supports most of the HAYES  
Smartmodem dialing features. Terminal emulation packages can also be used  
with the dialing feature.  
Data characteristics  
The M2317 Asynchronous Data Option communicates with Data Terminal  
Equipment (DTE) having characteristics as follows:  
Data type  
ASCII  
Synchronization  
Number of Bits  
Parity  
Asynchronous, Start-Stop  
8 bits  
none (unchecked)  
Data rate  
300, 1200, 2400, 4800,  
9600, 19200 bits per second (autobaud)  
Stop bits  
2 bits for 110 bits per second;  
1 bit for all other speeds  
Transmission  
Full duplex  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
492  
Page 459 of 504  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820  
telephones  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
Feature description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460  
M3110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460  
M3310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463  
M3820. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464  
Meridian digital telephones used with a headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466  
Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466  
Fixed keys (same for all three models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468  
Additional feature keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471  
Programmable Feature keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471  
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472  
Terminal options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472  
Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . 473  
Brandline Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473  
Key Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474  
Meridian Communications Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474  
Configuration and installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474  
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480  
Installing hardware options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486  
Environmental and safety considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page 460 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Line engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487  
Local alerting tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488  
Note: This section is for reference only. The M3110, M3310, and  
M3820 sets are manufacture discontinued and no longer available.  
Feature description  
The Meridian European Digital telephones series of telephones, which is only  
available in Europe, consists of the following telephones:  
•
•
•
M3110  
M3310  
M3820  
Meridian digital telephones are designed to provide cost-effective integrated  
voice and data communication. These telephones communicate with the  
CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems by using digital transmission over standard  
twisted-pair wiring. They interface with the system using the Integrated  
Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) or the eXtended Digital Line Card  
(XDLC).  
Meridian digital telephones are connected to the system through a two-wire  
loop carrying two independent 64 kbs PCM channels with associated  
signaling channels. One of the two PCM channels is dedicated to voice while  
the other is dedicated to data traffic.  
The telephone interfaces with the Digital Line Card (XDLC) or ISDLC in the  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment shelf of the system. The XDLC supports 16  
voice and 16 data ports. The ISDLC supports eight voice and eight data ports.  
A TN is assigned to each port in the system software.  
M3110  
The M3110 Meridian digital telephone supports the following features:  
•
•
On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
Dedicated release and hold keys  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 461 of 504  
Figure 94  
M3110 Meridian digital telephone  
•
•
Message Waiting and Mute Indicators  
10 Feature System Programmable keys including:  
— 8 system programmable keys  
— Mute key  
— Speaker key  
•
Volume control for:  
— Handset  
— Ringing Tone  
— Buzz Tone  
— On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 462 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Figure 95  
M3310 Meridian digital telephone  
Figure 96  
M3820 Meridian digital telephone  
•
Support for the following terminal options:  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 463 of 504  
— MCA data option to provide integrated voice and data  
— External Alerter for high ambient noise environments  
•
•
Wall-mount ability  
Brand line insert to provide for special company logos  
M3310  
The M3310 Meridian digital telephone supports the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handsfree, On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
Dedicated Release and Hold keys  
Message Waiting and Speaker/Mute Indicators  
Headset Socket  
2 x 24 character display  
10 Feature keys including:  
— Program key  
— 7 system programmable keys  
— Speaker key  
— Mute key  
— Volume control for:  
— Handset/Headset  
— Ringing Tone  
— Buzz Tone  
— On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
— Handsfree  
•
Support for the following set options:  
— MCA data option to provide integrated voice and data  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 464 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
— External Alerter for high ambient noise environments  
— Wall-mount ability  
•
Brand line insert to provide for special company logos  
M3820  
The M3820 Meridian digital telephone supports the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handsfree, On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
Dedicated Release and Hold keys  
Message Waiting and Speaker/Mute Indicators  
Headset Socket  
2 x 24 character display  
20 Feature keys including:  
— Store/program key  
— 13 system programmable keys  
— Handsfree/speaker key  
— Mute key  
— Directory key  
— Caller’s List key  
— Edit key  
— Delete key  
•
Volume control for:  
— Handset/Headset  
— Ringing Tone  
— Buzz Tone  
— On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
— Handsfree  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 465 of 504  
•
•
Directory/Caller’s List with 9 dedicated keys namely:  
— Directory, Callers, Edit, Delete, 4 cursor and Dial  
Support for the following terminal options:  
— MCA data option to provide integrated voice and data  
— External Alerter for high ambient noise environments  
— Wall-mount ability  
— Add-on Key Expansion Modules (2 maximum)  
•
Brand line insert to provide for special company logos  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 466 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Meridian digital telephones used with a headset  
You can use an electret headset in the headset port of the digital telephones  
(M3310 and M3820 only). Alternatively, choose an amplified headset that  
draws power from a battery or AC transformer; power is not provided by the  
telephone. The amplifier must draw less than 400 micro amps from the  
telephone jack.  
The headset should be designed to work with a telephone jack with these  
characteristics:  
Transmit interface: +5 V through 10K DC bias resistance with maximum  
current of 500 micro amps. The differential input impedance is 10K ohms.  
Connects to pins 2 and 5 of the headset jack.  
Receive interface: single ended output with output impedance of 180 ohms.  
Connects to pins 3 and 4 of the headset jack.  
Physical description  
Meridian digital telephones support many general features as illustrated in  
Table 76.  
Table 76  
Meridian digital telephone general features (Part 1 of 2)  
Feature  
M3820  
M3310  
M3110  
Handsfree, On-Hook Dialing, and Group Listening  
Dedicated Release and Hold keys  
Message Waiting and Speaker/Mute Indicators  
Headset Socket  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
20  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
10  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
10  
no  
8
2 x 24 character display  
Feature keys including:  
•
•
Store/program key  
yes  
13  
yes  
7
system programmable keys  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 467 of 504  
Table 76  
Meridian digital telephone general features (Part 2 of 2)  
Feature  
M3820  
M3310  
M3110  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handsfree/speaker key  
Mute key  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
Directory key  
Caller’s List key  
Edit key  
no  
no  
no  
no  
Delete key  
no  
no  
Volume control for:  
•
Handset/Headset, Ringing Tone, Buzz Tone,  
On-Hook Dialing and Group Listening  
yes  
yes  
yes  
•
Handsfree  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
Directory/Caller’s List with dedicated keys for  
Directory, Callers, Edit, Delete, 4 cursor and Dial  
Terminal options:  
•
MCA data option to provide integrated voice and  
data, External Alerter for high ambient noise  
environments, Wall-mount ability  
yes  
yes  
yes  
•
Add-on Key Expansion Modules (2 maximum)  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
Brand line insert to provide for special company logos  
yes  
yes  
Note: The location of the buttons used to activate and interact with these features is shown in  
Figure 97 on page 469.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 468 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Fixed keys (same for all three models)  
Hold  
By pressing the hold key, you can put an active call on hold. Return to the  
caller by pressing the extension key beside the flashing LCD indicator.  
Release (Rls)  
You can terminate an active call by pressing the Rls key or by hanging up the  
handset. The release key is especially useful for disconnecting handsfree and  
headset calls.  
Volume control  
The volume key controls the volume of the handset, the speaker and the  
ringer. Raise the volume by pressing the right side of the bar. Lower it by  
pressing the left side.  
Mute  
When engaged in a call, you can press the mute key. The party(ies) to whom  
you are speaking cannot hear you. This is especially useful when on a  
conference call and you are only listening. When you wish to return to the  
two-way conversation, you must push the mute key again. The mute key  
applies to handsfree, handset and headset microphones.  
Speaker/Handsfree  
The speaker key allows you to activate handsfree and group listening  
features. Handsfree is only available on the M3310 and M3820 models and is  
enabled by the system administrator. If handsfree is not configured at the  
switch, the telephone can only be used to listen.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 469 of 504  
Figure 97  
The location and function of buttons on the Meridian digital telephone  
Program Key†  
LCD Indicators  
Display Module†  
Feature Keys  
Release (Rls) Key  
Message Waiting  
Indicator  
Hold Key  
Speaker  
Speaker/Mute LED  
Speaker Key  
Mute Key  
Edit Key*  
Callers List Key*  
Cursor Keys*  
Directory Key*  
Delete Key*  
Dial Key*  
Main Extension Key  
or Directory Number (DN) key  
† M3310 and M3820 only  
* M3820 only  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 470 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
The table below indicates the mode the terminal is in when the speaker key is  
operated under the various switch and set operations.  
Table 77  
Speaker Key Function  
Handsfree not  
selected at the  
switch  
Handsfree selected  
at the switch -  
Group listening off  
Handsfree selected at  
the switch - Group  
listening On  
MODEL  
M3820  
CPM and primary DN  
key-Speaker LED is  
not illuminated  
HF and Primary DN  
key - speaker LED is  
on when in Handsfree  
mode  
HF, Group listening and  
Primary DN key - speaker  
LED is on when in HF or  
Group Listening mode  
M3310  
M3110  
CPM and Primary DN  
key-Speaker LED is  
not illuminated  
HF and Primary DN  
key - Speaker LED is  
on when in HF mode  
HF, Group Listening and  
Primary DN key -  
Speaker LED is on when  
in HF or group listening  
CPM and Primary DN  
key- Speaker LED is  
not illuminated  
N/A  
Group listening and  
Primary DN key - speaker  
LED is on when in Group  
listening mode.  
Note 3: CPM is Call Process Monitor which enables the user to hear, for  
example, the dial tone in the speaker. Group listening enables the user to  
speak through the handset/headset microphone and one or more parties  
can listen through the speaker, thus hearing both sides of the  
conversation. In Handsfree mode, the user (or group of users) uses both  
the handsfree microphone and speaker.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 471 of 504  
Note 4: Group listening is switched on or off under the program key  
option *1. (M3820 and M3310 only)  
Additional feature keys  
Message Waiting lamp key  
Each telephone has a red message waiting LED just above the hold and Rls  
keys that lights to indicate a message is waiting. This LED is the primary  
message waiting indicator and lets you know that a message is waiting,  
regardless of whether the telephone has a message waiting key/lamp pair.  
You must have Message Waiting allowed Class of Service. See LD 11,  
Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) and Software Input/  
Output: Maintenance (553-3001-511).  
If you do assign a message waiting key/lamp pair, there will be two  
indications of a message waiting:  
— the red Message Waiting LED lights  
— the LCD associated with the Message Waiting key blinks  
Autodial key  
You can assign an Autodial Key that dials the message center (or voice mail  
system) to avoid the double indication or have no key/lamp pair assigned to  
the message center.  
Programmable Feature keys  
Each Meridian digital telephone has a number of programmable keys with  
LCD indicators that can be assigned to any combination of directory numbers  
and features. The M3820 has 13 fully programmable feature keys; the M3310  
has seven, and the M3110 has eight. The lower right-hand key (key 0) is  
reserved for the Primary DN.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Page 472 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
LCD indicators support four key/LCD states:  
Function  
idle  
LCD state  
off  
active  
ringing  
hold  
on (steady)  
flash (60 Hz)  
fast flash (120 Hz)  
Note: An indicator fast flashes when you have pressed a feature key but  
have not completed the procedure necessary to activate the feature.  
Software requirements  
Meridian digital telephones are supported by software. The package number  
for the Meridian digital telephones is (170.) The mnemonic is ARIE. The  
DSET package (88) and the TSET package (89) are required.  
Terminal options  
This section describes the options available for Meridian european digital  
telephones. Table 78 lists the features and optional hardware available for  
each telephone.  
Table 78  
Hardware features and options  
M3820  
M3310  
M3110  
Programmable Feature  
keys  
13  
7
8
Handsfree microphone  
Optional hardware available:  
Key Expansion Module  
x
x
x
Note: In this table, x indicates available features for the telephone type  
listed in the top row.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 473 of 504  
Table 78  
Hardware features and options  
M3820  
M3310  
M3110  
Meridian  
x
x
x
Communications  
Adapter (MCA)  
External alerter  
interface  
x
x
x
x
x
x
Brandline insert  
Note: In this table, x indicates available features for the telephone type  
listed in the top row.  
Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface  
The External Alerter Board provides an interface to standard remote ringing  
devices, such as a ringing unit, installed in a location separate from the  
telephone. The Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface (MEARI)  
is not the remote ringer itself, but provides access to standard, off-the-shelf  
remote ringing devices. The Alerter Board requires additional power. See  
“Power requirements” on page 488.  
You can program the MEARI interface to activate a ringer (or light) when the  
telephone rings or when the telephone is in use (off-hook). A call to any DN  
configured on the telephone triggers the alerter. The MEARI alerts to one  
active call at a time; if the telephone is already active on a call, a second call  
will not activate MEARI.  
For information on installing and setting up the External Alerter, see “Add-on  
modules” in “External Alerter Board” on page 416.  
Brandline Insert  
The telephone contains a removable insert designed to accommodate custom  
labeling. You can order blank Brandline Inserts and have a printer silkscreen  
your company logo on them.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page 474 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Key Expansion Module  
A 22-key unit module can be attached to any M3820 terminal. The extra keys  
can be assigned to any combination of lines and features. You can add up to  
two expansion modules to a terminal. You will need a separate footstand for  
the module(s), one for a single module, one for a double.  
Meridian Communications Adapter  
The Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA) lets you connect your  
telephone to a personal computer or terminal. You can then use your  
telephone to exchange data between your computer and other computers. The  
MCA can be used with all three models.  
Configuration and installation  
Configuration  
Use LD 11 (Meridian Digital Telephone Administration) to configure the  
telephones. All prompts are defaulted (or set as required) except for those  
noted in the tables following:  
LD 11 - M3110 Configuration (Part 1 of 2)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
TYPE  
DES  
CLS  
NEW  
2616  
M2616 set model used  
M3110  
Enter appropriate set identifier  
HFA (HFD)  
NDD  
Group Listening Allowed (Denied)  
No digit display  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
LD 11 - M3110 Configuration (Part 2 of 2)  
Page 475 of 504  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
KEY 08  
NUL  
Keys 8-14 programmed as NUL. If Group Listening is  
denied (CLS HFD), Key 15 is also programmed as NUL.  
09 NUL  
10 NUL  
11 NUL  
12 NUL  
13 NUL  
14 NUL  
If Group Listening is denied (CLS HFD), Key 15 is also programmed as NUL.  
Figure 98  
M3110 Key Designation  
553-AAA0722  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 476 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Table 79  
M3310 Configuration  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
TYPE  
DES  
CLS  
NEW  
2616  
M2616 set model used  
M3310  
HFA (HFD)  
08 NUL  
09 NUL  
10 NUL  
11 NUL  
12 NUL  
13 NUL  
14 NUL  
Enter appropriate set identifier  
Handsfree Allowed (Denied)  
KEY  
Keys 8-14 programmed as NUL. If Handsfree is denied (CLS  
HFD), Key 15 is also programmed as NUL.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 477 of 504  
Figure 99  
M3310 Key Designations  
553-AAA0721  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 478 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Table 80  
M3820 Configuration  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
TYPE  
DES  
CLS  
NEW  
2616  
M2616 set model used.  
M3820  
HFA (HFD)  
AHA  
Enter appropriate set identifier.  
Handsfree Allowed (Denied)  
Automatic Hold Allowed  
DNDD  
CNDA  
CNIA  
Dialed Name Display Denied  
Call Party Name Display Allowed  
Call Number Information Allowed  
Last Number Redial Allowed  
LNA  
KEY  
01 NUL  
Keys 01 programmed as NUL. If Handsfree is denied  
(CLS HFD), Key 15 is also programmed as NUL.  
Note: If short hunt is configured, then Key 01 must be  
configured as an SCR key with the same DN as key 0.  
For MARP to operate with short hunt configured, Key 01  
must be configured as the MARP key.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 479 of 504  
Figure 100  
M3820 Key Designations  
553-AAA0720  
LD 20 – Print Routine  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
TYPE  
DES  
PRT  
2616  
M2616 set model used.  
M3110  
M3310  
M3820  
M3+  
Enter appropriate set identifier Or M3+ to get a list of all  
three set types.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 480 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Installation  
Procedure 81  
Installing Meridian European digital telephones  
Follow this procedure to install the Meridian European digital telephones:  
1
Complete the wiring and cross-connections (loop power) before  
connecting the telephone to the connecting block.  
2
3
Place the telephone on the desk in the normal operating position.  
Place the Rls and Hold key caps on their positions just above the dialpad,  
with the Hold key closest to the handset.  
4
5
Print the directory number on the designation card. Remove the number  
lens from its position underneath the handset, insert the designation card  
and snap the lens into place.  
Print the feature keys on the label strip. Remove the label lens (beside the  
feature keys), insert the label strip and snap the lens into place.  
6
7
Plug the line cord connector into the connecting block.  
Perform the self test and acceptance procedures for Meridian Modular  
telephones (see “Meridian Modular Telephones self-test” on page 358.  
8
Supply the user with a quick reference card.  
End of Procedure  
Installing hardware options  
This section describes procedures for installing the following options:  
Power Board on all models.  
Headset on M3310 and M3820 telephones.  
Wallmount/Desktop Position change.  
•
•
•
For installation of other options (MCA data option, external alerter and key  
expansion modules) see the section on Add-on modules for Meridian  
Modular Telephones (NT2K models) in Appendix C: “Meridian Modular  
Telephones add-on modules installation” on page 371.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 481 of 504  
Procedure 82  
Installing the Power Board  
1 Open the Telephone.  
a. Place the telephone, upside-down, on a padded, level surface.  
b. Using a #1 Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws holding the  
footstand (if fitted).  
c. Disconnect and remove all cords including the handset and headset  
if fitted, from the telephone.  
d. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver and remove the four screws holding the  
base of the telephone.  
2
Install the Power Board.  
a. Remove the cable from the power board including the right angle  
header.  
b. Disconnect the display cable from P4 on the main PCB. Note the  
orientation of this connector.  
c. Place the power board to the left of the main PCB with the widest  
section of the power board nearest the display. Make sure that the  
display cable comes over the power board.  
d. Clip the power board in place, by inserting the right hand side of the  
board under the clip, then push down on the left hand side adjacent  
to the clips provided.  
e. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver and the screw supplied to fasten the  
power board to the front cover of the telephone.  
f. Remove and discard the two links on J8 on the telephone's main  
PCB.  
g. Connect the power board cable (B0247405) to J8.  
h. Note the key to prevent misconnection.  
i. Connect the cable to the header at H1 on the power board as shown  
in the figure below).  
j. Reconnect the display cable to P4.  
Note: Do NOT twist the cable.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 482 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
3
Reassemble the Telephone.  
a. Replace the base cover and make sure that the cables lie flat.  
b. Insert the four screws to secure the base.  
c. Assemble the MCA to the footstand using the two screws provided.  
d. Connect the cable to the 8 way jack on the base of the telephone.  
e. Reconnect all cords to the telephone.  
f. Replace the footstand with the two screws (if previously fitted).  
g. Place the power board label on the footstand for tracking purposes.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 483 of 504  
Figure 101  
Power Board Installation  
553-AAA0723  
Procedure 83  
Adding a Headset (M3310 and M3820 only)  
Use the following procedure to add a headset to a Meridian telephone:  
1
2
Unplug the line cord from the connecting block.  
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top if a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to moveable keys and the telephone face.  
3
Remove the 2 screws from the telephone footstand (if fitted) to separate  
the footstand from the telephone.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 484 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
4
Plug the headset TELADAPT connector into the socket on the base of the  
telephone marked with a headset icon.  
5
6
Route the headset cord through the channels at the side of the telephone.  
Replace the footstand in the same position and tighten both screws (if  
previously fitted).  
7
8
Place the telephone back on the desk in the normal operating position.  
Plug the line cord connector back into the connecting block.  
End of Procedure  
Telephone Positions  
Your Meridian telephone can be installed in three different positions - two  
desktop positions and a wall-mount position. The two desktop positions  
provide two different angles for the telephone on the desktop. The telephone  
is supplied in the steeper of the two positions. Follow Procedure 84 for  
adjustment to the shallow-angel position, and Procedure 85 on page 485 for  
wall mounting.  
Procedure 84  
Adjusting the telephone to the  
desktop shallow-angle position  
The procedure to change to the more shallow angle is as follows:  
1
2
Unplug the line cord from the connecting block.  
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to moveable keys and the telephone face.  
3
4
Remove the 2 screws from the telephone footstand (if fitted) to separate  
the footstand from the telephone.  
Snap the footstand back into place using the alternate slots located closer  
to the back of the set and tighten the screws (if previously fitted).  
5
6
Place the telephone back on the desk in the normal operating position.  
Plug the line cord connector back into the connecting block.  
End of Procedure  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 485 of 504  
Procedure 85  
Wall mounting the telephone  
The procedure to wall mount the telephone by reversing the footstand is as  
follows:  
1
2
Unplug the line cord from the connecting block.  
Remove the handset and place the telephone upside down on top of a  
level, solid work surface covered with soft material or paper to prevent  
damage to moveable keys and the telephone face.  
3
4
5
Remove the 2 screws from the telephone footstand (if fitted) to separate  
the footstand from the telephone.  
Remove the wall-mount clip located inside the footstand and insert the  
clip in the switchhook rest using the holes provided.  
Rotate the footstand 180 degrees, snap the footstand back into place and  
tighten the screws. Note that the footstand must be screwed to the base  
for wall mounting.  
6
7
Mount the telephone on the wall using the wall-mount holes provided on  
the bottom of the footstand.  
Plug the line cord connector back into the connecting block.  
Note 1: The footstand cannot be reversed when the MCA data option or  
key expansion module is equipped so such telephones cannot be wall  
mounted.  
Note 2: An additional clip is provided for wall mounting the telephone.  
This clip is attached to the switchhook rest to prevent the handset from  
slipping when mounted on the wall.  
End of Procedure  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 486 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Specifications  
This section lists the specifications required for Meridian digital telephones.  
Environmental and safety considerations  
All Meridian digital telephones are designed to comply with:  
EN 60950:1992 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment including  
Electrical Business Equipment.  
EN 41003:1993 - Particular Safety Requirements for Equipment to be  
connected to Telecommunication Network.  
Temperature and humidity  
Operating state:  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
0° to 50°C (32° to 104°F)  
5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures  
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity is limited  
to 53 mbar of water vapor pressure.  
Storage:  
Temperature range  
Relative humidity  
–50° to 70°C (–58° to 158°F)  
5% to 95% (noncondensing). At temperatures  
above 34°C (93°F) relative humidity is limited  
to 53 mbar of water vapor pressure.  
Electromagnetic interference  
All the digital telephones are designed to comply with:  
EN 50082-1:1992 - Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic immunity  
standard Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry.  
EN 50081-1:1992 - Electromagnetic Compatibility - Generic emissions  
standard. Generic standard class: Residential, commercial and light industry.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 487 of 504  
Line engineering  
Meridian digital telephones use twisted pair wiring on transmission lines  
selected by the rules given in “Digital telephones line engineering” on  
page 289. The maximum permissible loop length is 3500 ft. (1067 m),  
assuming 24 AWG (0.5 mm) standard twisted wire with no bridge taps. A  
15.5 dB loss at 256 kHz defines the loop length limit. (Longer lengths are  
possible, depending on the wire’s gauge and insulation.) Table 81 gives  
detailed information on loop lengths.  
Table 81  
Loop lengths for Meridian digital telephones  
QPC578 A and B  
QPC578 C +  
NT8D02  
PVC insulated cable (polyvinyl chloride)  
22 or 24 AWG  
100–3000 ft.  
(30.5–915 m)  
0–3500 ft.  
(0–1067 m)  
0–3500 ft.  
(0–1067 m)  
26 AWG  
100–2100 ft.  
(30.5–640 m)  
0–2600 ft.  
(0–945 m)  
0–2600 ft.  
(0–793 m)  
Note 1: No bridge taps or loading coils are allowed.  
Note 2: Effect of line protector at MDF reduces loop length by 500 ft.  
Note: Use only the line cord provided with the telephone. Using a cord  
designed for another telephone could result in damage to the cord.  
Local alerting tones  
Each telephone provides four alerting tones and a buzz sound. The system  
controls the ringing cadence by sending tone-ON and tone-OFF messages to  
the telephone. The alerting tone cadences cannot be changed from the  
telephone but can be altered for individual terminals by software controlled  
adjustments in the system. See Software Input/Output: Administration  
(553-3001-311). All other telephone tones, such as dial tone or overflow, are  
provided by the CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems from a Tone and Digit  
Switch.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Page 488 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Alerting tone characteristics  
The tone frequency combinations are as follows:  
Tone  
Frequencies  
Warble Rate (Hz)  
667 Hz, 500 Hz  
667 Hz, 500 Hz  
5.2  
2.6  
1
2
:
1600 Hz, 2000 Hz  
1600 Hz, 2000 Hz  
5.2  
2.6  
3
4
:
333 Hz, 250 Hz  
333 Hz, 250 Hz  
5.2  
2.6  
3
4
A 500 Hz buzz signal is provided for incoming call notification while the  
receiver is off-hook.  
Power requirements  
The Meridian digital telephones are loop powered. Loop power, originating  
in the ISDLC or the DLC, consists of a 30 V DC power source and assumes  
a 3500 ft. (1219 m) maximum loop length of 24 AWG (0.5 mm) wire and a  
minimum 15.5 V DC at the telephone terminals.  
Note: The loop length limit is defined by a 15.5 dB loss at 256 KHz.  
Longer lengths can be determined using the wire’s gauge and insulation.  
Some configurations of telephones and options need more than basic loop  
power to operate. Table 82 lists the types of Meridian digital telephones and  
shows when additional power is needed to operate the telephone or its  
optional hardware. Power Supply Boards come installed in  
factory-assembled configurations that require additional power.  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 489 of 504  
Note: If a power failure occurs, configurations that require loop power  
will continue to work only if the system has battery backup. Only those  
options that require additional power will cease to function.  
Table 82  
Power requirements, Meridian digital telephones  
Additional power  
Telephone type  
Loop power  
(Power Supply Board)  
M3820  
Terminal, handsfree, headset, key  
expansion  
MCA, External Alerter Interface  
M3310  
M3110  
Terminal, headset, handsfree  
Terminal  
MCA, External Alerter Interface  
MCA, External Alerter Interface  
Power supply board  
The power supply option consists of a power supply board that mounts inside  
the telephone, coupled with an external wall-mount transformer or closet  
power supply that provides power to the power supply board. The power  
supply board receives its power through pins 1 and 6 of the line cord.  
The power supply board connects to the telephone through a 14-pin bottom  
entry connector.  
Local plug-in transformer  
A single winding transformer equipped with a 10 ft. (3 m) cord of 22 AWG  
two-conductor stranded and twisted wire with a modular RJ-11 duplex  
adapter can provide the additional power needed to operate the telephone and  
its options.  
WARNING  
Do not plug any equipment other than the terminal into  
the RJ-11 transformer adapter, as damage to equipment  
can result.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 490 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Figure 102  
Configuration of local plug-in transformer  
553-AAA0725  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Page 491 of 504  
120 V transformer The following minimum specifications must be met by  
this transformer:  
Input voltage  
120 V AC/60 Hz  
No load output voltage  
Voltage at rated current  
29 V AC maximum  
26.7 V AC  
minimum  
Rated load current  
700 mA  
240 V transformer The following minimum specifications have to be met by  
this transformer:  
Input voltage  
240 V AC/50 Hz  
No load output voltage  
Voltage at rated current  
29 V AC maximum  
26.7 V AC  
minimum  
Rated load current  
700 mA  
Note 1: You cannot wall mount the telephone over the wall jack when  
using a transformer because of the size of the RJ-11 adapter. Hang it  
above or to the side of the jack and run the line and power cords to it.  
Note 2: The above-mentioned transformers can also be used with outlets  
identified as 110V or 220V.  
Closet Power Supply  
Closet power can be obtained from an AC transformer for loops of 100 ft.  
(30 m) or less, or a DC transformer for loop lengths of 650 ft. (198 m) or less.  
An equivalent power source can be used but must be UL listed to provide  
isolation of outputs to the terminal. See Figure 103.  
WARNING  
When using closet power, do not plug the TELADAPT  
connector into any equipment other than the Meridian  
digital telephone, as damage to equipment may result.  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Page 492 of 504 Appendix E: M3110, M3310, and M3820 telephones  
Note 1: All terminals must be isolated from the input winding and each  
terminal must be isolated from all other terminal windings. A separate  
winding is required for each terminal, and grounds must not be  
connected.  
Note 2: The QUT1 closet power supply source is not compatible with  
Meridian digital telephones.  
The AC source must be rated at 29 V AC, 700 mA isolated. The DC source  
must be rated at 42 V DC, 300 mA isolated, with current limiting output of 1  
amp.  
Figure 103  
Closet Power Supply configuration  
3
Tip (r)  
2
To IDF  
1
Ring (g)  
4
5
6
6-conductor  
line cord  
from telephone  
W
BL  
Connects to an  
isolated output  
Closet Power Supply  
(Shumway SBI 221-25 or equivalent)  
553-AAA0724  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 493 of 504  
Index  
add-on modules  
BLF/CGM, 33  
Numerics  
16/25-pair cables  
Data Options, 426  
External Alerter Boards, 416  
attendant console connections, 59  
terminal connections, 59  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
key/lamp, 373  
packing and unpacking, 372  
power supply boards, 392, 401  
troubleshooting, 433  
500/2500 telephones  
connecting, 312  
cross-connecting, 313, 315, 316  
designating, 311  
installing, 310  
removing, 310  
wiring, 313  
wall mounting, 432  
ADM terminals, 428  
ADO (Asynchronous Data Option)  
Apple Macintosh connections, 429  
described, 423, 426  
A
A0288529 jumpers, 397  
A0300752 cable, 386  
A0300753 cable, 386  
A0346862 line cords, 373  
A0367601 transformers, 44  
A0408927 cable, 386  
A0408928 cable, 386  
A connectors (IPE), 316  
external power supply, 424  
for M2317, 443, 455  
operating parameters, 424  
power supply connections, 429  
RS-232-C connectors, 428, 430  
AK keystrip, 77  
Alarm indicators, 95  
Alerter  
adjusting speaker volume, 52, 80  
menu, 86  
testing pitch/volume levels, 84  
ACPND (Attendant Call Party Name Display)  
feature, 92  
Active Call Failover, 126  
alerting tones  
M3820, M3310, and M3110 telephones, 487  
active state  
M3820, M3310, M3110, 472  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 106, 330  
Amphenol connectors, 57  
Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA), 150, 377  
description, 375  
Active status message, 55  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page 494 of 504 Index  
Apple Macintosh computers, 428, 429  
B
ASIP  
background noise, 302  
Audio and System Interface Printed circuit  
card, 83  
Barge-In feature, 95, 99  
batteries  
ASIP card  
BLF/CGM, 33  
for headsets, 466  
control gate, 86  
hard reset, 87  
testing installed firmware, 85  
B connectors (IPE), 317  
BK keystrip, 77  
ASM (Attendant Supervisory Module) add-ons, 44  
Data Options, 426  
BLF/CGM (Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics  
Module), 33  
installing, 44  
standoffs, 46, 47  
batteries, 33  
CGM/Mode keys, 53  
connecting, 40  
covers, 38, 41, 42  
ATA (Analog Terminal Adapter), 375  
installing and removing, 377  
Attendant Administration feature, 96  
described, 32  
Attendant Call Party Name Display (ACPND)  
feature, 92  
fastening screws, 36  
installing, 34  
knockout tabs, 39  
removing, 43  
support spacers, 38  
testing functionality of, 42, 84  
volume slider position, 36  
with attendant consoles, 72  
attendant consoles  
BLF/CGM, 33, 35  
covers, 62, 63  
cross-connecting, 69  
designating, 64  
installing, 60  
key/lamp modules, 373  
local controls, 56  
loopback tests, 64  
packing and unpacking, 59  
removing, 61  
Brandline Inserts, 473  
Busy Verify feature, 95, 99  
C
cable attenuation, 305  
cable lengths, maximum, 299  
cable markers, 57  
static discharge ground connections, 60  
wiring, 69  
Attendant End to End Signaling, 95  
Attendant Forward No Answer, 99  
Attendant Intercept display, 92  
Attendant Monitor, 98  
cable pairs, engineering requirements, 290  
cabling, under-carpet  
allowable loop length, 299  
attenuation, 306  
Attendant Supervisory Module (NT7G10AA), 90  
attenuation, cable, 305  
characteristic impedance, 290  
requirements, 290  
Autodial feature, 452  
calculating  
Automatic Logout for Virtual Office, 175  
auxiliary tone channel test, 84  
DC loop resistance, 299  
expected pulse loss, 302  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Page 495 of 504  
Call Forward, 93, 452  
continuity, testing DC, 301  
Contrast menu, 80  
calls  
camped-on, 93  
setting maximum number of waiting, 95  
control gates, conference bridge analog, 86  
control procedure, 86  
Call Waiting indicator, 95  
cords  
Call Waiting status message, 55  
capacitance unbalance, testing, 301  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 373  
and TELADAPT snap-in connectors, 491  
cards  
covers  
DLC (Digital Line Card), 460  
ISDLC (Integrated Services Digital Line  
Card), 460  
attendant consoles, 62, 63  
BLF/CGM, 38, 41, 42  
cross-connections  
CAS (Centralized Attendant Service), 51  
CAS/History File status message, 55  
CCB (Collect Call Blocking), 96  
C connectors (IPE), 318  
attendant consoles, 69  
M2317 telephone, 363  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 121  
custom labeling (logos) with Brandline Inserts, 473  
characteristic impedance  
and junction loss, 307  
under-carpet cabling, 290  
D
data calls capability, 451  
data channels, 460  
CI/CK key/lamp strips, 93  
data communication failures  
M2317 telephone, 365  
CIS (Commonwealth of Independent States), 97  
Clearing the Callers List and Redial List for Virtual  
Office, 175  
Data Options, 426  
data parameters, MCA, 386  
data port, 83  
Clearing the Directory Services Password for  
Virtual Office, 174  
Dataport option, 64  
clock/calendar, real-time, 57  
closet power supplies, 489, 491  
conference bridge analog control gates, 86  
Conference key, 94  
data terminals  
connections, 392, 429  
installing, 428  
RS-232-C connectors, 430  
conferencing feature, 450  
configurations, 77  
DC loop resistance  
calculating, 299  
maximum, 299  
measuring, 306  
connecting blocks, 418  
connections, console, 56  
dead telephones, troubleshooting, 433  
connectors  
designations  
attendant consoles, 60, 61  
IPE, 316  
M2317 telephones, 361  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 114, 356  
attendant consoles, 64  
telephones, 119, 311, 367  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 496 of 504 Index  
Diagnostics menu, 64  
exiting from, 79  
engineering telephone lines  
flowchart, 291  
password-protection, 52, 80  
selecting, 52, 80  
procedure, 289  
environmental and safety considerations  
M2016S telephone, 109  
Diagnostics mode, 81  
diagnostic tests, loop, 300  
Dial 0 display, 92  
M2317 telephone, 453  
M3820, M3310, and M3110 telephones, 486  
M3900 telephones, 185  
dialing failures  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 342  
M2317 telephones, 367  
Exclude Destination key, 94  
Exclude Source key, 94  
digital line cards, 56  
digital lines, enabling, 363  
expected pulse loss, calculating, 302  
digital telephones  
External Alerter Boards, 416  
connecting block configuration, 418  
troubleshooting, 436  
cross-connections, 363  
installing, 361  
packing and unpacking, 355  
self-tests, 363  
External Alerter interface, 473  
trouble-locating procedures, 365  
F
Displays  
fastening screws, BLF/CGM, 36  
cable routing, 407  
for wall mounting, 432  
installing and removing, 405, 408, 411, 416  
troubleshooting, 433, 434  
F connectors (IPE), 317  
feature keys, 94  
modes, 79  
DLC (Digital Line Card), 460  
features  
DN (directory number) designation window, 65  
DTI (Digital Trunk Interface), 97  
assigning to keys, 94  
M2250 attendant console, 31, 89  
modifying, 96  
DTMF (dual tone multifrequency) tones, 95  
permanently assigned to keys, 93  
FI keystrip, 93  
E
finger wheels, 311  
E connectors (IPE), 316  
EI (Executive Intrusion), 98  
electret headsets, 466  
FK keystrip  
assignable features, 94  
permanently assigned features, 93  
electromagnetic interference specifications  
M3820, M3310, and M3110 telephones, 486  
flashing LCDs, troubleshooting, 433  
footstands, 420, 421  
Emergency status message, 55  
Emergency Transfer, 96  
engineering codes, 29  
Foreign Exchange display, 92  
Fully Restricted Station indication, 92  
function keys, 51  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Page 497 of 504  
impulse noise  
measuring, 302  
vs. loop loss, 303  
incoming calls  
G
garbled prompts, troubleshooting, 435  
G connectors (IPE), 318  
answering, 92, 93  
indication, 78  
queuing, 93  
H
handsets  
interfaces, 202  
jack, 53, 56  
options, 155, 202  
volume control, 53  
installation  
ATA (Analog Terminal Adapter), 377  
insulation resistance, testing, 301  
Integrated Alarm Management, 97  
handsfree operation  
M2317 telephone, 444  
M3820, M3310, and M3110 telephones, 472  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 332  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)  
cross-connections, 313, 315, 316  
shelf, 460  
headsets  
Intercom, 450  
electret, 466  
interfaces, 156, 466  
jack, 53, 56  
ISDLC (Integrated Services Digital Line Card), 56,  
460  
ISDLC failures  
volume control, 53  
M2317 telephones, 366  
Hold key, 94  
hold state  
J
jacks  
M3820, M3310, M3110, 472  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 106, 330  
for headsets, 466  
and TELADAPT snap-in connectors, 491  
I
jumpers, 397  
ICI (Incoming Call Indicator) keys, 90  
assignments, 92  
junction loss  
determining, 304  
vs. cable characteristic impedance, 307  
QMT mode enabled/disabled, 78  
selecting calls, 93  
ICS procedure, 83  
K
idle state  
K connectors (IPE), 316  
M2016S telephone, 106  
Key-based Accessory module, 154  
M2317 telephone, 446, 447  
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 472  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 330  
keyboard  
layout, 51  
testing key functionality, 82  
Idle status message, 55  
key clicks, adjusting, 57  
key designations, 64  
impedance, cable characteristic  
under-carpet cabling, 290  
vs. junction loss, 307  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 498 of 504 Index  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
connections, 422  
line circuit card terminations, 119, 314, 368  
attendant consoles, 68, 72  
for wall mounting, 432  
installing and removing, 420  
troubleshooting, 436  
line cord requirements, 440  
line cords  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 373  
key/lamp add-on modules, 373  
Listed Directory Numbers display, 92  
logos with Brandline Inserts, 473  
loopback tests, 64, 83  
key/lamp strips  
functions, 93  
program mode, 96  
Loop Keys/Lamps  
described, 93  
key location codes, 82  
keys  
LCD indicators, 54  
stuck (M2250 console), 87, 88  
loop length  
knockout tabs, BLF/CGM, 39  
M2250 attendant console, 59  
loop power failures, 365  
L
loops  
Lamp Field test procedures, 42, 84  
diagnostic tests, 300  
distances vs. AWG, 290  
requirements, 299  
selecting, 299  
lamp tests, 83  
languages, 56  
LCD display screen  
contrast, 56  
loss, loop  
description, 31  
languages available, 56  
messages, 55  
maximum allowable, 299  
vs. impulse noise counts, 303  
softkey alternate functions, 80  
softkey functions, 51  
testing alphanumeric functionality, 85  
M
M2006 Meridian Modular Telephones, 325, 373  
External Alerter Boards, 416  
installing, 114, 356  
LCD indicators, 54  
M2317, 444  
Power Supply Boards, 393, 401  
wall mounting, 432  
M3820, M3310, M3110, 472  
LCDs, flashing, troubleshooting, 433  
L connectors (IPE), 317  
LD 12 program, 63  
M2008 Meridian Modular Telephones, 325, 373  
displays, 411  
External Alerter Boards, 416  
installing, 114, 356  
Power Supply Boards, 393, 401  
wall mounting, 432  
LD 32 program, 362  
LD 12 program, 54  
LD 15 program, 77  
LD 31 (verification testing), 85  
Level 1 mode, accessing, 79  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Page 499 of 504  
M2016S Meridian Modular Telephones, 373  
diagram, 374  
M2317 telephone  
cross-connections, 363  
displays, 405, 408, 416  
installing, 114, 356  
description and illustration, 439, 445  
dimensions, 454  
Power Supply Boards, 395  
wall mounting, 432  
environmental and safety considerations, 453  
installing, 361  
line engineering, 454  
M2216ACD Meridian Modular Telephones, 325,  
373  
power requirements, 454  
screens and softkeys, 444  
self-tests, 363  
software requirements, 452  
trouble-locating procedures, 365  
diagram, 374  
displays, 405, 408, 416  
installing, 114, 356  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
Power Supply Boards, 395  
power supply boards, 397  
M2616 Meridian Modular Telephones, 325, 373  
diagram, 374  
displays, 405, 408, 411, 416  
External Alert Boards, 416  
handsfree, 332  
M2250 attendant console  
BLF/CGM, 35  
covers, 62, 63  
installing, 114, 356  
cross-connecting, 71, 72, 73, 75  
displaying number of waiting calls, 95  
failure codes, 87  
features, 31  
installing, 60  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
Power Supply Boards, 395  
power supply boards, 397  
wall mounting, 432  
key designations, 65  
loopback tests, 64  
loop length, 59  
M3820, M3310, and M3110 telephones, 471  
environmental and safety considerations, 486  
fixed keys, 468  
rear/left side/bottom views, 50  
removing, 61  
static discharge ground connections, 60  
top view, 49  
functions, connections, and interfaces, 460  
hardware features and options, 472  
line engineering, 188, 487  
local alerting tones, 487  
positions, 190  
M2317 data terminals  
installing, 428  
M3900 telephones  
power supply connections, 429  
RS-232-C connectors, 430  
add-ons, 147  
description, 127  
environmental and safety considerations, 185  
features, 137  
handset interface, 202  
headset interface, 156  
installing, 189  
key descriptions, 159  
line engineering, 188  
wall mounting, 191  
Macintosh computers, 428, 429  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 500 of 504 Index  
major alarm indication/status message, 55, 95  
N
MCA (Meridian Communications Adapter)  
installing, 389  
NE-284-74-5001 adapters  
500/2500 connections, 313  
terminal connections, 59  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
troubleshooting, 435, 438  
V.35 interface, 385, 387  
NE-47QA  
500/2500 connections, 313  
terminal connections, 59  
M connectors (IPE), 318  
measuring  
NE-625F TELADAPT plugs and jacks  
500/2500 connections, 313  
background noise, 302  
DC loop resistance, 306  
impulse noise, 302  
terminal connections, 59  
Night Service key, 94  
Meridian External Alerter and Recording Interface,  
153  
Night Service mode  
entering, 90  
Meridian Modular Telephone add-ons  
External Alerter Boards, 416  
power supply boards, 401  
troubleshooting, 433  
softkey, 51  
status message, 55  
noise measurements  
background, 302  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 323–353  
cross-connections, 121  
designating, 119, 368  
impulse noise, 302  
no response, troubleshooting, 434, 435  
normal call processing mode  
accessing, 79  
display module, 108, 335  
exploded view, 374  
installing, 114, 356  
exiting Position Busy mode to, 90  
Key Expansion Module, 337  
relocating, 340  
normal operating ranges, wiring, 59  
NT7G10AA (Attendant Supervisory Module), 90  
NT8D02 cards, 72  
Meridian Programmable Data Adapter, 335  
messages, LCD display screen, 55  
message waiting feature, 471  
O
operating keys, 93  
microphone  
on M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 472  
Operating parameters for Virtual Office, 176  
operating procedures, 77  
operating ranges, wiring, 59  
minor alarm indication/status message, 55, 95  
modem pooling with MCA, 386  
MPDA (Meridian Programmable Data Adapter)  
installing, 389  
Options menu  
Contrast option, 56  
exiting from, 79  
selecting, 51, 80  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
ordering information  
codes, 29  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Page 501 of 504  
Power supply boards, 392, 401  
P
programmable keys  
packing and unpacking  
add-on modules, 372  
attendant consoles, 59  
telephones, 355  
M2317 telephones, 443  
M3820, M3310, M3110, 471  
PVC cable, 343, 487  
parameters, MCA, 386  
Q
QBB1B  
PC-based Console application, 28  
peripherals testing, 83  
500/2500 connections, 313  
terminal connections, 59  
PFT (Power Fail Transfer) switch, 53, 55  
plugs and jacks  
QMT2 DIP switch, 85  
500/2500 connections, 313  
terminal connections, 59  
QMT2 mode  
configuring attendant consoles for, 77  
enabling/disabling, 78  
LCD indicators, 54  
Position Busy key, 93  
Position Busy mode  
entering, 90  
queues  
and fault conditions, 101  
indication, 89  
softkey, 51  
Call Waiting indicator, 95  
removing calls from, 92  
status message, 55  
R
ranges  
Power Fail Transfer (PFT) switch, 53  
power failures, resets after, 101  
wiring, 59  
power requirements  
R connectors (IPE), 316  
for ADO (Asynchronous Data Option), 424  
for headsets, 466, 488  
for recording devices, 156, 202, 466  
M2317 telephone, 453, 454  
Recall display, 93  
Release Destination key, 94  
Release key, 93  
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 488  
RELEASE prompts, troubleshooting, 435  
Release Source key, 94  
power supplies and power units  
BLF/CGM, 33  
relocation of Meridian Modular Telephones, 340  
remote ringers, 153, 473  
data terminals, 429  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
MCA and MPDA, 347, 384  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 392, 401  
resetting attendant consoles  
described, 101  
hard reset procedure, 87  
Power Supply Boards  
closet configuration, 400  
installing, 393, 395, 397, 401  
Key Expansion Modules, 420  
MCA and MPDA, 347, 384  
removing, 393, 401  
ringing state  
on M2006/2008/2616/2016S/2216ACD  
Digital telephones, 106, 330  
on M3820, M3310, M3110, 472  
transformers, 399  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 502 of 504 Index  
RLS key  
TELADAPT connectors  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 116, 358  
500/2500 connections, 313  
M2317 telephones, 361  
Meridian Modular Telephones, 114, 356  
terminal connections, 59  
RS-232-C connectors, 428, 430  
S
TELADAPT snap-in connectors, 491  
S connectors (IPE), 317  
telephone failures  
screens  
M2317 telephones, 367  
on M2317, 440, 444  
telephone lines, engineering, 289  
scrolling LCD display screen, 52, 80  
security codes with relocations, 341  
selecting loops, 299  
telephones  
Asynchronous Data Options, 426  
connecting, 312  
self-tests  
cross-connecting, 119, 121, 313, 363, 368  
designating, 119, 311, 367  
exploded view, 374  
installing, 114, 356, 361  
key/lamp modules, 373  
packing and unpacking, 355  
power supplies, 392, 395, 397, 401  
removing, 310  
M2317 telephone, 363  
Semi-Automatic Camp-On, 99  
Series Call, 100  
Shift key purpose/location, 53  
Signal Destination key, 53, 94  
Signal Source key, 53, 94  
self-tests, 363  
trouble-locating procedures, 365  
wall mounting, 432  
softkeys  
alternate functions, 80  
definitions/functions, 51  
M2317 telephones, 447  
wiring, 313  
temperature, cable  
Speed Call feature, 95  
and cable attenuation, 305  
correcting for, 304  
Speed Call for Virtual Office, 176  
Speed Calling  
temperature and humidity ranges for operations  
M2317 telephone, 453  
with M2317 telephones, 452  
Meridian digital telephones, 185, 486  
S status message, 55  
terminal connections, 59  
standoffs, 46, 47  
testing  
static discharge ground connections, 60  
status messages, 55  
capacitance unbalance, 301  
DC continuity, 301  
insulation resistance, 301  
submenus, 79  
support spacers, BLF/CGM, 38  
tests, loop diagnostic, 300  
TGB (Trunk Group Busy) indicators, 89  
T
TGB (Trunk Group Busy) keys  
accessing, 79  
T connectors (IPE), 318  
QMT2 mode enabled/disabled, 78  
553-3001-367 Standard 3.00 August 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Page 503 of 504  
Tie Trunk display, 93  
wiring  
displays, 407  
time/date feature, 89  
installing, 57  
MCA, 385  
operating ranges, 59  
TN (Terminal Number) and relocations, 340  
tones, generating, 86  
telephones and attendant consoles, 69  
terminal connections, 59  
transformers  
BLF/CGM, 44  
zone cabling and conduit, 57, 58  
for headsets (AC), 466  
local plug-in, 489  
Power Supply Boards, 399  
wiring and loop lengths  
M2006/2008/2616/2016S/2216ACD Digital  
telephones, 343  
M2317 telephone, 454  
trouble-locating procedures  
M2317 telephones, 365  
M3820, M3310, M3110, 491  
M3820, M3310, M3110 telephones, 487, 488  
troubleshooting Meridian Modular Telephones, 433  
trunks  
wobbling, troubleshooting, 433  
busy indication, 78  
incoming calls on tie, 93  
status indications, 89  
Z
zone cabling and conduit, 58  
U
Z wiring  
500/2500 telephones, 313  
attendant consoles, 69  
cross-connections, 119, 120, 314, 319, 368,  
369  
User interface printed circuit card (UIP)  
hard reset, 87  
installed firmware test, 85  
testing peripherals connected to, 83  
terminal connections, 59  
V
V.35 interface, 385, 387  
verification testing (LD 31), 85  
Virtual Office (non-networked), 173  
Virtual Office feature implementation, 177  
voice channels/ports, 460  
voice failures  
M2317 telephones, 367  
volume control  
M3820, M3310, M3110, 471  
volume slider position, BLF/CGM, 36  
W
wall mount clips, 432  
Wide Area Telephone Service display, 93  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Page 504 of 504  
Telephones and Consoles Description, Installation, and Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Family Product Manual Contacts Copyright FCC notice Trademarks Document  
number Product release Document release Date Publish  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Telephones and Consoles  
Description, Installation, and Operation  
Copyright © Nortel Networks Limited 2005  
All Rights Reserved  
Information is subject to change without notice.  
Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design  
or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant.  
Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, This is the Way, This is  
Nortel (Design mark), SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are  
trademarks of Nortel Networks.  
Publication number: 553-3001-367  
Document release: Standard 3.00  
Date: August 2005  
Produced in Canada  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

MTX Audio Speaker TP112 User Manual
Nady Systems Microphone DKW3 HT User Manual
NHT Car Speaker SW 10 User Manual
NorthStar Navigation Fish Finder EXPLORER 657 User Manual
Optoma Technology Home Theater Screen DF WW9106F User Manual
Oregon Scientific Fitness Electronics WA101 User Manual
Oster Fryer CKSTDFFM40 User Manual
Palm Personal Computer 406 4555A US User Manual
Panasonic Fax Machine KX F1110NZ User Manual
Panasonic Handheld Game System KXL 810A User Manual